Yamaha PSR-1700 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-1700

Categorie: Muziekinstrumenten

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d’emploi

Manual de instrucciones

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number,

and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and

retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

Wichtiger Hinweis für die Benutzung in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Bescheinigung des Importeurs

Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daß der/die/das

Electronic Keyboard Typ: PSR-1700/PSR-2700

(Gerät, Typ, Bezeichnung)

in Übereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der

VERFÜGUNG 1046/84

(Amtsblattverfügung)

funk-entstört ist.

Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerätes

angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur Überprüfung der Serie auf

Einhaltung der Bestimmungen eingeräumt.

Yamaha Europa GmbH

Name des Importeurs

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Europa GmbH.

• Dies bezieht sich nur auf die von der Yamaha Europa GmbH vertriebenen Produkte.

Model _________________________________________

Serial No.______________________________________

Purchase Date _________________________________

PEDAL

1LINE

SAMPLE IN

MICR

AUX OUT

L+R/L

HEADPHONES

THRU

MIDI

OUT IN

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

AVIS:

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR.

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte

Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie

können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll

abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

Dit produkt is gefabriceerd in overeenstemming met de

radiostoringsvoorschriften van de Richtlijn van de Raad (82/499/EEG).

ΑΥΤΗ Η ΣΥΣΚΕΥΗ ΑΝΤΑΠΟΚΡΙΝΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΤΩΝ

Ο∆ΗΓΙΩΝ ΤΗΣ ΕΥΡΩΠΑΙΚΗΣ ΟΙΚΟΝΟΜΙΚΗΣ ΚΟΙΝΟΤΗΤΑΣ 82/499/

Ε.Ο.Κ..

Este produto está de acordo com o radio de interferencia frequente

requiridos do Conselho Diretivo 82/499/EEC.

Dette apparat overholder det gaeldende EF-direktiv vedrørende

radiostøj.

Cet appareil est conforme aux prescriptions de la directive

communautaire 87/308/CEE.

Diese Geräte entsprechen der EG-Richtlinie 82/499/EWG und/oder 87/

308/EWG.

This product complies with the radio frequency interference require-

ments of the Council Directive 82/499/EEC and/or 87/308/EEC.

Questo apparecchio è conforme al D.M.13 aprile 1989 (Direttiva CEE/

87/308) sulla soppressione dei radiodisturbi.

Este producto está de acuerdo con los requisitos sobre interferencias de

radio frequencia fijados por el Consejo Directivo 87/308/CEE.

YAMAHA CORPORATION

CANADA

THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE “CLASS

B” LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL

APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGU-

LATION OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICA-

TIONS.

LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE N’EMET PAS DE BRUITS

RADIOELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES

AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE LA “CLASSE B”

PRESCRITES DANS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE

RADIOELECTRIQUE EDICTE PAR LE MINISTERE DES COMMU-

NICATIONS DU CANADA.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som

den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har

stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá

selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita

koko laitetta verkosta.

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

Contents

Panel Controls 2

Taking Care of Your PortaTone 4

Preparation 5

■ Power Supply..............................................................................5

■ Installing the Backup Batteries ...................................................5

■ Using Headphones .....................................................................6

■ Connecting to an External Sound System ..................................6

■ Using Pedals...............................................................................6

■ The Music Stand.........................................................................6

Listen to the Demo! 7

■ Try the Disk Demo, Too! .............................................................8

Basic Editing Procedure 9

Selecting & Playing the Voices 11

■ Orchestration ............................................................................11

■ Voice Assignment .....................................................................13

■ Volume......................................................................................14

■ Octave ......................................................................................14

■ DSP Depth ................................................................................15

■ Pan ...........................................................................................15

■ Auto Harmony...........................................................................16

■ Effects.......................................................................................17

■ Keyboard Percussion................................................................18

■ Pitch Bend ................................................................................18

■ Modulation ................................................................................19

Overall Control 20

■ Split Point Change ....................................................................20

■ Transpose.................................................................................21

■ Tuning.......................................................................................21

■ DSP Type .................................................................................22

■ Touch Sensitivity.......................................................................23

Auto Accompaniment 24

■ Selecting a Style .......................................................................24

■ Setting the Auto Accompaniment Split Point ............................25

■ Auto Accompaniment Fingering................................................25

■ Tempo Control ..........................................................................28

■ Accompaniment Control ...........................................................29

■ Accompaniment Volume ...........................................................32

■ The Track Buttons ....................................................................33

■ Re-voicing the Tracks ...............................................................34

One Touch Setting 36

Registration Memory 37

Record Functions 39

Song Memory ................................................................................39

■ Realtime Accompaniment Track Recording .............................40

■ Realtime Melody Track Recording............................................42

■ Accompaniment And Melody Playback ....................................43

■ The [RESET] Button .................................................................44

■ Record Or Play from a Specified Measure ...............................44

The Multi Pads ...............................................................................45

■ Realtime Recording ..................................................................45

■ Playback ...................................................................................46

Custom Accompaniment ..............................................................47

■ Realtime Custom Accompaniment Recording ..........................47

■ Using a Custom Accompaniment .............................................49

Step Recording..............................................................................50

Editing Functions ..........................................................................53

■ Quantization..............................................................................53

■ Clearing Tracks.........................................................................54

■ Changing the Recorded Settings..............................................55

Using Floppy Disks 56

■ Formatting a New Floppy Disk..................................................57

■ Saving, Loading, & Deleting Disk Files.....................................58

● Saving to Disk .......................................................................58

● Loading From Disk ................................................................60

● Deleting a Disk File ...............................................................61

■ Quick Play:

Disk Orchestra Collection & Standard MIDI File Disks .............62

● Minus One Playback .............................................................62

PSR-2700 Digital Sampling 63

■ Connections..............................................................................63

■ Setting the Input Level ..............................................................63

■ Setting the Sampling Frequency...............................................64

■ Setting the Trigger Level...........................................................65

■ Recording .................................................................................66

■ Playing the Sample Pads..........................................................67

■ Editing Samples........................................................................68

● Clearing Samples..................................................................68

● Tuning the Samples ..............................................................68

● Volume, DSP Depth, & Pan Settings ....................................69

◆ Individual SAMPLE PAD Volume Settings.........................69

■ Playing Samples via the Keyboard ...........................................70

● Mapping ................................................................................70

■ Sample Memory Backup & Disk Storage..................................71

Pedal Assign 72

MIDI 73

MIDI Reception Modes ..................................................................74

■ Channel Reception Modes .......................................................74

■ Clock Mode...............................................................................75

■ Start/Stop Mode........................................................................75

MIDI Transmission ........................................................................76

■ MIDI Transmit Channels ...........................................................76

■ Local & MIDI Output ON/OFF...................................................76

Appendix ........................................................................................77

■ Voice & Polyphony List .............................................................77

■ Style List ...................................................................................78

■ Error Messages ........................................................................81

■ System Reset Procedure..........................................................82

■ Troubleshooting ........................................................................83

Index ...............................................................................................84

Percussion Kit List ......................................................................338

MIDI Implementation Chart.........................................................340

Specifications .............................................................................343

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of a Yamaha PSR-1700/PSR-2700. Your PSR-

1700/PSR-2700 is a high-quality musical instrument that incorporates

advanced Yamaha digital technology and many versatile features. In order to

obtain maximum performance and enjoyment from your PSR-1700/PSR-2700,

we urge you to read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly while trying out the

various features described. Keep the Owner’s Manual in a safe place for later

reference.

Taking Care of Your PortaTone

Your PortaTone will give you years of playing pleasure if you follow the

simple rules given below:

■ Location

Do not expose the instrument to the following

conditions to avoid deformation, discoloration, or

more serious damage.

• Direct sunlight (e.g. near a window).

• High temperatures (e.g. near a heat source, out-

side, or in a car during the daytime).

• Excessive humidity.

• Excessive dust.

• Strong vibration.

■ Power Supply

• Turn the power switch OFF when the instrument

is not in use.

• The power cord should be unplugged from the

AC outlet if the instrument is not to be used for

an extended period of time.

• Unplug the instrument during electric storms.

• Avoid plugging the instrument into the same AC

outlet as appliances with high power consump-

tion, such as electric heaters or ovens. Also avoid

using multi-plug adaptors since these can result

in reduced sound quality and possibly damage.

■ Turn Power OFF When Making

Connections

• To avoid damage to the instrument and other

devices to which it is connected (a sound system,

for example),

turn the power switches of all re-

lated devices OFF prior to connecting or discon-

necting audio and MIDI cables.

■ Handling and Transport

• Never apply excessive force to the controls, con-

nectors or other parts of the instrument.

• Always unplug cables by gripping the plug

firmly, not by pulling on the cable.

• Disconnect all cables before moving the instru-

ment.

• Physical shocks caused by dropping, bumping, or

placing heavy objects on the instrument can re-

sult in scratches and more serious damage.

■ Cleaning

• Clean the cabinet and panel with a dry soft cloth.

• A slightly damp cloth may be used to remove

stubborn grime and dirt.

• Never use cleaners such as alcohol or thinner.

• Avoid placing vinyl objects on top of the instru-

ment (vinyl can stick to and discolor the surface).

■ Electrical Interference

• This instrument contains digital circuitry and

may cause interference if placed too close to ra-

dio or television receivers. If this occurs, move

the instrument further away from the affected

equipment.

■ Service and Modification

• The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 contains no user serv-

iceable parts. Opening it or tampering with it in

anyway can lead to irreparable damage and pos-

sibly electric shock. Refer all servicing to quali-

fied YAMAHA personnel.

■ Data Backup

• Internal data (e.g. Song Memory data) is retained

in memory even if the power switch is turned off

as long as backup batteries are installed (page 5)

or the AC plug is connected. The internal

memory can, however, be corrupted by incorrect

operation. Be sure to save important data to

floppy disk frequently so you have a backup to

revert to if the data in memory is accidentally

damaged. Also note that magnetic fields can

damage data on floppy disks, so it is advisable to

make a second backup copy of disks that contain

particularly important data. Always keep backup

disks in a safe place away from stray magnetic

fields (e.g. those produced by speakers, appli-

ances containing motors, etc.). More important

precautions for floppy disk use are given in the

“Floppy Disk” section beginning on page 56.

YAMAHA is not responsible for damage caused by improper handling or operation.

Preparation

This section contains information about setting up your PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 and preparing to

play. Be sure to go through this section carefully before using your PSR-1700/PSR-2700.

■Installing the Backup Batteries

For memory backup the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 requires four 1.5V SUM-3, “AA” size, R-6 or equivalent

batteries. All PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 features will operate without these batteries installed, but song

memory and other data that is not saved to disk will be lost when then power is turned off. To prevent acci-

dental loss of data, we recommend that a set of backup batteries be installed while the instrument is in regular

use. When the backup batteries need to be replaced “Backup Battery Low” will appear on the LCD display

panel when the power is initially turned on (this also occurs if no backup batteries are installed). Try to re-

place the batteries

before they fail and the backup memory contents are lost.

■ Power Supply

After making sure that the AC mains voltage and frequency specified for your PSR-1700/PSR-2700 matches

your local power supply (check the label on the bottom panel), plug the power cord into a convenient AC outlet.

CAUTION

• Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the power cord)

during any record or disk operation! Doing so can result in a loss

of data.

PEDAL

AUX OUT

L+R/L

HEADPHONES

THRU

MIDI

OUT IN

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

AVIS:

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR.

Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom

panel.

Insert the four new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings

on the inside of the compartment.

Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place.

CAUTION

• When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of

four new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries.

• Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese)

at the same time.

• To prevent possible damage due to battery leakage, remove the

batteries from the instrument if it is not to be used for an extended

period of time.

• When you replace the batteries, any backed-up data will be lost. To

avoid this, be sure to save your valuable data to a floppy disk before

replacing the batteries.

Preparation

■Using Headphones

A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged into the rear-panel

HEADPHONES jack for private practice or late-night playing. The internal

speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is

plugged into the HEADPHONES jack.

HEADPHONES

■Connecting to an External Sound System

The AUX OUT L+R/L and R jacks deliver the output of the PSR-1700/

PSR-2700 for connection to an instrument amplifier, mixing console, PA

system, or recording equipment. If you will be connecting the PSR-1700/

PSR-2700 to a monophonic sound system, use only the L+R/L jack. When

a plug is inserted into the L+R/L jack only, the left- and right-channel sig-

nals are combined and delivered via the L+R/L jack so you don’t lose any

of the instrument’s sound.

AUX OUT

L+R/L

Stereo sound system

■Using Pedals

An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch or FC7 foot controller can

be plugged into either or both of the rear-panel PEDAL jacks.

The PEDAL 1 jack is initially assigned to sustain control. A footswitch

connected to this jack functions as a damper pedal, controlling sustain.

Press the pedal to sustain notes after the keys are released.

The PEDAL 2 jack is initially assigned to the voice volume control

(MIDI Expression control). An FC7 foot controller connected to this jack

can be used to control voice volume: press the pedal forward to increase

voice volume; backward to decrease voice volume.

Both the PEDAL jacks can be assigned to a wide range of other func-

tions as described in the “Pedal Assign” section on page 72.

PEDAL

(FC7) (FC5)

■The Music Stand

Insert the bottom edge of the music stand into the slot located at the rear

of the control panel.

Once you’ve set up your PSR-1700/PSR-2700, try listening to the pre-programmed demonstra-

tion songs — they’ll give you a good idea of what the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 can do!

ZTurn the Power ON & Set the Volume ..................................................................................................

VPress DEMO [START/STOP] to Stop ....................................................................................................

Press the DEMO [START/STOP] button again to stop demo playback.

Before playing the demo turn the power ON by pressing the POWER

switch (the panel indicators and LCD display panel will light), and turn the

MASTER VOLUME control up (clockwise) about a quarter-turn from its

minimum position.

Listen to the Demo!

POWER

ON/ OFF

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

DEMO

SONG #

START/STOP

XSelect a Song..........................................................................................................................................

DEMO

SONG #

START/STOP

POWER

ON/ OFF

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

CPress DEMO [START/STOP] to Start ....................................................................................................

Press the DEMO [START/STOP] button to start playback, and use the

MASTER VOLUME control to set the ideal listening level. The selected

demonstration will play repeatedly.

NOTES

• During demo playback you can select different voices and play along

on the keyboard — see the “Selecting & Playing the Voices” section

beginning on page 11.

Press the DEMO [SONG #] button a few times until the number of the

desired demo song appears on the LCD display.

0 (ChainPlay): Repeat playback of all demo songs in sequence.

1-8: Repeat playback of the selected demo song number.

NOTES

• “0:ChainPlay” is automatically selected whenever the power switch is

turned on.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

DEMO

SONG #

START/STOP

Demo=0–:ChainPlay

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Demo=0–:ChainPlay

Listen to the Demo!

QUICK PLAY

MINUS ONESTART/STOP

■Try the Disk Demo, Too!

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 also come supplied with demonstration floppy disks that you can play as

follows:

NOTES

• The PSR-1700 comes with one demonstration disk containing 4 dem-

onstration songs, while the PSR-2700 includes an additional disk

containing 2 demo songs that make use of the PSR-2700’s Digital

Sampling feature.

ZInsert the Demo Disk..............................................................................................................................

Insert demonstration disk into the disk drive unit with the sliding door

facing the drive slot and the label side of the disk facing upward. The disk

should click securely into place.

XStart Playback.........................................................................................................................................

QUICK PLAY

MINUS ONESTART/STOP

Press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button to start playback. The

disk demo songs will play back in sequence.

NOTES

• If the demo requires sampled voice data included in the disk

(PSR-2700 only) the sampled voice data will automatically be

loaded into sampled voice number 128 before demo playback

begins. If there is already sampled voice data in memory or the

wave RAM is full, the disk may not load automatically. See page

60 for details.

• If you simply press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button playback

will begin from the lowest file number on the disk. It is also possible to

specify the file number from which playback is to begin prior to press-

ing the [START/STOP] button.

CStop the Demo & Eject the Disk............................................................................................................

When you’re ready to stop the demo, press the QUICK PLAY [START/

STOP] button to stop playback, then press the disk drive eject button and

remove the disk.

QUICK PLAY

MINUS ONESTART/STOP

CAUTION

• Never attempt to eject the demonstration disk(s) or turn the

power off during demo playback. Doing so can damage both the

disk drive and the disk.

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 feature a flexible-but-consistent interface that lets you edit just

about all of its parameters using the same basic procedure. Once familiar with the system,

you’ll be able to edit any parameter quickly and easily. Here’s the basic procedure:

Basic Editing Procedure

XEdit the Parameter..................................................................................................................................

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 let you edit parameters using four different

methods. Use the one that best suits the parameter you have selected:

Each time you press a function button after initially selecting the function,

the value of the corresponding parameter will be incremented (increased) by

one. If you hold the function button for a few seconds, the parameter will

begin to increment continuously as long as you hold the button.

2-1: The Function Button

If, for example, you press the [VOICE SELECT] button and LCD display

panel shows that voice number 36 (VCE=036:Fretless) is currently selected,

you can select voice number 37 (VCE=037:SlapBas1) simply by pressing the

[VOICE SELECT] button again.

–

_ _

0 234567891

–+

RESET

VOICE

SELECT

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

ZPress a Function Button ........................................................................................................................

First press the button corresponding to the function or parameter you want

to edit. To select voice numbers, for example, press the [VOICE SELECT]

button (its indicator will light). The name of the selected parameter and its

current value will be shown on the LCD display panel.

VOICE

SELECT

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

● The LCD Display Panel

The PSR-2700 and PSR-1700 feature backlit LCD display panels that make

it easy to select and edit parameters as well as perform all other operations.

The PSR-2700 display has two lines of 24 characters each, while the PSR-

1700 has one line of 16 characters.

The PSR-2700 display has four sections: STYLE, VOICE,

CHORD, and PARAMETER & VALUE. The STYLE and

VOICE sections on the upper line always show the currently se-

lected accompaniment style and voice. The CHORD section on

the lower line shows the detected chord when the Auto Accompa-

niment feature is used, and the PARAMETER & VALUE section

shows the parameter and value currently selected for editing.

The PSR-1700 display always shows the parameter and value

currently selected for editing.

NOTES

• “Now Processing” may appear on the LCD display panel while the PSR-

1700/PSR-2700 is processing the data (for example recorded data) or

ready to process it.

CHORD

STYLE VOICE

PARAMETER & VALUE

PSR-2700

PSR-1700

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff VCE=00–1:GrandPno

VCE=00–1:GrandPno

NOTES

• The SPLIT POINT button, MAPPING button (PSR-2700), and PITCH

button (PSR-2700) are exceptions.

Basic Editing Procedure

The [+] and [–] buttons can be used to increment (increase by one) or dec-

rement (decrease by one) the currently selected parameter. Press the [+] button

briefly to increment the parameter value, or the [–] button to decrement. If you

hold the [+] or [–] button down, the value will increment or decrement con-

tinuously — simply release the button when the desired value has been

reached.

2-2: The [+] and [−] Buttons

The number buttons — to the right of the [+] and [–] buttons — allow

direct numeric entry of the desired value, and are therefore the fastest way to

edit in many situations.

To select a voice, for example, choose one of the 128 voices — numbered

“01” through “128” — listed in the “Voice & Polyphony List” on page 77, then

enter its number using the number buttons. To select “Harmonica” (number

23), for example, first press [2] then [3]. The number “23” should then appear

on the LCD display panel along with the name “Harmnica”.

The [+/–] button is used to switch between positive and negative values

with parameters that allow negative values (Transpose, Tuning, Octave, and

Pan, for example). A “–” appears before negative values on the LCD display

panel.

When selecting voice numbers the [+/–] button is used to enter the hundreds

digit of the voice number (the button alternately selects no hundreds digit or

“1”), as required, prior to entering the tens and ones digits. The [1] number

button cannot be used to enter the hundreds digit when selecting voices.

Values outside the range of the selected parameter can not be entered.

2-3: The Number Buttons

This is undoubtedly the easiest way to edit most parameters. Simply rotate

the dial clockwise to increment or counter-clockwise to decrement.

2-4: The Data Dial

NOTES

• After editing a parameter other than [VOICE SELECT], the [VOICE SE-

LECT] parameter will automatically be re-selected after a brief delay.

• If you attempt to change a parameter that can not be edited in the

current mode, “IllegalOperation” will appear on the LCD display.

–+

RESET

–

_ _

789

02341

Example: Voice number “120”

–

_ _

Some operations that change important settings or erase data may require you to

confirm your choice by pressing the [YES] or [NO] button. When a choice needs to be

confirmed the ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash and a digitally sampled voice will ask

“Are you sure?”. Press the [YES] button to execute the specified operation or the [NO]

button to cancel and leave the settings or data unaffected.

If you don’t want to hear the “Are you sure?” confirmation sound, hold down the [NO]

button while initially turning the power switch on. To restore the confirmation sound, turn

the power switch off, then turn it back on again while holding down the [YES] button. The

on/off status of the confirmation sound is retained in memory even when the power

switch is turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed or an AC plug is

connected.

● Yes/No Confirmation

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

There are actually a number of variations on

each of the above orchestrations. The ORCHES-

TRATION buttons are used to choose the type of

orchestration you want.

● Single Modes

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

ORCHESTRATION

Left-hand voice 2

Left-hand voice 1

Right-hand voice 1

(or single voice)

Right-hand voice 2

(or single voice)

The four available parts are turned on and off by

the [R1], [R2], [L1], and [L2] buttons. The indica-

tors next to each of these buttons tell you which

parts are on and which are off, and therefore indi-

cate the current orchestration mode. The [EDIT]

button determines which of the four orchestration

parts is to be edited. You can, for example, assign

any of the 128 voices to each of the orchestration

parts. But before we discuss voice assignment and

editing, let’s take a look at the various orchestration

modes:

In the “single” modes either the [R1] or [R2] part

voice can be played over the entire keyboard. The R1

and R2 single-voice modes are selected simply by

pressing either the [R1] or [R2] button if neither the

[L1] or [L2] indicators are lit. If the [L1] and/or [L2]

indicators are lit, press them so that both indicators

go out.

Note that when you select the [R1] or [R2] single-

voice mode, the triangular EDIT indicator for the se-

lected voice also lights. This means you can select a

different voice number or otherwise edit the current

voice using the procedures described on page 13.

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

The R1 voice is played across the

entire keyboard.

The R2 voice is played across the

entire keyboard.

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have 128 stunning

voices plus 8 different drum and percussion kits

that you can select and play in a number of ways.

Selecting & Playing the Voices

■Orchestration

The unique ORCHESTRATION button group in the VOICE control section lets you select and play from one

to four “parts” at the same time using a variety of “orchestrations”. One of the 128 voices is assigned to each

part.

● Single: One voice over the entire keyboard.

● Dual: Two voices simultaneously over the entire keyboard.

● Split: Different voices with the left and right hands.

● Split & Dual: Combinations of the Split and Dual modes.

PSR-2700

PSR-1700

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

VOICE

VOICE

SELECT

VOL OCTAVE DSP

DEPTH

PAN ORCHESTRATION HARMONY

TYPE

EFFECT

TYPE

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

HARMONY EFFECT

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

VOICE

VOICE

SELECT

VOL OCTAVE DSP

DEPTH

PAN ORCHESTRATION HARMONY

TYPE

EFFECT

TYPE

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

HARMONY EFFECT

SAMPLED

VOICE

MODULATION PITCH BEND

Selecting & Playing the Voices

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

● Dual Mode

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

The R1 & R2 voices are played

across the entire keyboard.

● Split & Dual Modes

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

▼

L1 voice.

R1 voice.

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 allow four different

split modes, with one voice played on the left-hand

section of the keyboard ([L1] or [L2]) and a different

voice on the right-hand section of the keyboard ([R1]

or [R2]). Selecting a split mode is simply a matter of

pressing the buttons corresponding to the desired

left- and right-hand parts.

The split point (i.e. the key at which the voices

change over) can be set at any desired key by using

the SPLIT POINT CHANGE function described on

page 20.

L2 voice. R1 voice.

L1 voice. R2 voice.

L2 voice. R2 voice.

● Split Modes

In the dual mode both the [R1] and [R2] part

voices are selected so they can be played simultane-

ously across the entire keyboard. To select the dual

mode, make sure that both the [L1] and [L2] indica-

tors are out, then press both the [R1] and [R2] but-

tons simultaneously (or hold one while pressing the

other).

You can switch back to either of the single modes

from the dual mode simply by pressing the [R1] or

[R2] button, as required.

There are five possible combinations of the split

and dual modes, as shown below. The part for the

single-voice side of the combination is selected sim-

ply by pressing the appropriate part button, while for

the dual-voice side both buttons must be pressed

simultaneously (or one while holding the other).

L1 voice. R1 & R2 voices.

L2 voice.

R1 & R2 voices.

R2 voice.

R1 voice.

R1 & R2 voices.

L1 & L2 voices.

■Voice Assignment

You can assign any of the 128 voices to each of the ORCHESTRATION parts, whether the part is currently

ON or OFF.

ZPress the [VOICE SELECT] Button .......................................................................................................

You don’t need to do this if the [VOICE SELECT] indicator is already

lit. Also make sure that the [KEYBOARD PERCUSSION] and [SAM-

PLED VOICE] (PSR-2700) indicators are out.

XSelect the Part You Want to Edit...........................................................................................................

Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part to which

you want to assign a new voice. The [EDIT] indicators light in sequence in

the clockwise direction each time the [EDIT] button is pressed.

NOTES

• You can edit the voice number of a part that is OFF while playing a

different part.

• Actually, the [VOICE SELECT] mode is automatically selected when-

ever the [EDIT] button is pressed, so you don’t really need to press

[VOICE SELECT] as described in step 1 if you’re going to use the

[EDIT] button prior to selecting a voice number.

EDIT

VOICE

SELECT

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

SAMPLED

VOICE

CSelect a Voice Number...........................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[VOICE SELECT] button itself to select the required voice number (see

page 9 for editing procedure details).

021

–+

RESET

When entering voice numbers higher than 99, use the [+/–] button to

enter the hundreds digit prior to entering the tens and ones digits: the button

alternately selects no hundreds digit or “1”.

–

_ _

Example: Voice number “120”

NOTES

• The voice categories are listed in the “VOICE” list on the PSR-1700/

PSR-2700 panel. See page 77 for a complete list.

• The optimum keyboard range is preset for each voice.

(PSR-2700)

Selecting & Playing the Voices

■Volume

You can individually set the volume of each orchestration part to set up the ideal balance between parts.

ZSelect the Part You Want to Edit...........................................................................................................

Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part you want

to edit.

■Octave

You can individually shift the octave of each orchestration part up or down by up to two octaves. This makes

it easy, for example, to lower the pitch of a bass voice to an appropriate octave without affecting the other parts

in your orchestration.

ZSelect the Part You Want to Edit...........................................................................................................

Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part you want

to edit.

CSet the Octave ........................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[OCTAVE] button itself to set the desired octave. The octave range is from

–2 (down two octaves) to +2 (up two octaves). The normal octave value for

the selected voice can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–]

buttons at the same time.

XPress the [VOL] Button ..........................................................................................................................

Press the VOICE control section [VOL] button. The current volume

value of the selected part will appear on the LCD display panel.

VOL

PSR-2700PSR-1700

CSet the Volume .......................................................................................................................................

021

–+

RESET

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[VOL] button itself to set the desired volume. The volume range is from 00

(no sound) to 24 (maximum volume). The default volume value (21) can be

recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

XPress the [OCTAVE] Button ..................................................................................................................

OCTAVE

Press the VOICE control section [OCTAVE] button. The current octave

value of the selected part will appear on the LCD display panel.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

021

–+

RESET

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Volume=2–1

Volume=2–1

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Octave= 0–

Octave= 0–

■DSP Depth

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 features a built-in digital signal processor (DSP) that can be used to apply a

range of reverb and delay effects to the voices. The [DSP TYPE] button in the OVERALL CONTROL section

(page 22) determines the type of effect to be applied, while the VOICE section [DSP DEPTH] button lets you

individually set the amount of effect applied to each orchestration part.

ZSelect the Part You Want to Edit...........................................................................................................

CSet the DSP Depth ..................................................................................................................................

021

–+

RESET

XPress the [DSP DEPTH] Button.............................................................................................................

DSP

DEPTH

PSR-2700PSR-1700

■Pan

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 delivers true stereo sound, and you can use this parameter to individually set

the stereo (pan) position of each orchestration part to create a broad stereo image of your sound.

ZSelect the Part You Want to Edit...........................................................................................................

Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part you want

to edit.

XPress the [PAN] Button..........................................................................................................................

PAN

Press the VOICE control section [PAN] button. The current pan value of

the selected part will appear on the LCD display panel.

CSet the Pan Position...............................................................................................................................

021

–+

RESET

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[PAN] button itself to set the desired pan value. The pan range is from –7

(full left) to +7 (full right). A setting of “0” places the sound of the selected

part in the center of the stereo sound field. Other settings produce in-be-

tween positions. “–4”, for example, would place the sound between center

and full left.

The center pan position (0) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the

[+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

NOTES

• The new pan value will apply from the next note played — i.e. you

can’t pan the sound of a note while it is playing.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[DSP DEPTH] button itself to set the desired DSP depth. The depth range

is from 00 (OFF: no effect, direct sound only) to 15 (maximum effect).

The default DSP depth value (06) can be recalled instantly by pressing

both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

Press the VOICE control section [DSP DEPTH] button. The current

DSP depth value of the selected part will appear on the LCD display panel.

Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part you want

to edit.

DSP Depth=0–6

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff DSP Depth=0–6

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Panpot= 0–:Center

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Panpot= 0–:Center

Selecting & Playing the Voices

■Auto Harmony

Auto Harmony is used with the Auto Accompaniment feature (see page 24). It automatically adds appropriate

harmony notes to a single-note melody line you play on the keyboard. You can choose from 10 different types of

harmony that can be assigned to the right-hand orchestration parts.

NOTES

• The Auto Harmony feature cannot be used when Auto Accompani-

ment fingering mode 5 “Full” is selected (page 28).

This harmony type produces a duophonic melody

with the second voice below the melody line. If

you turn both the R1 and R2 voices on (DUAL

mode) the notes you play on the keyboard will be

played by the R1 voice, and the harmony notes by

the R2 voice. You can individually set the R1 and

R2 voices and voice parameters as required.

A parallel voice is produced a fifth above the

melody voice. As in the Duet type, the R1 and R2

voices can be set individually in the dual mode.

Similar to Duet, but the second voice is above the

melody line. The R1 and R2 voices can be set

individually in the dual mode.

This harmony type generates two voices in addi-

tion to the melody voice. Both of the harmony

voices are assigned to R2 in the dual mode.

Three or four notes are added to the melody to

produce four or five-note chords. In the dual mode

the highest and lowest voices (always one octave

apart) are assigned to R1, and the inner two or

three notes are assigned to R2.

Three harmony notes are generated to produce a

four-note chord. If both the R1 and R2 voices are

turned on (dual mode), the 1st (melody) and 3rd

notes are assigned to R1 while the 2nd and 4th

are assigned to R2.

Similar to the preceding type, but depending on

the chords played this type will sometimes pro-

duce a more colorful sound. The note assignment

in the dual mode is also different: 1st and 2nd

notes to R1, 3rd and 4th notes to R2.

Four-note chords with open voice (large intervals

between the notes). The result is a very “open”

sound. Since the harmony notes can be as much

as two octaves below the melody, avoid playing in

the lower registers. With certain voices you might

find that changing the octave (see “Octave” on

page 14) results in better sound. In the dual mode

the top (melody) note is assigned to R1 and all

three harmony notes are assigned to R2.

One note is added an octave below the melody.

In the dual mode the melody is assigned to R1

and the lower note to R2.

The notes and assignments are the same as in

the Block type, but the notes are arpeggiated.

06:4-way

close 1

07:4-way

close 2

08:4-way

open

09: Octave

10: Strum

01: Duet

02: 1 + 5

03: Country

04: Trio

05: Block

The Harmony Types

ZTurn Auto Harmony ON .........................................................................................................................

HARMONY

TYPE

HARMONY

Press the [HARMONY] button so that its indicator lights. This turns

Auto Harmony ON.

NOTES

• The HARMONY can’t be engaged when Keyboard Percussion is ON.

CSelect a Harmony Type ..........................................................................................................................

XPress the [HARMONY TYPE] Button ....................................................................................................

HARMONY

TYPE

HARMONY

021

–+

RESET

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[HARMONY TYPE] button itself to select the desired effect.

Press the VOICE control section [HARMONY TYPE] button. The

number of the currently selected harmony type will appear on the LCD dis-

play panel.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Harm.=0–1:Duet

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Harm.=0–1:Duet

VTurn Auto Harmony ON or OFF as Required .......................................................................................

■Effects

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have a range of 12 delay-based effects — in addition to the DSP effects (pages

15 and 22) — that can be selected and applied to the right-hand orchestration parts (the left-hand orchestration

parts are not affected).

ZTurn the Effect ON..................................................................................................................................

Use the [HARMONY] button to turn Auto Harmony ON or OFF. Auto

Harmony is ON when the [HARMONY] button indicator is lit.

NOTES

• Only a single note can be played at a time on the keyboard (or the

right-hand section of the keyboard) when the Auto Harmony feature is

used.

• If you play more than one note at the same time while Auto Harmony

is ON, only the highest note will sound.

• Auto Harmony will only function when the Auto Accompaniment func-

tion is being used (page 24).

XPress the [EFFECT TYPE] Button .........................................................................................................

Press the VOICE control section [EFFECT TYPE] button. The number

of the currently selected effect will appear on the LCD display panel.

CSelect an Effect.......................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[EFFECT TYPE] button itself to select the desired effect.

HARMONY

TYPE

HARMONY

EFFECT

TYPE

EFFECT

EFFECT

TYPE

EFFECT

PSR-2700PSR-1700

021

–+

RESET

Press the [EFFECT] button so that its indicator lights. This turns ON

the effect.

NOTES

• The EFFECT can’t be engaged when Keyboard Percussion is ON.

Eff.=0–4:Echo4

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Eff.=0–4:Echo4

01 Echo 1

02 Echo 2

03 Echo 3

04 Echo 4

05 Tremolo 1

06 Tremolo 2

07 Tremolo 3

08 Tremolo 4

09 Trill 1

10 Trill 2

11 Trill 3

12 Trill 4

The Effects

VTurn the Effect ON or OFF as Required ...............................................................................................

Use the [EFFECT] button to turn the effect ON or OFF. The selected

effect is ON when the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit.

NOTES

• You can change the effect type whether the effect is ON or OFF.

EFFECT

TYPE

EFFECT

Selecting & Playing the Voices

■Keyboard Percussion

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have 8 different drum and percussion “kits” that can be played on the keyboard

when the Keyboard Percussion function is turned ON. The types of drum and percussion instruments played by

the various keys when Keyboard Percussion function is selected are marked by symbols above the keys.

ZTurn Keyboard Percussion ON .............................................................................................................

Press the [KEYBOARD PERCUSSION] button so that its indicator

lights to turn Keyboard Percussion ON. The percussion kit number will

appear on the LCD display panel.

XSelect a Percussion Kit..........................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[VOICE SELECT] button to select the desired percussion kit (1 through

8). See page 338 for a complete list of the percussion kit instruments.

The Percussion Kits

1 Standard

2 Room

3 Rock

4 Electronic

PSR-2700PSR-1700

021

–+

RESET

5 Analog

6 Jazz

7 Brush

8 Classic

NOTES

• The HARMONY, EFFECT, and TRANSPOSE functions (pages 16,

17, and 21) do not affect the percussion sounds. The HARMONY and

EFFECT functions will be canceled when Keyboard Percussion is

turned ON.

• The ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button does not function when Key-

board Percussion is turned ON.

● Setting the Pitch Bend Range

The maximum amount of pitch bend produced by the PITCH BEND wheel can be set anywhere from ±1

semitone to

±12 semitones (i.e. plus or minus one octave).

■Pitch Bend

The PITCH BEND wheel to the left of the keyboard allows the pitch of

notes played on the keyboard to be bent up or down — roll the wheel away

from you to bend up, and toward you to bend down (this situation can be

reversed, as described below). When the PITCH BEND wheel is moved

almost all the way in either direction, the current pitch bend range value

will appear on the LCD display panel (see below).

PITCH BEND

–

VCE=1–:STANDARD

08:Showtune 1:STANDARD

AccOff VCE=1–:STANDARD

VOICE

SELECT

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

To set the pitch bend range, roll the PITCH BEND wheel all the way in

either direction so that the current range value appears on the LCD display

panel.

ZCall the Pitch Bend Range Parameter ..................................................................................................

PSR-2700PSR-1700

PITCH BEND

–

XSet the Pitch Bend Range......................................................................................................................

While holding the PITCH BEND wheel at its maximum position, use

the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to select the

desired pitch bend range. Use the [+/–] button to enter negative values. The

pitch bend range value is displayed in semitones (–12 through 12). If a mi-

nus setting is selected pitch bend wheel operation is reversed — i.e. roll the

wheel away from you to lower pitch. The default pitch bend range (02) can

be instantly recalled by pressing [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously.

CRelease the PITCH BEND Wheel...........................................................................................................

Release the PITCH BEND wheel when you’ve set the required pitch

bend range.

021

–+

RESET

P.B.Range=+–02

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff P.B.Range=+–02

■Modulation

The MODULATION button on the side panel of the instrument, next to

the PITCH BEND wheel, can be used to apply pitch modulation (vibrato) to

most voices. The modulation speed is preset for each voice, but the depth

can be set as required.

ZCall the Modulation Depth Parameter ..................................................................................................

To set the modulation depth, press and hold the MODULATION button

so that the current depth value appears on the LCD display panel.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Mod.Depth=2– 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Mod.Depth=2–

XSet the Modulation Depth ......................................................................................................................

While holding the MODULATION button, use the [+] and [–] buttons,

the number buttons, or the data dial to select the desired modulation depth.

The available modulation depth range is from 1 (minimum depth) to 3

(maximum depth).

021

–+

RESET

CRelease the MODULATION Button .......................................................................................................

Release the MODULATION button when you’ve set the required

modulation depth.

NOTES

• The same modulation depth setting may produce slightly different

effects with different voices.

Overall Control

The OVERALL CONTROL section includes a range of parameters that, as their title

suggests, apply to the overall sound of the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700.

■ Split Point Change

This function lets you set the split point (the key that separates the left-hand and right-hand orchestration

parts) to any key on the keyboard.

ZTurn Auto Accompaniment OFF ...........................................................................................................

To set the split point for the left- and right-hand orchestration parts,

make sure that the [AUTO ACCOMP] indicator is off before proceeding.

NOTES

• The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 actually memorizes two separate split

points: one for the left- and right-hand orchestration parts, and one for

Auto Accompaniment mode. See page 25 for details on setting the

Auto Accompaniment split point.

STYLE

SELECT

AUTO

ACCOMP

0 OFF

.....................................

1 HALL 1

2 HALL 2

3 ROOM 1

4 ROOM 2

OVERALL CONTROL

SPLIT

POINT

TEMPO



TRANS-

POSE

DSP

TYPE



TUNING

TOUCH

SENSE

METRONOME TOUCH

RESPONSE

DSP TYPE

5 PLATE 1

6 PLATE 2

7 DELAY 1

8 DELAY 2

XPress the [SPLIT POINT] Button ...........................................................................................................

CSet the Split Point...................................................................................................................................

SPLIT

POINT

SPLIT

POINT

Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [SPLIT POINT] button. The

key number of the current split point will appear on the LCD display panel.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

NOTES

• The key numbers for each note are listed above the keyboard. The C3

(middle C) key number, for example, is 60.

The easiest way to set the split point is to press the key you want to set

as the split point while holding the [SPLIT POINT] button. The number of

the selected key will appear on the LCD display panel.

As with all other parameters, you can also use the [+] and [–] buttons,

the number buttons, or the data dial to select the desired split point. The

default split point (69) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and

[–] buttons at the same time.

NOTES

• The split-point key becomes the lowest key in the right-hand section of

the keyboard.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

SplitPt=0–61:C#3

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff SplitPt=0–61:C#3

SplitPt=0–65:F3

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff SplitPt=0–65:F3

■Transpose

The [TRANSPOSE] button makes it possible to shift the pitch of the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 up or down in

semitone intervals up to a maximum of 12 semitones (one octave). Transposing the pitch of the keyboard makes

it easier to play in difficult key signatures, and you can easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a

singer or other instrumentalist.

ZPress the [TRANSPOSE] Button ...........................................................................................................

Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [TRANSPOSE] button. The

current transpose value will appear on the LCD display panel.

■Tuning

The [TUNING] button makes it possible to tune the pitch of the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 to match other instru-

ments. Tuning can be accomplished over a ±50-cent range (that’s 100 cents total, or one semitone) in 33 steps.

ZPress the [TUNING] Button....................................................................................................................

Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [TUNING] button. The current

tuning value will appear on the LCD display panel.

XSet the Tuning ........................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[TUNING] button itself to set the desired tuning value.

The tuning range is from –16 (–50 cents) to +16 (+50 cents). “00” (±0

cents) is the “normal” tuning value. The normal tuning value (00) can be

recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

NOTES

• The tuning setting is retained in memory even when the power switch

is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC

plug is connected.

TRANS-

POSE



TUNING

PSR-2700PSR-1700

021

–+

RESET

XSet the Desired Degree of Transposition.............................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[TRANSPOSE] button itself to set the desired degree of transposition. Use

the [+/–] button to enter negative values.

The transposition range is from –12 to +12, with –12 corresponding to

downward transposition by 12 semitones (one octave), and +12 correspond-

ing to upward transposition by 12 semitones. 00 is the “normal” keyboard

pitch value. The normal transpose value (00) can be recalled instantly by

pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

NOTES

• The new transpose value will apply from the next note played — i.e.

you can’t transpose the sound of a note while it is playing.

021

–+

RESET

Transpose= 0–0

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Transpose= 0–0

Tune= 0–0:440.0Hz 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Tune= 0–0:440.0Hz

Overall Control

■DSP Type

The [DSP TYPE] button selects one of eight digital effects that you can use for extra depth and expressive

power. This button determines the type of effect to be used, while the [DSP DEPTH] button in the VOICE sec-

tion allow the depth of the effect to be individually set for each orchestration part.

ZPress the [DSP TYPE] Button ...............................................................................................................

Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [DSP TYPE] button. The

number of the current DSP type will appear on the LCD display panel.

XSelect a DSP Type ..................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[DSP TYPE] button itself to select the desired DSP type (0 for OFF, or 1 …

8 as listed below). The default DSP type (1) can be recalled instantly by

pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

The DSP Types

1 Hall 1

2 Hall 2

3 Room 1

4 Room 2

5 Plate 1

6 Plate 2

7 Delay 1

8 Delay 2

NOTES

• DSP effects may sound different with different voices.

• The DSP Type setting is retained in memory even when the power

switch is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or

the AC plug is connected.

These are simulations of the large plate reverb devices traditionally

used in professional recording studios.

Delay 1 produces a distinct series of delay repeats, while Delay 2 pro-

duces a smoother multiple-delay sound.

For a spacious reverb sound use one of the Hall settings. These effects

simulate the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Hall 2 has a longer

reverb time and therefore simulates a larger hall than Hall 1.

These settings add relatively short reverb effects to the sound that are

similar to the type of acoustic reverberation you might hear in different

rooms.

0 OFF

.....................................

1 HALL 1

2 HALL 2

3 ROOM 1

4 ROOM 2

DSP

TYPE



DSP TYPE

5 PLATE 1

6 PLATE 2

7 DELAY 1

8 DELAY 2

PSR-2700PSR-1700

021

–+

RESET

DspTyp=1–:Hall1 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff DspTyp=1–:Hall1

■Touch Sensitivity

This function varies the touch sensitivity of the keyboard. Use this capability to adjust the keyboard touch

sensitivity for the best results with your own particular playing style.

ZPress the [TOUCH SENSE] Button .......................................................................................................

Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [TOUCH SENSE] button. The

current sensitivity setting will appear on the LCD display panel.

VTurn Touch Sensitivity ON or OFF as Required..................................................................................

Use the [TOUCH RESPONSE] button to turn touch sensitivity ON or

OFF as required. When OFF (i.e. when the indicator is off) the same vol-

ume is produced no matter how hard you play on the keyboard. Touch sen-

sitivity can be turned OFF to produce a more realistic effect with voices

that normally do not have touch response: e.g. organ and harpsichord.

XTurn Touch Sensitivity ON ....................................................................................................................

Press the [TOUCH RESPONSE] button so that its indicator lights. This

turns touch sensitivity ON.

CSet the Sensitivity ..................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[TOUCH SENSE] button itself to set the desired sensitivity value (1 … 5).

A setting of “1” produces the least touch sensitivity, and therefore the

smallest dynamic range. A setting of “5” produces the greatest sensitivity

and broadest dynamic range. The default touch sensitivity value (4) can be

recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

021

–+

RESET

TOUCH

SENSE

TOUCH

RESPONSE

TOUCH

SENSE

TOUCH

RESPONSE

TOUCH

SENSE

TOUCH

RESPONSE

Touch=4–:Mid-High

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Touch=4–:Mid-High

Auto Accompaniment

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have 100 accompaniment styles that can be used to provide fully-

orchestrated Auto Accompaniment. When the Auto Accompaniment function is turned ON, the

PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 create fully-orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment

based on chords you play with the left hand in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard

(i.e. all keys to the left of the Auto Accompaniment split point). The right-hand section of the key-

board is available for normal playing.

The default Auto Accompaniment split point

is the G2 (55) key. The Auto Accompaniment

section of the keyboard consists of all keys to

its left. The Auto Accompaniment split point

can be set to any other key as described in

“Setting the Auto Accompaniment Split Point”

on page 25.

Auto Accompaniment

▼

Normal

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT



Left-hand fingering specifies 

the auto accompaniment chords.

The right-hand plays

normally.

NOTES

• The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 also has a special “Full” Auto Accompaniment fingering mode in which chords

played anywhere on the keyboard determine the Auto Accompaniment chords. See page 28 for details.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

STYLE

SELECT

ACCOMP

VOLUME

AUTO

ACCOMP

REVOICE

TRACK

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC

CHORD

1 2

PAD

CHORD



PHRASE

1 2

MODE

................

1 CHORD 1

2 CHORD 2

3 SINGLE

4 MULTI

5 FULL

FINGE-

RING

ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL

FADE IN/OUTSTART/STOP INTRO FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 ENDING VARIATION

A B

SYNC-START/STOP BREAK

XSelect a Style Number............................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[STYLE SELECT] button itself to select the required style number (see

page 9 for editing procedure details).

Any of the 100 accompaniment styles can be selected via the normal editing procedure. This can be done

either before or during accompaniment playback. See page 78 for descriptions of all 100 styles.

■Selecting a Style

NOTES

• Eight additional styles are provided on floppy disk. These can be loaded, one at a time, into the Por-

taTone’s “Custom Style” memory location — style number “00” — and used in the same way as the

100 preset styles. See page 60 for instructions on loading styles from disk.

–+

RESET

When you press the [STYLE SELECT] button the currently selected

style number and name will appear on the LCD display panel.

ZPress the [STYLE SELECT] Button ......................................................................................................

STYLE

SELECT

AUTO

ACCOMP

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Styl=0–8:Showtune

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Styl=0–8:Showtune

■Setting the Auto Accompaniment Split Point

To set the Auto Accompaniment split point, first turn Auto Accompani-

ment ON — press the [AUTO ACCOMP] button so that its indicator lights

— then proceed with steps 2 and 3 as described in “Split Point Change” on

page 20. The default Auto Accompaniment split point (55) can be instantly

recalled by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

STYLE

SELECT

AUTO

ACCOMP

SPLIT

POINT

NOTES

• If the Auto Accompaniment split point is set at a lower key than

the orchestration split point, the L1 and/or L2 voice will sound

between the Auto Accompaniment and orchestration split

points.

• If the Auto Accompaniment split point is set at a higher key

than the orchestration split point, the L1 and/or L2 voice will

sound throughout the entire Auto Accompaniment section.

• If the Auto Accompaniment “Full” fingering mode is selected,

the L1 and/or L2 voice will sound to the left of the orchestration

split point while the R1 and/or R2 voice will sound to the right of

the orchestration split point.

▼▼

Auto

Accompaniment

Left voice Right voice

Orchestration split point

Auto Accompaniment split point

▼

Left voice Right voice

Auto Accompaniment

Orchestration split point

▼▼

Right voice

Auto Accompaniment

Left voice

■Auto Accompaniment Fingering

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have 5 Auto Accompaniment fingering modes, selected via the [FINGERING]

button.

Orchestration split point

Auto Accompaniment split point

ZPress the [FINGERING] Button .............................................................................................................

When you press the [FINGERING] button the currently selected Auto

Accompaniment fingering number and type name will appear on the LCD

display panel.

MODE

................

1 CHORD 1

2 CHORD 2

3 SINGLE

4 MULTI

5 FULL

FINGE-

RING

PSR-2700PSR-1700

XSelect a Fingering Mode ........................................................................................................................

021

–+

RESET

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[FINGERING] button itself to select the required fingering mode (see page

9 for editing procedure details).

Fingrng=1–:Chord1

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

C Fingrng=1–:Chord1

Auto Accompaniment

The Chord 1 mode is ideal if you already know how to play chords

on a keyboard, since it allows you to supply your own chords for the

Auto Accompaniment feature.

● Mode 1: Chord 1

PSR-2700

PSR-1700

Csus

Cmadd

CMCM

CMadd

Caug

( )

( ) ( )

( )

CmM

Cdim

C sus

Cdim

( )

#11

( )

#11

( )

b13

( )

CM aug

C aug

1+2+5

( )

Example for “C” chords

Fingrng=1–:Chord1

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

C Fingrng=1–:Chord1

The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will accept the following chord types:

Major [M] ................................................................... 1 - 3 - 5

Major sixth [M6].................................................... 1 - 3 - 5 - 6

Major seventh [M7] ........................................... 1 - 3 - (5) - 7

Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7#11] ..

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

Major add ninth [Madd9] ......................................1 - 2 - 3 - 5

Major ninth [M9] ........................................... 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7

Major sixth add ninth [6 9] ............................ 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6

Augmented [aug]..................................................... 1 - 3 - #5

Minor [m] ................................................................. 1 - b3 - 5

Minor sixth [m6].................................................. 1 - b3 - 5 - 6

Minor seventh [m7] ........................................ 1 - b3 - (5) - b7

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] ................... 1 - b3 - b5 - b7

Minor add ninth [madd9] .................................... 1 - 2 - b3 - 5

Minor ninth [m9] ........................................1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7

Minor eleventh [m11] ........................ 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)

Minor major seventh [mM7] .............................1 - b3 - (5) - 7

Minor major ninth [mM9] ............................ 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7

Diminished [dim].................................................... 1 - b3 - b5

Diminished seventh [dim7]............................... 1 - b3 - b5 - 6

Seventh [7].......................................................1 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] .................... 1 - 4 - 5 - b7

Seventh ninth [7 9] ..................................... 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh sharp eleventh [7#11] ......... 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

Seventh thirteenth [7 13] ............................ 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7

or 2 - 3 - 5 - 6 - b7

Seventh flatted ninth [7b9] ........................1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh flatted thirteenth [7b13] ................ 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7

Seventh sharp ninth [7#9] ...................... (1) - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] ................... 1 - 3 - #5 - 7

Seventh augmented [7aug]............................ (1) - 3 - #5 - b7

Suspended fourth [sus4] ........................................... 1 - 4 - 5

One plus two plus five [1+2+5].................................. 1 - 2 - 5

NOTES

• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

• A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only

on the root and fifth which can be used with many major

and minor chords.

• An octave (1+8) produces accompaniment based only on

the root.

• If three adjacent keys are played simultaneously (white and

black keys), chord accompaniment will be cancelled and

only the rhythm accompaniment will sound. (Chord 1/Chord

2 mode)

• The chord fingerings listed are all in “root position”, but

other inversions can be used — with the following excep-

tions:

* M6 chords are only recognized in root position. All other

inversions are interpreted as m7.

* 6 9 chords are only recognized in root position. All other

inversions are interpreted as m11.

* m6 chords are only recognized in root position. All other

inversions are interpreted as m7

* 1+2+5 chords are only recognized in root position. All

other inversions are interpreted as sus4.

* With aug and dim7 chords the lowest note played is as-

sumed to be the root.

* With 7

11 chords the lowest note played is assumed to be

the root or

● Mode 2: Chord 2 This is essentially the same as the Chord 1 mode, above, except

that the lowest note played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard will be played by the bass part rather than the chord root.

PSR-2700

PSR-1700

Fingrng=2–:Chord2

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

C Fingrng=2–:Chord2

C on E

C on G

● Mode 3: Single

SINGLE mode fingering makes it simple to produce beautifully

orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-

seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys in the Auto

Accompaniment section of the keyboard. The accompaniment pro-

duced is perfectly matched to the currently selected accompaniment

style.

Major Chords:

If you press a “C” key in the left-hand section of the keyboard, for

example, a C-major accompaniment will be played. Press another key

in the left-hand section of the keyboard to select a new chord. The key

you press will always determine the “root” of the chord played (i.e.

“C” for a C chord).

Minor Chords:

Simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left.

Seventh Chords:

Simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left.

Minor-seventh Chords:

Simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key

to its left.

NOTES

• The Auto Accompaniment will continue playing even if you lift

your fingers from the Auto Accompaniment keys. You only need

to press the Auto Accompaniment keys when changing chords.

PSR-2700

PSR-1700

Fingrng=3–:Single

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

C Fingrng=3–:Single

This is a combination of the Single and Chord 1 modes. In this

mode the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 automatically discriminates between

Single and Chord 1 mode fingerings and generates the appropriate

accompaniment.

NOTES

• If more than two keys are played and all but the highest key are

black keys, and the chord is not recognized by the Chord 1

mode, the highest note will be interpreted as the root of a minor

(m) chord.

• If more than three keys are played and, excluding the highest

key, are a mixture of black and white keys, and the chord is not

recognized by the Chord 1 mode, the highest note will be inter-

preted as the root of a minor-seventh (m7) chord.

• If more than two keys are played and all but the highest key are

white keys, and the chord is not recognized by the Chord 1

mode, the highest note will be interpreted as the root of a sev-

enth (7) chord.

● Mode 4: Multi

PSR-2700

PSR-1700

Fingrng=4–:Multi

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

C Fingrng=4–:Multi

Auto Accompaniment

In this mode chords played anywhere on the keyboard are detected

and used for Auto Accompaniment. Otherwise the keyboard functions

normally, and the entire range is available for playing. Chord recogni-

tion is the same as in the Chord 1 mode. Please note that in this mode

all notes you play on the keyboard at any one time will be interpreted

as the Auto Accompaniment chord.

NOTES

• A single note played more than one octave below the lowest

note in a chord will be interpreted as a bass note, and notes

played more than an 11th above the lowest chord note will be

interpreted as melody.

● Mode 5: Full

● The [METRONOME] Button

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 include a metronome function that you’ll

use primarily with the recording functions described on page 39. If you

press the [METRONOME] button so that its indicator lights when using

Auto Accompaniment, the metronome will sound at the currently set tempo

when the synchro-start mode is engaged, and while the accompaniment is

playing.

TEMPO



METRONOME

PSR-2700

PSR-1700

Fingrng=5–:Full

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

C Fingrng=5–:Full

Chords played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are

also detected and played by the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 Auto Accompaniment

system when the accompaniment is stopped (except in the Full fingering

mode). In this case the bass note and chord voices are selected automati-

cally.

Playing Chords When the

Accompaniment is Stopped

■Tempo Control

The [TEMPO] button can be used to control the tempo of AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT, SONG MEMORY

and MULTI PAD playback (see pages 43 and 46).

ZPress the [TEMPO] Button.....................................................................................................................

Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [TEMPO] button. The current

tempo (quarter-note beats per minute) will appear on the LCD display

panel.

XSet the Tempo.........................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[TEMPO] button itself to set the desired tempo.

Each accompaniment style has a different “default” tempo which is au-

tomatically set whenever a new style is selected (but not when a new style

is selected while the accompaniment is playing). The default tempo for the

currently selected accompaniment style can be recalled instantly by press-

ing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

021

–+

RESET

TEMPO



METRONOME

Tempo œ=1–28

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

C Tempo œ=1–28

■Accompaniment Control

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 provide a range of accompaniment “sections” — introduction, fill-ins, break,

variations on the main pattern, ending — that you can select to control the “flow” of the accompaniment to

achieve the desired musical results. Accompaniment start/stop and sections are controlled by the ACCOMPANI-

MENT CONTROL buttons.

● Straight Start...........................................................................................................................................

The [START/STOP] button starts the selected accompaniment style

immediately.

Press the [AUTO ACCOMP] button so that its indicator lights before

starting the accompaniment. The accompaniment will start with the rhythm

sound only when the [START/STOP] button is pressed, then the bass and

chord parts will begin playing as soon as the first note or chord is played on

the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

NOTES

• A different accompaniment style can be selected at any time while the

accompaniment is playing. The style number and name on the LCD

display panel will change as soon as the selection is made, but the

new style will begin playback from the top of the next measure. The

only exception is if you change styles while an intro is playing (see

page 30), in which case the new style begin playing after the intro has

finished. The tempo will not change when the new style begins play-

ing.

The Beat Indicator

The four BEAT indicator LEDs located above the AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT control section flash to indicate the tempo and beat as the accompa-

niment plays. The LEDs flash individually in sequence on each beat of the

measure. In 4/4, 3/4, and 6/8 time, for example, the beat indicator LEDs

will flash as shown to the left.

NOTES

• Each accompaniment style has a preset “normal” tempo which is au-

tomatically selected whenever the style is selected while the accom-

paniment is stopped. The current tempo is maintained if you select a

different style during accompaniment playback (except when the One

Touch Setting function is used — page 36). You can change the

tempo as required by using the TEMPO function described on page

28.

START/STOP

STYLE

SELECT

AUTO

ACCOMP

Press the [SYNC-START/STOP] button if you want the accompani-

ment to start when you play the first note or chord on the keyboard. In this

case the accompaniment is started by playing in the left-hand section of the

keyboard.

NOTES

• If the AUTO ACCOMP mode is OFF, playing anywhere on the key-

board causes the rhythm-only accompaniment to start.

If you press the [SYNC-START/STOP] button, the BEAT indicator

LEDs will flash at the current tempo. The synchro start mode can be disen-

gaged by pressing the [SYNC-START/STOP] button again so that its indi-

cator goes out.

SYNC-START/STOP

● Synchro Start ..........................................................................................................................................

1st beat

2nd beat

3rd beat

4th beat

1st beat

2nd beat

3rd beat

4th beat

5th beat

6th beat

1st beat

2nd beat

3rd beat

BEAT

4/4 time

3/4 time

6/8 time

Auto Accompaniment

● Starting the Accompaniment with an Introduction .............................................................................

Any of the accompaniment styles can be started with an appropriate intro-

duction by pressing the [INTRO] button and then the [START/STOP] button.

If you press the [SYNC-START/STOP] button and then the [INTRO] button,

the accompaniment will start from the introduction as soon as a chord is de-

tected in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

Once the [INTRO] button is pressed, the [INTRO] indicator will be lit

continuously and the VARIATION [A] or [B] indicator will flash to indicate

which section will play when the introduction has finished. You can change the

“destination” section by pressing the VARIATION [A] or [B] button while its

indicator is flashing. When the introduction ends, the [INTRO] indicator will

go out and the [A] or [B] indicator will light continuously. The introductions

for the VARIATION [A] and [B] sections are different. The A intro has no

chord progression while the B intro has its own chord progression. The actual

format of the intro, however, depends on the selected style. Although it is

generally not advisable to change chords manually while the B intro is playing,

the A intro has no progression of its own so you can play your own chords as

required.

NOTES

• It is possible to start the accompaniment from any section — even the

ending — by pressing the corresponding button prior to pressing the

[START/STOP] button. The destination MAIN [A] or [B] section can be

selected as described above.

• The [INTRO] button can be used to select the introduction pattern even

while the accompaniment is playing.

INTRO

VARIATION

INTRO

A B

● Adding Fill-ins & Breaks ........................................................................................................................

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 provide two types of fill-ins that can be used

as musical transitions between sections of a song or simply to add variety

where required. Press the [FILL IN 1] button at any time while the accompani-

ment is playing to add a one-measure fill-in and or return to the current MAIN

section, or press the [FILL IN 2] button to add a one-measure fill-in and go to

the other MAIN section. Although there are two FILL IN buttons there are

actually four fill-ins per style: FILL IN 1 for the MAIN [A] section, FILL IN 1

for the MAIN [B] section, FILL IN 2 for the transition MAIN [A] to [B], and

FILL IN 2 for the transition MAIN [B] to [A].

While the fill-ins are one measure long, the BREAK is two measures. The

first measure is similar to a fill-in while the second measure is an actual rhyth-

mic break — a thinner arrangement with drums and percussion predominating.

Like the fill-ins, there are actually two BREAK patterns — one for the MAIN

[A] section and one for the MAIN [B] section.

FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2

Each accompaniment style has two main sections — [A] and [B]. These are

variations of the same musical style. If the VARIATION [A] or [B] button is

pressed while the accompaniment is playing, the corresponding section will

begin from the top of the next measure. You can also select [A] or [B] before

starting the accompaniment.

NOTES

• The Main [A] section is automatically selected whenever the power switch

is turned on (the VARIATION [A] indicator will be lit).

BREAK

● The Main [A] and [B] Sections...............................................................................................................

VARIATION

A B

If the MAIN A section is playing, for example, the

[A] indicator will flash while FILL IN 1 or the

BREAK plays, and the [B] indicator will flash while

FILL IN 2 plays. You can change the section that will

begin playing after the selected fill-in or break by

pressing the desired section button while the indicator

is still flashing.

VARIATION

A B

FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 BREAK

NOTES

• If you hold the [FILL IN 1], [FILL IN 2] or [BREAK] button, the fill-in or

second measure of the break pattern will repeat until the button is

released, then the MAIN A or B section will play from the beginning of

the next measure.

• If the [FILL IN 1], [FILL IN 2] or [BREAK] button is pressed after the

last beat of a measure, the fill-in or break will begin from the first beat

of the next measure. If pressed at any other time the fill-in or break will

begin immediately.

• It is also possible to start the accompaniment with a fill-in or break by

pressing the desired fill-in or break button prior to pressing the

[START/STOP] button. The destination MAIN [A] or [B] section can be

selected in the normal way.

● Stopping the Accompaniment...............................................................................................................

An accompaniment in progress can be stopped immediately by pressing

the [START/STOP] button or the [SYNC-START/STOP] button. In the

latter case the synchro start mode will be engaged when the accompaniment

stops. The accompaniment can also be stopped with an appropriate ending

by pressing the [ENDING] button. The endings for the MAIN [A] and [B]

sections are different. The A ending has no chord progression while the B

ending has its own chord progression. The actual format of the ending,

however, depends on the selected style.

NOTES

• The ending will begin from the first beat of the next measure.

• If the [FILL IN 1], [FILL IN 2], or [BREAK] button is pressed while the

ending pattern is playing, a fill-in or break will be played, followed by a

return to the MAIN A or B pattern.

START/STOP ENDINGSYNC-START/STOP

Accompaniment Structure Diagram

ENDING A

ENDING B

INTRO A

INTRO B

FILL 1 A

FILL 2 A

FILL 1 B

BREAK A

FILL 2 B

BREAK B

MAIN B

MAIN A

Auto Accompaniment

● Fade In & Fade Out.................................................................................................................................

The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth accompaniment and melody fade-ins or fade-

outs.

Start Playback with a Fade-in

You can start the accompaniment with a fade-in by pressing the

[FADE-IN/OUT] button before starting playback. The [FADE-IN/

OUT] button indicator will light continuously until the accompani-

ment is started. The fade-in will begin automatically as soon as the

accompaniment is started. The [FADE-IN/OUT] button indicator

will flash during the fade-in, and will go out when the fade-in is

complete.

Fade-out to stop the accompaniment during Playback

Press the [FADE-IN/OUT] button during accompaniment play-

back to fade out the accompaniment and melody sound. The

[FADE-IN/OUT] button indicator will flash during the fade-out,

and will go out when the fade-out is complete.

FADE IN/OUT FADE IN/OUT FADE IN/OUT

FADE IN/OUT

■Accompaniment Volume

While the VOICE control section [VOL] button can be used to set the volume levels of the orchestration

parts, the [ACCOMP VOLUME] button can be used to adjust the volume of the selected accompaniment in

relation to the voices.

ZPress the [ACCOMP VOLUME] Button .................................................................................................

Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT control section [ACCOMP VOL-

UME] button. The current accompaniment volume value will appear on the

LCD display panel.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

ACCOMP

VOLUME

XSet the Volume .......................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[ACCOMP VOLUME] button itself to set the desired volume. The volume

range is from 00 (no sound) to 24 (maximum volume). The default volume

value (21) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons

at the same time.

021

–+

RESET

Accomp.Volume=2–1

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

C Accomp.Volume=2–1

■The Track Buttons

The Auto Accompaniment system includes eight TRACK buttons

which allow you to control the accompaniment arrangement in real

time. You can turn tracks on or off while playing for extra accompa-

niment variety.

The various tracks are turned on or off by pressing the correspond-

ing TRACK button. When a part is turned off the corresponding indi-

cator will go out. To silence the bass part, for example, press the

TRACK [BASS] button so that its indicator goes out. Press the button

again to turn that part back on.

NOTES

• The indicators for all tracks that contain data in any section will

light whenever an accompaniment style is selected. (Depend-

ing on the selected accompaniment style, some tracks may not

contain any data.)

TRACK

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC

CHORD

1 2

PAD

CHORD



PHRASE

1 2

● What’s In the Tracks...............................................................................................................................

Here’s how the tracks are normally used:

RHYTHM 1: This is the main rhythm track, and usually plays a drum kit.

RHYTHM 2: Additional rhythm. Turning the RHYTHM 2 track ON will usually increase

the “energy” of the rhythm. In many styles this track plays percussion in-

struments such as congas, bongos, etc. This means you can turn off the

RHYTHM 1 track and use only RHYTHM 2 for a “light” rhythm sound.

BASS: The BASS track always plays a bass line, but the voice will change to fit

the selected style … acoustic bass, synth bass, tuba, etc.

RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 & 2:

Both these tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accompaniment required by

each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal instruments here.

PAD CHORD: This track plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instruments

such as strings, organ, choir.

PHRASE 1 & 2: This is where the musical embellishments reside. The PHRASE tracks are

used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make

the accompaniment more interesting.

Try different combinations of tracks with each style. Some styles will sound best with the full arrangement

(all tracks ON), while others might suit your needs better if a smaller arrangement is used. To “thin out” an

arrangement, the PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 tracks are the first ones you’ll want to turn OFF.

Another way to use the tracks is to gradually build up the arrangement during the course of a song. Start

with a small arrangement — e.g. RHYTHM 1, BASS, and RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 — then add tracks one by

one as you want to thicken the musical texture.

Some styles will actually sound quite different depending on the combination of tracks you choose. Try,

for example, just RHYTHM 1, BASS, and PAD CHORD.

Auto Accompaniment

ZSelect a Track to Re-voice.....................................................................................................................

Press the TRACK button corresponding to the track you want to re-voice

while holding the [REVOICE] button. Both the selected TRACK and

[REVOICE] button indicators will flash. At the same time, the number of

the voice currently assigned to the selected track will appear on the LCD

display panel.

■ Re-voicing the Tracks

To make the TRACK buttons even more versatile, the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 feature a REVOICE function

that lets you individually change the voices and several related VOICE section parameters assigned to each

track. The parameters that can be changed using the REVOICE function are as follows:

• Voice Number (Percussion Kit, Sampled Voice Number (PSR-2700))

• Volume

• Pan

• DSP Depth

• Octave

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC

CHORD

1 2

REVOICE

TRACK

PSR-2700PSR-1700

NOTES

• At this point you can play the selected track’s voice on the keyboard.

• Keyboard percussion is automatically turned on if the RHYTHM 1 or 2

track is selected.

XMake the Required Voice Settings........................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[VOICE SELECT] button itself to select a new voice for the selected

track. You can also use the [VOL], [OCTAVE], [DSP DEPTH], and [PAN]

buttons to change the corresponding parameters for the selected voice.

NOTES

• You can use the REVOICE function either while the accompaniment is

playing or stopped.

• You cannot edit the orchestration parts while the REVOICE indicator

is flashing.

• You can play the keyboard and hear the re-voiced voice except for

octave changes.

VOICE

SELECT

VOL OCTAVE DSP

DEPTH

PAN

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

SAMPLED

VOICE

021

–+

RESET

CRepeat For All Tracks To Be Re-voiced ...............................................................................................

Repeat steps Z and X to re-voice all the tracks you want to change.

VCE=03–4:FngrBass

08:Showtune 034:FngrBass

C VCE=03–4:FngrBass

(PSR-2700)

VConfirm the Re-voiced Data ..................................................................................................................

Press the [REVOICE] button when you’ve finished re-voicing the de-

sired tracks to confirm the re-voiced data. The [REVOICE] button and

selected track indicators will light.

BPlay the Re-voiced Accompaniment ....................................................................................................

Play and use the re-voiced accompaniment as required.

NTurn REVOICE OFF to Restore the Original Voices............................................................................

Press the [REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to disengage

the REVOICE function when done. The re-voiced settings will be cancelled

and the original voices for the selected accompaniment style will be re-

stored.

NOTES

• ALL REVOICE settings are reset to their default values if you

changes styles while the REVOICE function is OFF. If you want to

keep a re-voiced setup so that it can be easily recalled later,

store it in the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 REGISTRATION MEMORY,

described on page 37.

• As long as you don’t change styles while the REVOICE function is

OFF, the re-voiced settings are maintained and can be recalled at any

time simply by turning the REVOICE function ON.

• If you change styles while the REVOICE function is engaged, the re-

voiced settings will be maintained.

• In some cases it may not be possible to re-voice a Custom Accompa-

niment during accompaniment playback. If this problem occurs, try re-

voicing the style while the accompaniment is stopped.

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC

CHORD

1 2

REVOICE

TRACK

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC

CHORD

1 2

REVOICE

TRACK

One Touch Setting

Each accompaniment style has a suitable preset voice and other settings that can be instantly

recalled by pressing the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button in the VOICE control section. This

makes it simple to recall the optimum settings for each style in one quick operation.

To use the One Touch Setting function: select a style, press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] but-

ton so that its indicator lights, then play. As long as the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] indicator is lit

the ideal voice and other settings (see list below) will be automatically recalled whenever you

select a new style. The One Touch Settings can be turned off by pressing the [ONE TOUCH

SETTING] button so that its indicator goes out.

If you don’t want to use the One Touch Settings as they are, they can be edited and stored in

a Registration Memory for easy recall at any time (see page 37 for details on the Registration

memory).

• The preset voice settings for the currently selected style — including orchestration,

voice assignments, volume, octave, DSP depth, pan, harmony, and effect settings.

• ACCOMP VOLUME level (21).

• AUTO ACCOMP is turned ON.

• The default tempo for the currently selected style.

• The track ON/OFF status for the currently selected style.

• [REVOICE] is turned OFF.

• KEYBOARD PERCUSSION is turned OFF.

• Auto Accompaniment split point (55).

• Orchestration split point (69).

NOTES

• If you press [ONE TOUCH SETTING] while rhythm-only accompani-

ment is playing, AUTO ACCOMP will be turned ON.

• The synchro start mode will be engaged if the [ONE TOUCH SET-

TING] button is turned on while the accompaniment is stopped.

• The [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button cannot be turned on when style

number “00” is selected.

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

The One Touch Setting function recalls the following settings:

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

VOICE

1. Voice numbers for all four orches-

tration parts.

2. Keyboard percussion ON/OFF &

percussion kit number.

3. PSR-2700

Sampled voice ON/OFF (all four

orchestration parts).

Sampled voice number in DIGITAL

SAMPLING section.

Sampled voice volume in DIGITAL

SAMPLING section.

Sampled voice DSP depth in DIG-

ITAL SAMPLING section.

Sampled voice pan in DIGITAL

SAMPLING section.

4. Volume (all four orchestration parts

and percussion).

5. Pan (all four orchestration parts

and percussion).

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

1. Style number.

2. Accompaniment volume.

3. Track button settings.

4. Tempo.

5. REVOICE ON/OFF and settings.

6. Split point.

7. Transpose.

8. Accomp. ON/OFF.

9. Fingering mode.

6. DSP Depth (all four orchestration

parts and percussion).

7. Octave (all four orchestration parts

and percussion).

8. Harmony ON/OFF & Harmony

type.

9. Effect ON/OFF & Effect type.

10. Orchestration & Edit ON/OFF.

11. Split point.

12. Touch sense & Touch response.

13. Pitch bend range.

14. Modulation depth.

15. Local ON/OFF status (L & R)

16. MIDI OUT ON/OFF (L & R)

17. Pedal assign 1 & 2.

The REGISTRATION MEMORY can be used to store eight complete sets of VOICE and AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT settings that can be recalled anytime at the touch of a button.

The REGISTRATION MEMORY stores the following parameters:

Registration Memory

● Memorizing the Settings ........................................................................................................................

The panel settings listed above can be stored to any one of

the eight REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons by pressing the

button — [1] through [8] — while holding the [MEMORIZE]

button. The indicator of the selected button will light continu-

ously indicating that the data has been stored.

NOTES

• Please note that anytime you store to a REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY button, all settings previously stored

in that button will be erased and replaced by the new

settings.

• The indicator of the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY

will flash as soon as any change is made to the panel

settings. In other words, if the REGISTRATION

MEMORY indicator is flashing, the current panel settings

are different from those stored in the memory.

• The Registration Memory data is retained in memory

even when the power switch is turned off, as long as the

backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is con-

nected.

MEMORIZE

2 34

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MEMORIZE

256

ACCOMP

VOICE

FREEZE

34 78

● Recalling the Settings ............................................................................................................................

The settings stored to a REGISTRATION MEMORY button

can be recalled at any time simply by pressing the appropriate

button. The indicator of the selected button will light continu-

ously when initially recalled, but will flash as soon as any

change is made to the panel settings. A flashing REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY indicator therefore indicates that the current

panel settings do not correspond to those stored in the REGIS-

TRATION MEMORY.

NOTES

• REGISTRATION MEMORY number 1 is always initially

selected when the power is turned on.

Registration Memory

● The FREEZE Function............................................................................................................................

The [FREEZE] button can be used to “freeze” the VOICE or

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT settings so that they are not re-

called when a REGISTRATION MEMORY button is pressed. If

you press the [FREEZE] button so that only the VOICE indica-

tor is lit, for example, then only the stored AUTO ACCOMPA-

NIMENT settings will be recalled when a REGISTRATION

MEMORY button is pressed.

To use the [FREEZE] button, simply press it as many times

as necessary to cause the appropriate indicators to light. When

an indicator is lit, then the corresponding group of settings is

“frozen”.

NOTES

• The FREEZE on/off status is retained in memory even

when the power switch is turned off, as long as the

backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is con-

nected.

MEMORIZE

2 34

5 6

ACCOMP

VOICE

FREEZE

The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 RECORDING section controls three recording functions:

● The SONG MEMORY:

Record complete songs including an accompaniment track and up to six melody tracks. Songs can

be saved to and loaded from floppy disk as required (page 56).

● MULTI PADS:

Record short chord, melody, or rhythm sequences that can be played back anytime by simply

pressing a button. The MULTI PAD data can be saved to and loaded from floppy disk as required.

● CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT:

Create your own accompaniment style for use with the Auto Accompaniment feature. Custom ac-

companiments can be saved to and loaded from floppy disk as required.

Operation of all three functions is essentially the same, so once you’re familiar with the basic proce-

dure, recording songs, multi-pad phrases, or custom accompaniments should be easy. We’ll start with

the SONG MEMORY.

Record Functions

Song Memory

The SONG MEMORY allows you to record and play back complete songs including chord sequences created

using the Auto Accompaniment feature and melody lines you play on the keyboard. The SONG MEMORY has one

ACCOMP track and six MELODY tracks. You also have a choice of realtime and step recording modes: the realtime

mode records what you play as you play it; the step mode lets you record one step at a time.

Only one song can be retained in the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 memory at a time, but your songs can be saved to

floppy disk — at most 99 songs per disk (the actual number depends on the volume of the song data) — and then

reloaded later whenever you want to play them (page 56).

CAUTION

• Turning the power OFF during recording or while the record-

ready mode is engaged can result in a loss of recorded data.

MELODY

SONG MEMORY RECORDING

SONG

MEASURE # GATE

TIME

STEP

SIZE

CUSTOM ACCOMP

SONG MEMORY

MULTI PADS

TRACK

ACCOMP

12345

REC

REWRITE

SETTING

CLEAR

STEP

REC

QUANTIZE

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

NOTES

• Material recorded using the SONG MEMORY is retained in memory

even when the POWER switch is turned OFF if backup batteries are

present or the AC plug is connected.

■ Realtime Accompaniment Track Recording

The SONG MEMORY ACCOMP track records the following operations and data:

Record Functions

• Chord changes.

• Intro, Main, Fill in, Break, & Ending sections.

• Accompaniment volume.

• Fade-in/out.

• Auto accompaniment TRACK button operations.

• Tempo.

• Style number.

• Revoice.

ZSelect a Style ..........................................................................................................................................

Select an accompaniment style that is appropriate for the type of music

you want to record. Also select the fingering mode you want to use, if nec-

essary.

XEngage the Accompaniment Track Record Ready Mode...................................................................

Press the SONG MEMORY section [ACCOMP] track button while

holding the RECORDING section [REC] button. This engages the record

ready mode for the accompaniment track. If [AUTO ACCOMP] is not al-

ready turned on, it will be automatically engaged. The [REC],

[ACCOMP], and [SYNC-START/STOP] button indicators will flash, and

the BEAT indicator dots will flash at the currently selected tempo. If the

OVERALL CONTROL section [METRONOME] button indicator is lit,

the metronome will sound at the currently selected tempo.

The current measure (“Mes”) and beat (“BT”) — in this case

“Mes=001:BT=1” — will be shown on the LCD display panel.

STYLE

SELECT

AUTO

ACCOMP

MODE

................

1 CHORD 1

2 CHORD 2

3 SINGLE

4 MULTI

5 FULL

FINGE-

RING

MEL

TRACK

ACCOMP

123

REC

BEAT

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Mes=0–01:BT=1

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

Mes=0–01:BT=1

NOTES

• Accompaniment track recording is carried out using the currently se-

lected Auto Accompaniment fingering mode (page 25).

• Previously-recorded SONG MEMORY tracks that are turned ON (their

indicators are lit) can be monitored while recording. If you don’t want

to hear any of the previous tracks while recording, simply press the

corresponding SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons so their indicators go

out.

• It is also possible to record one MELODY track at the same time as

you record the ACCOMP track. Hold the [REC] button and press the

MELODY track button on which you want to record after engaging the

ACCOMP track record ready mode. Refer to “Realtime Melody Track

Recording” on page 42.

• The ACCOMP track record-ready mode can be disengaged by press-

ing the [ACCOMP] track button. ACCOMP track record ready cannot

be disengaged by pressing the [SYNC-START/STOP] button.

MELODY

TRACK

ACCOMP

12345

MELO

TRACK

ACCOMP

123

REC

CRecord .....................................................................................................................................................

Recording will begin as soon as you play a chord on the Auto Accompa-

niment section of the keyboard. If you’ve selected a MELODY track to

record with the ACCOMP track, a right-hand note will also start the record-

ing process. The [REC] indicator lights continuously once recording has

started, and the current measure and beat will appear on the LCD display

panel.

Recording can also be started by pressing the ACCOMPANIMENT

CONTROL [START/STOP] button. In this case only the rhythm will begin

without bass and chord accompaniment until you play the first chord on the

Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

Play the required chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the key-

board. If you’ve also selected a MELODY track to be recorded, play the

melody on the right-hand section of the keyboard.

NOTES

• Whenever you record using the SONG MEMORY, any previously

recorded material in the same track will be erased and replaced

by the new material.

• You can also start recording from any specified measure number —

see page 44.

• If the SONG MEMORY becomes full while recording, “Memory Full”

will appear on the LCD display panel and recording will stop. Up to

approximately 4,800 notes can be recorded in all MELODY tracks. Up

to approximately 4,800 chords can be recorded. These figures only

apply, however, if

only chords or notes are recorded. The total is re-

duced when notes and chords are recorded together.

• If you start recording by pressing the [PLAY/STOP] button, nothing will

be recorded until you begin playing on the keyboard.

• If you use a function button during recording the corresponding value

will appear on the LCD display panel while the button is held. The

measure number display will resume a few seconds after the button is

released.

• The SONG MEMORY ACCOMP track can also be recorded using the

Step Record mode (page 50).

FADE IN/OUTSTART/STOPSYNC-START/STOP

VStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Stop recording by pressing the [ACCOMP] track button. Recording can

also be stopped by pressing the [ENDING] button, [FADE IN/OUT] but-

ton, or the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button. The [REC] indicator will go out

and “Now Processing” will appear on the LCD display panel while the

PSR-1700/2700 is processing recorded data. “Completed” will appear

briefly when the data has been processed.

NOTES

• When recording is stopped the Song Memory automatically returns to

the measure at which recording was started.

ENDING

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

MELODY

TRACK

ACCOMP

12345

FADE IN/OUT

Record Functions

■ Realtime Melody Track Recording

The SONG MEMORY MELODY tracks record the following operations and data:

• Key on/off

(i.e. notes played on the keyboard).

• Key velocity.

• Voice number (Percussion Kit, Sampled

Voice Number (PSR-2700)).

• Volume.

• Pan.

• DSP depth.

• Harmony on/off & harmony type.

• Effect on/off & effect type.

• Sustain (footswitch) on/off.

• Pitch bend.

• Octave.

• Modulation.

• Expression (foot controller).

* SAMPLE PAD (PSR-2700) and MULTI PAD data cannot be recorded to SONG MEMORY.

ZSelect a Voice and Set the Voice Parameters......................................................................................

Select the voice you want to record with (the R1 and R2 voices can be

used), and set the voice effects and other parameters as required.

XSelect a Track and Engage the Record Ready Mode..........................................................................

Press one of the MELODY track buttons — [1] through [6] — while

holding the RECORDING section [REC] button. Both the [REC] button

indicator and the selected MELODY track indicator will flash, indicating

that the SONG MEMORY is ready to record. If the OVERALL CONTROL

section [METRONOME] button indicator is lit the metronome will also

begin to sound at the currently selected tempo, while the BEAT indicator

dots flash at the current tempo.

The current measure (“Mes”) and beat (“BT”) — in this case

“Mes=001:BT=1” — will be shown on the LCD display panel.

NOTES

• Previously-recorded SONG MEMORY tracks that are turned ON (their

indicators are lit) can be monitored while recording. If you don’t want

to hear any of the previous tracks while recording, simply press the

corresponding SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons so their indicators go

out.

• Only one melody track can be recorded at a time.

• If the MELODY track record ready mode is engaged, Auto Accompa-

niment is automatically turned off.

MELODY

TRACK

ACCOMP

1234

REC

BEAT

CRecord .....................................................................................................................................................

Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or

press the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will

begin to indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode, and

the current measure and beat number will appear on the LCD display panel.

Play the melody using the entire keyboard if you are recording only a

MELODY track, or on the right-hand section of the keyboard if you are

recording a MELODY track at the same time as the ACCOMP track.

NOTES

• The SONG MEMORY MELODY tracks can also be recorded using the

Step Record mode — see page 50.

VStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Stop recording by pressing the TRACK button of the melody track be-

ing recorded, or the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button. The [REC] indicator

will go out and “Now Processing” will appear on the LCD display panel

while the PSR-1700/2700 is processing recorded data. “Completed” will

appear briefly when the data has been processed. The measure number will

automatically return to the measure at which recording was started.

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

MELODY

TRACK

ACCOMP

12345

BSave Your Completed Song to Floppy Disk ........................................................................................

When you’ve finished recording your song — or have recorded as much

as you want to in the current session — save your song to floppy disk as

described on page 58. Making this step a habit will prevent accidental loss

of data.

NOTES

• The song data is retained in memory even when the power switch is

turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug

is connected. It is nevertheless a good idea to save important song

data to floppy disk so you have a backup in case of accidental eras-

ure.

BStop Playback .........................................................................................................................................

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

Accompaniment and melody playback will stop automatically when all

recorded data has been played back. You can also stop playback at any time

by pressing the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button.

ZLoad a Song If Necessary......................................................................................................................

If necessary, load the song you want to play back from floppy disk (refer

to page 60). This step can be ignored if the song you want to play is already

in the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 memory.

■ Accompaniment And Melody Playback

XSelect the Tracks to Play Back .............................................................................................................

Any number of MELODY tracks and/or the ACCOMP track can be

played back at the same time. Press the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons

corresponding to the tracks you want to play back — the indicators of the

selected tracks will light.

NOTES

• All SONG MEMORY tracks that contain recorded data are automati-

cally turned ON when the power switch is turned on or a song is

loaded from floppy disk.

• Measure number 1 is automatically selected whenever the power

switch is turned on or a song is loaded from floppy disk.

CStart Playback.........................................................................................................................................

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

Playback will begin as soon as the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button is

pressed. You can turn the ACCOMP and MELODY tracks on and off during

playback by pressing the appropriate TRACK buttons. During playback the

current measure and beat will appear on the LCD display panel.

NOTES

• Use the [RESET] button to return to the first measure of the song at

any time (see page 44).

• You can also start playback from any specified measure by using the

[MEASURE #] button (see page 44).

VPlay Along If You Like............................................................................................................................

Play along on the keyboard if you like. You can also change the tempo

during playback.

NOTES

• The maximum polyphony is 28. If more than 28 notes are played at

the same time, some notes may be truncated. If you are using a sam-

pled voice an additional 26 notes are available for the sampled voice

only.

MELODY

TRACK

ACCOMP

12345

■ The [RESET] Button

Press the SONG [RESET] button to go directly to the first measure of

the song and turn ON all tracks that contain data. Measure number “001”

will appear on the LCD display panel. The [RESET] button also functions

during playback or realtime recording.

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

Record Functions

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Mes=0–01:BT=1

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Mes=0–01:BT=1

■ Record Or Play from a Specified Measure

You can start SONG MEMORY recording or playback from any specified measure, as long as the specified

measure is within the range of measures that has already been recorded:

ZPress the [MEASURE #] Button If Necessary ......................................................................................

If the measure number is not currently shown on the LCD display panel,

press the [MEASURE #] button. If the measure number is already showing,

go directly to step X.

CStart Playback or Recording .................................................................................................................

Start playback or recording. You can now start playback or recording

from the specified measure number.

NOTES

• This function allows you to “punch-in” and “punch-out” at any measure

to re-record a section of a previously-recorded track.

XEnter the Desired Measure Number .....................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[MEASURE #] button itself to enter the desired measure number.

Example:

Start Recording

(Punch In)

Stop Recording

(Punch Out)

Old Data

(Same as Before)

Old Data

(Same as Before)

New Data

123456789

Before Punch In/Out

After Punch In/Out

▲▲

VOICE

123456789

VOICE

NOTES

• Recording is carried out in 1-measure units. If you punch out in the

middle of a measure, rests will be recorded for the remainder of that

measure.

MEASURE #

021

–+

RESET

• Voice, volume, pan, pitch

bend, modulation, tempo,

harmony on/off, effect on/off,

dual on/off, DSP depth and

revoice data changes made

during the punch-in remain in

effect even after the punch-

out point until further param-

eter changes are encoun-

tered in the old data.

The Multi Pads

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 MULTI PADS can be used to record short rhythmic or melodic sequences, percus-

sion fill-ins, or single percussion sounds that can be played at any time simply by pressing the appropriate pad. Pads

[1] and [2] play back exactly as recorded, while pads [3] and [4] are “CHORD MATCH” types which are automati-

cally transposed to match chords played using the Auto-accompaniment feature.

Only one set of MULTI PAD data can be retained in the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 memory at a time, but any

number of MULTI PAD sets can be saved to floppy disks and then reloaded later when needed (page 56).

The MULTI PADs record the following operations and data:

• Key on/off

(i.e. notes played on the keyboard).

• Key velocity.

• Voice number (Percussion Kit, Sampled

Voice Number (PSR-2700)).

• Volume.

• Pan.

• DSP depth.

NOTES

• Before recording, the PSR-1700/PSR-2700

memory contains a preset set of MULTI PAD

data that will be erased when new MULTI PAD

data is recorded. The original preset data can

be restored by using the “System Reset” func-

tion described on page 82.

■ Realtime Recording

• Octave.

• Harmony on/off & harmony type.

• Effect on/off & effect type.

• Sustain on/off (footswitch).

• Pitch bend.

• Modulation.

• Expression (foot controller).

ZSelect a Voice to Record and an Appropriate Tempo.........................................................................

Select the voice you want to record on the MULTI PADS. Only the [R1]

and [R2] voices can be used. You might also want to set a tempo that will

be easy to record at.

XEngage the MULTI PAD Record Ready Mode ......................................................................................

REC

1 2 3 4

CHORD MATCH

Press one of the MULTI PAD buttons — [1] through [4] — while hold-

ing the [REC] button. The [REC] button indicator and the selected MULTI

PAD indictor will flash to indicate that the record ready mode is engaged,

and the metronome will begin to sound at the currently selected tempo if

the OVERALL CONTROL section [METRONOME] button indicator is

lit.

NOTES

• Only the R1 and R2 orchestration parts can be recorded to the MULTI

PADS.

• If the MULTI PAD record ready mode is engaged, Auto Accompani-

ment is automatically turned off.

SONG

MULTI PADS

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

STOP

2 3 4

CHORD MATCH

RECORDING

GATE

TIME

STEP

SIZE

CUSTOM ACCOMP

SONG MEMORY

MULTI PADS

REC

REWRITE

SETTING

CLEAR

STEP

REC

QUANTIZE

STOP

2 3 4

CHORD MATCH

Record Functions

Play a short sequence. The MULTI PADS can record up to approxi-

mately 550 quarter notes. The [REC] button indicator will light during re-

cording, and the BEAT indicator will indicate the current beat as in the Auto

Accompaniment mode.

NOTES

• Whenever you record to a MULTI PAD, all previous data in the

same pad will be completely erased and replaced by the new

material.

• Recording can also be started by pressing the [PLAY/STOP] button.

• The MULTI PADS can also be recorded using the Step Record mode

— see page 50.

• When recording the CHORD MATCH pads — [3] and [4] — base all

melodic and chordal phrases on a CM7 chord so that the sound will

be properly transposed when used with the Auto Accompaniment

feature (see “Playback” below).

CRecord .....................................................................................................................................................

VStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Press the MULTI PAD button being recorded, the MULTI PADS

[STOP] button or the [PLAY/STOP] button to stop recording. Re-

cording will also stop automatically and “Memory Full” will appear

on the LCD display panel when the pad memory becomes full.

STOP

2 3 4

CHORD MATCH

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

BSave Your MULTI PAD Data to Floppy Disk.........................................................................................

When you’ve finished recording your MULTI PAD data save it to floppy

disk as described on page 58. Making this step a habit will prevent acciden-

tal loss of data.

■ Playback

Simply tap any of the MULTI PADS at any time to play back the data

they contain. MULTI PAD playback begins as soon as the button is

pressed. You can even play two, three, or four MULTI PADS at the same

time. Also, you can create “retriggered sample” effects by repeatedly

pressing a pad before its contents are completely played back.

The MULTI PAD voices are independent from the voices you have currently selected for key-

board performance. You could, for example, play piano on the keyboard while a MULTI PAD plays a

brass chord stab.

MULTI PADS [3] and [4] are “CHORD MATCH” types, and the data they contain will be auto-

matically transposed to match chords played using the Auto Accompaniment feature.

MULTI PAD playback can be terminated by pressing the MULTI PADS [STOP] button.

NOTES

• MULTI PAD playback speed is determined by the current TEMPO setting.

• The contents of the MULTI PAD memory are retained in memory even when the power is turned

off as long as backup batteries are present or the AC plug is connected.

• Percussion data recorded to either of the CHORD MATCH pads will play back in the same way as

the normal pads.

• To use MULTI PAD data from disk, load the data into the PSR-1700/2700 as described on page

60.

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

Custom Accompaniment

Style number “00” is a “custom accompaniment” that you can record yourself and use with the Auto Accompani-

ment feature.

Only one custom accompaniment can be retained in the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 memory at a time, but any

number of custom accompaniments can be saved to floppy disks and then reloaded later when needed (page 56).

The CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT records the following operations and data:

• Key on/off

(i.e. notes played on the keyboard).

• Key velocity.

• Voice number (Percussion Kit, Sampled

Voice Number (PSR-2700)).

• Volume.

• Pan.

• DSP depth.

• Sustain (footswitch) on/off.

• Pitch Bend

• Modulation

■ Realtime Custom Accompaniment Recording

ZSelect a Style & Section.........................................................................................................................

Select an accompaniment style that will serve as an appropriate founda-

tion for the type of accompaniment you want to record. Also use the AC-

COMPANIMENT CONTROL buttons to select the particular section you

want to record. When selecting a section other than a main section, be sure

to also select the main A or main B section, as required.

NOTES

• Expression (foot controller) data can not be recorded

to a custom accompaniment.

• Before recording, style number 00 contains a preset

accompaniment that will be erased when a custom

accompaniment is recorded. The original preset

accompaniment can be restored by using the “Sys-

tem Reset” function described on page 82.

RECORDING

GATE

TIME

STEP

SIZE

CUSTOM ACCOMP

SONG MEMORY

MULTI PADS

REC

REWRITE

SETTING

CLEAR

STEP

REC

QUANTIZE

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL

STYLE

SELECT

ACCOMP

VOLUME

AUTO

ACCOMP

REVOICE

TRACK

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC

CHORD

1 2

PAD

CHORD



PHRASE

1 2

FADE IN/OUTSTART/STOP INTRO FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 ENDING VARIATION

A B

MODE

................

1 CHORD 1

2 CHORD 2

3 SINGLE

4 MULTI

5 FULL

FINGE-

RING

SYNC-START/STOP BREAK

ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL

INTRO FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 ENDING VARIATION

A B

BREAK

Example: Selecting FILL IN 2B

Record Functions

XEngage the Custom Accompaniment Record Ready Mode ...............................................................

Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section TRACK button corre-

sponding to the accompaniment track you want to record while holding the

RECORDING section [REC] button. (If the selected track contains no pre-

set data, “IllegalOperation” will appear on the LCD display and the custom

accompaniment record ready mode cannot be engaged.) Both the [REC]

and track indicators will flash and, if you’ve selected a preset accompani-

ment style on which to base your custom accompaniment (not number

“00”), the ARE YOU SURE? indicator will light and the PSR-1700/PSR-

2700 will ask “Are you sure?” (see NOTES, below). Press the [YES] button

if you want to go ahead with the record procedure, thus erasing the previous

contents of the custom accompaniment. This engages the record ready

mode for the specified track. If the OVERALL CONTROL section [MET-

RONOME] button indicator is lit, the metronome will sound at the cur-

rently selected tempo. Press [NO] to cancel the operation and preserve the

contents.

NOTES

• If you select a style number other than “00” on which to base

your custom accompaniment, the selected style is copied to the

custom accompaniment being recorded as soon as the record

ready mode is engaged and the [YES] button is pressed, thus

erasing all previous custom accompaniment data.

• When the built-in preset style data is copied to custom style number

00, “@” will be shown at the beginning of the custom style name on

the LCD display.

• Auto Accompaniment, Auto Harmony, and Effect are turned OFF, the

R1 orchestration part is selected, and the [EDIT] button is disabled

when the custom accompaniment record ready mode is engaged.

• If a track containing rhythm data is specified for recording, Keyboard

Percussion is automatically turned on.

• When the record-ready mode for the selected track is engaged, other

track(s) of the corresponding section having no accompaniment style

data will automatically be turned off.

• A track that does not contain data in any section (the track indicator is

off) cannot be used for custom accompaniment recording.

REC

TRACK

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC



CHORD

1 2

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

CSelect a Voice & Set the Tempo as Required ......................................................................................

If necessary, select the voice you want to record with, and set a comfort-

able recording tempo.

NOTES

• The specified voice parameters can be changed later by using the

REWRITE SETTING and REVOICE functions (pages 55 and 34).

Recording will begin as soon as you press the ACCOMPANIMENT

CONTROL section [START/STOP] button or play a chord or note on the

keyboard. The accompaniment will play repeatedly, and you can add new

material to the selected track by playing on the keyboard.

During recording you can clear a track if you want to record new mate-

rial from scratch: press the TRACK button corresponding to the track you

want to clear while holding the [CLEAR] button. Individual notes, includ-

ing Keyboard Percussion instruments, can be cleared by pressing the appro-

priate key while holding the [CLEAR] button.

VRecord .....................................................................................................................................................

FADE IN/OUTSTART/STOPSYNC-START/STOP

CLEAR

TRACK

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC



CHORD

1 2

NOTES

• Be sure to record your CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT based on a CM7

chord. The parts will be automatically transposed to match the chord played

when the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT is played back.

• The “Are you sure?” confirmation will not occur when you clear recorded

data while in the record mode.

• Custom accompaniments can also be recorded using the Step Record mode

— see page 50.

• With some styles there may be a slight delay between the end of the section

and beginning of the next cycle when recording.

• If the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT becomes full while recording, “Memory

Full” will appear on the LCD display panel and recording will stop.

BRepeat to Complete the Accompaniment ............................................................................................

Repeat steps X, C, and V, selecting and recording the various tracks as re-

quired until your custom accompaniment is complete. You can also switch sec-

tions while recording, so you can record an entire custom accompaniment with-

out having to stop recording.

NOTES

• If you change sections while recording and the current track contains no

preset data, “IllegalOperation” will appear on the LCD display panel to indi-

cate that recording is not possible.

NStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Stop recording by pressing the TRACK button being recorded or the AC-

COMPANIMENT CONTROL section [START/STOP] button. The [REC] indi-

cator will go out and “Now Processing” will appear on the LCD display panel

while the PSR-1700/2700 is processing recorded data. “Completed” will appear

briefly when the data has been processed. The recorded accompaniment data will

automatically be stored in the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT (style number

“00”).

If you stop recording by pressing the [SYNC-START/STOP] button you will

be returned to step X, above (the record-ready mode).

START/STOP

TRACK

RHYTHM

1 2

BASS

RHYTHMIC



CHORD

1 2

MSave Your Completed Accompaniment to Floppy Disk .....................................................................

When you’ve finished recording your custom accompaniment — or have re-

corded as much as you want to in the current session — save your accompani-

ment to floppy disk as described on page 58. Making this step a habit will pre-

vent accidental loss of data.

NOTES

• The Custom Accompaniment data is retained in memory even when the

power switch is turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed or

the AC plug is connected. It is nevertheless a good idea to save important

data to floppy disk so you have a backup in case of accidental erasure.

■ Using a Custom Accompaniment

To use a custom accompaniment simply select style number “00” and

use the Auto Accompaniment feature in the normal way (page 24).

STYLE

SELECT

AUTO

ACCOMP

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Styl=0–0:@Showtun

00:@Showtun 001:GrandPno

AccOff Styl=0–0:@Showtun

NOTES

• To use style data from disk, load the data into the PSR-1700/2700 as

described on page 60.

Step Recording

In addition to the realtime-recording procedures described above, the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have a “step re-

cording” mode in which notes can be entered one at a time with precise timing and length.

Record Functions

NOTES

• Only chord sequences can be step-recorded to the Song Memory ACCOMP track. The

REWRITE SETTING function (page 55) can be used after recording to change other

parameters as required.

• You can specify the measure from which you want to begin song memory step recording

as described on page 44.

• The Metronome does not function during step recording.

• The following parameters cannot be changed during Song Memory ACCOMP track step

recording: style number, section, track on/off, revoice on/off, registration memory, fade

in/out.

GATE

TIME

STEP

SIZE

STEP

REC

QUANTIZE

“Step Size” refers to the length of the note to be entered. To enter an eighth

note and advance to the next eighth note, for example, the step size should be

set to “1/8”.

Press the [STEP SIZE] button and the current step size will appear on the

LCD display panel. Then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the

data dial, or the [STEP SIZE] button itself to select the required step size

(1/4… 1/32).

The “1/16” step size can be instantly selected by pressing the [+] and [–] but-

tons simultaneously.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Step=0–:1/4Note

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Step=0–:1/4Note

Step Size Settings

1 : 1/4 Note

2 : 1/6 Note

3 : 1/8 Note

4 : 1/12 Note

5 : 1/16 Note

6 : 1/24 Note

7 : 1/32 Note

NOTES

• The currently selected step size is retained in

memory even when the power switch is turned

off, as long as the backup batteries are installed

or the AC plug is connected.

XSpecify the Required Step Size.............................................................................................................

GATE

TIME

STEP

SIZE

STEP

REC

QUANTIZE

Press the track or pad button corresponding to the track or pad you want to

record (see NOTES below) while holding the RECORDING section [STEP

REC] button. This engages the record ready mode for the specified track or

pad. Both the [STEP REC] and track/pad button indicators will flash.

NOTES

• When the step record ready mode for the Song Memory ACCOMP track

is engaged, the VARIATION A section indicator will light.

• To step record a SONG MEMORY track press the appropriate SONG

MEMORY track button; to step record a CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT

track press the appropriate AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT track button; to

step record a MULTI PAD press the appropriate pad.

ZEngage the Step Record Ready Mode..................................................................................................

CSpecify the Required Gate Time ...........................................................................................................

GATE

TIME

STEP

SIZE

STEP

REC

QUANTIZE

“Gate Time” refers to the actual length of the note to be entered in relation

to the note’s step size — i.e. whether the note is staccato, legato, etc. Gate

times are specified as percentages of the total note length, as shown in the list

below.

Press the [GATE TIME] button and the current gate time will appear on

the LCD display panel. Then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons,

the data dial, or the [GATE TIME] button itself to select the required gate

time (0% … 100%). The “80%” gate time can be instantly selected by press-

ing the [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously.

06 : 60%

07 : 70%

Normal

08 : 80%

09 : 90%

10 : 100% (Most legato)

Gate Time Settings

00 : 0% (Most staccato)

01 : 10%

02 : 20%

03 : 30%

04 : 40%

05 : 50%

PSR-2700PSR-1700

GateT.=0–8:80%

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff GateT.=0–8:80%

NOTES

• The current gate time setting is retained in memory even when the power

switch is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or the

AC plug is connected.

The LCD display panel During Step Record

During step recording the LCD display panel shows the current measure

number (“Mes”), the current beat (“BT” — there are, for example, four

beats per measure in 4/4 time), and the position of the current note within

the current beat (the bar to the right of the “BT” value). Each division on

the bar represents a 32nd note. If you are entering 16th notes, for example,

the vertical marker on the bar graph will move forward by two divisions

when each note is entered.

To Enter a Rest …

Rests can be entered by pressing only the [STEP FWD (PLAY/STOP)]

button immediately after specifying the required step size for the rest.

Stepping Backward

In the STEP RECORD mode the [RESET] button functions as the

[STEP BWD] (step backward). You can use this button to step backward

through the recording by the currently specified step size while erasing the

data.

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

PSR-2700

PSR-1700

Mes=0–01:BT=1Ççß†

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Mes=0–01:BT=1Ççß†

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

Play the note on the keyboard corresponding to the pitch of the note you

want to enter, or a chord if you want to enter a chord. You can then press the

[STEP FWD (PLAY/STOP)] button

while still holding the note or chord as

many times as necessary to extend the length of the note or chord by the speci-

fied step size.

NOTES

• When several notes are played simultaneously, all the notes will be re-

corded at one time as a chord after the last key pressed is released. This

is a handy technique for the chord progression recording.

• The BEAT indicator LEDs function in the same way as they do in the Auto

Accompaniment mode.

PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

VPlay a Note or Chord..............................................................................................................................

Record Functions

The following chart shows the step size and gate time settings required

to enter a variety of notes:

Example

BRepeat .....................................................................................................................................................

Repeat steps X, C, and V until the required number of notes has been

entered.

NOTES

• Previously-recorded tracks can not be monitored during step record-

ing.

NStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Stop recording by pressing the track or MULTI PAD button being re-

corded. The [STEP REC] indicator will go out.

NOTES

• PSR-1700/2700 allows you to “punch-in” and “punch-out” at any

measure to step re-record Song Memory data. Step recording is car-

ried out in 1-measure units, so if you punch out in the middle of meas-

ure rests will be recorded for the remainder of that measure.

• “Now Processing” may appear on the LCD display panel while the

PSR-1700/2700 is processing step-recorded data. “Completed” may

appear briefly when the data has been processed.

Mes=0–01 Mes=0–01 Mes=0–01 Mes=0–01 Mes=0–01 Mes=0–02 Mes=0–03

LCD DISPLAY

(Measure)

LCD DISPLAY

(Step Size)

LCD DISPLAY

(Gate Time)

Note

Press 

[PLAY/STOP]

Hold Hold

Hold

Twice Once

Three 

times

Twice

STEP 

FWD

PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

PLAY/STOP











STEP 

FWD

PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

PLAY/STOP

BT=1ßçç† BT=2Ççß† BT=3ßçç† BT=3Ççß† BT=4ßçç† BT=3ßçç† BT=1ßçç†

1/8Note 1/16Note 1/8Note 1/8Note 1/4Note 1/4Note 1/4Note

80% 80% 80% 80% 80% 40% 80%

LCD DISPLAY

(Beat/Clock)

It’s also possible to specify the step sizes for all notes by specifying the

shortest required step size and then using the [STEP FWD] button to enter

all other note lengths.

• In the case shown to the left, press and hold , press

[STEP FWD] and then

, and then release .

NOTES

Editing Functions

The following functions make it possible to “edit” recorded data to polish and refine your sound.

NOTES

• When using any of the editing functions on a custom style, be sure to

select style number 00 before engaging the editing function.

■ Quantization

It is possible to “quantize” recorded data to straighten out the timing of a track or pad.

ZSet the Quantize Step Size ....................................................................................................................

Set the required quantize step size in the same way as the step-record

step size (see page 50).

GATE

TIME

STEP

SIZE

STEP

REC

QUANTIZE

XSelect the Track or Pad to Be Quantized .............................................................................................

Press the track or pad button corresponding to the track or pad you want

to quantize while holding the RECORDING section [QUANTIZE] button.

Both the [QUANTIZE] and track/pad button indicators will flash. The

ARE YOU SURE? indicator will light and the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will

ask “Are you sure?”

NOTES

• You can quantize several Song Memory or Custom Accompaniment

tracks at the same time. Press the required track buttons one after

another while holding the [QUANTIZE] button.

GATE

TIME

STEP

SIZE

STEP

REC

QUANTIZE

CConfirm or Cancel the Quantize Operation..........................................................................................

Press the [YES] button if you want to go ahead with the quantize opera-

tion, thus irreversibly altering the selected track or pad. Press [NO] to can-

cel the operation and preserve the contents of the track or pad. “Now

Quantizing” will appear on the LCD display panel while the data is being

quantized. “Completed” will appear briefly when the data has been

quantized.

NOTES

• Preset accompaniment track data cannot be quantized.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Step=0–:1/4Note

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Step=0–:1/4Note

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

Record Functions

■ Clearing Tracks

The [CLEAR] button can be used to completely erase the following data:

• All data after the current measure in the specified SONG MEMORY track.

• All data from the specified CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT track.

• All data from the specified MULTI PAD.

ZFor a SONG MEMORY Track, Set the Start Measure ..........................................................................

Use the [MEASURE #] button to set the first measure to be cleared

(page 44). All subsequent measures up to the end of the song will be

cleared.

MEASURE #

XSpecify the Track or Pad to Be Cleared ...............................................................................................

Press the appropriate track or pad button while holding the [CLEAR]

button. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will light and the PSR-1700/PSR-

2700 will ask “Are you sure?”

CAUTION

• Turning the power OFF during the clear-ready mode can result in

a loss of recorded data.

NOTES

• You can clear several Song Memory or Custom Accompaniment

tracks at the same time. Press the required track buttons one after

another while holding the [CLEAR] button.

CLEAR

CConfirm or Cancel the Clear Operation................................................................................................

Press the [YES] button if you want to go ahead with the clear operation,

thus erasing the selected track or pad. Press [NO] to cancel the operation

and preserve the contents of the track or pad. “Now Clearing” will appear

on the LCD display panel while the data is being cleared. “Completed” will

appear briefly when the data has been cleared.

NOTES

• Since the track indicators light when there is data in any accompani-

ment section, clearing a Custom Accompaniment track will not cause

the track indicator to go out if data is present in any other section.

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

■ Changing the Recorded Settings

The [REWRITE SETTING] button can be used to change the settings of all recordable pa-

rameters for any specified track or pad. You could, for example, use this function to change the

voice or effect used in a SONG MEMORY track.

Rewritable Data

All data in the following tracks and pads except note on/off, octave, sustain, pitch bend,

modulation, expression, and chord changes:

• Song Memory Accompaniment Track

• Song Memory Melody Tracks

• Custom Accompaniment

• Multi Pad

ZFor Song Memory Settings Set the Start Measure..............................................................................

Only if you will be rewriting Song Memory settings, use the [MEAS-

URE #] button in conjunction with the [+] and [–] buttons, the number but-

tons, or the data dial to specify the measure at which you want the settings

to be rewritten. The specified measure number will appear on the LCD dis-

play panel.

MEASURE #

XSelect the Track or Pad to be Altered...................................................................................................

Press the track or pad button corresponding to the track or pad you want

to alter while holding the RECORDING section [REWRITE SETTING]

button (for a Custom Accompaniment, first select the section you want to

edit). Both the [REWRITE SETTING] and track/pad button indicators

will flash.

REWRITE

SETTING

CChange the Settings as Required .........................................................................................................

For the Song Memory or Multi Pads use the [PLAY/STOP] button to

start playback. Make the required setting changes to the recordable param-

eters at the appropriate point during playback.

If you make any changes during rewrite standby — i.e. after engaging

the Rewrite Setting function but before starting playback — the specified

changes will be at the very beginning of the track/pad data (at the beginning

of the specified measure for the Song Memory).

For a Custom Accompaniment, use the ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL

section [START/STOP] button or play a note on the keyboard to start play-

back and then make the required setting changes to the recordable param-

eters. Rewriting data in the middle of a Custom Accompaniment pattern

affects the entire track.

NOTES

• Preset accompaniment track data cannot be rewritten.

STEP 

BWD

RESET PLAY/STOP

STEP 

FWD

■ SONG MEMORY/MULTI PADS

FADE IN/OUTSTART/STOPSYNC-START/STOP

■ CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT

VStop .........................................................................................................................................................

Press the track or pad button for which the settings have been rewritten.

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 feature

a floppy disk drive that allows virtually

unlimited storage of songs you record

using the Song Memory, custom ac-

companiments, Multi Pad data, Regis-

tration Memory data, and sampled

voices (PSR-2700 only). The disk drive

also allows the PSR-1700 and PSR-

2700 to play standard MIDI music files

(file format 0) and Yamaha Disk

Orchestra Collection disks.

Using Floppy Disks

●Type of Disk

■

Use only double-sided double density

(2DD) 3.5-inch floppy disks with the PSR-

1700 and PSR-2700.

the disk back into the slot, then repeat the

eject procedure carefully.

■

Do not insert anything but floppy disks into

the disk drive. Other objects can damage

the disk drive or floppy disk.

■

Never open the disk’s shutter by hand or

touch the internal surface of the disk. Dirt,

dust, or grease on the disk’s magnetic

surface can cause data errors.

■

Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or

other device that emits a strong magnetic

field. Strong magnetic fields can partially

erase the data on the disk.

■

Do not store disks in places exposed to

direct sunlight or other sources of heat.

The acceptable storage temperature

range is approximately 4° to 53°C (39° to

127°F).

■

Do not store disks in areas subject to

extreme dryness or humidity. The accept-

able relative humidity range is approxi-

mately 8 to 90%.

■

Do not store disks in areas contaminated

with dust, sand, smoke, etc.

■

Do not place heavy objects such as books

on top of a disk.

■

Avoid getting floppy disks wet, particularly

with oily or sticky fluids. A disk that has

been wet with water should be allowed to

dry naturally before use. Disks contami-

nated by other fluids can cause damage to

the disk drive and should be discarded.

■

Be sure to apply the disk label at the

proper position. When changing the label

never cover the old label with a new label;

always remove the old label first.

●Head Cleaning

With extended use the read/write head of

the disk drive will pick up dust and other

particles that will eventually cause data

errors. If this occurs, clean the head with a

3.5 inch head cleaning disk available from

most computer supply stores.

●Data Backup

For maximum data security we strongly

recommend that you keep two copies of

important data on separate floppy disks.

These disks should ideally be stored in

separate locations. This gives you a

backup if one disk is lost or damaged.

●Protecting Your Data

(Write Protect Tab)

To prevent accidental erasure of important

data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to

the “protect” position (tab open). With the

tab in this position data can be read from

the disk but nothing can be written to it.

Floppy disks are an inexpensive, convenient, and reliable way to store your music data. They are not

indestructable, however, and should be handled with care. Observe the following points to ensure the long-term

safety of your disks and data.

● Floppy Disk Handling Precautions

Write protect tab on (locked

— write protected)

Write protect tab off (unlocked

— write enabled)

●Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks

■

Never attempt to eject a disk during a read

or write operation (i.e. while the disk drive

is operating). Doing so can damage both

the disk and the drive.

■

Never turn the power on or off while a disk

is in the drive. Always eject the disk before

turning the power off.

■

To eject a floppy disk from the disk drive

press the eject button slowly as far as it

will go. Then when the disk is fully ejected,

remove it by hand.

The disk may not be ejected properly if the

eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is

not pressed in far enough (the eject button

may become stuck halfway with the disk

extending from the slot by only a few

millimeters). If this is the case, do not

attempt to pull out the partially ejected

disk. Doing so may damage the disk drive

mechanism and/or the floppy disk. To

remove a partially ejected disk, try press-

ing the eject button once again or push

LOAD

SAVE

PART

MINUS ONE

SELECT

FILE #

SAVE

DISK

QUICK PLAY

MINUS ONESTART/STOP

DELETE FORMATLOAD

SAVE

PART

MINUS ONE

SELECT

FILE #

SAVE

DISK

QUICK PLAY

MINUS ONESTART/STOP

DELETE FORMAT

FILE NAME EXTENSION

...........................................

ALL 

SNG

STY

PAD

REG

MID

EVT

: ALL DATA

: SONG

: STYLE

: MULTI PADS

REGISTRATION

: STANDARD MIDI

: DISK ORCHESTRA

PSR-1700 PSR-2700

FILE NAME

EXTENSION

..................................

ALL 

SNG

STY

PAD

REG

VCE

VDP

MID



EVT

: ALL DATA



: SONG

: STYLE

: MULTI PADS

REGISTRATION

: VOICE

: VOICE DUMP

: STANDARD

MIDI

: DISK

ORCHESTRA

■Formatting a New Floppy Disk

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 use only 3.5" 2DD floppy disks. Before you can use a new disk for saving

data, the disk must be “formatted” as described below.

ZInsert the Disk To Be Formatted ...........................................................................................................

NOTES

• If an unformatted disk is already in the drive and the format operation

was cancelled prior to execution, press the [FORMAT] button to re-

engage the format function.

• The [FORMAT] button can also be used when you want to re-format a

formatted disk - to erase all the data it contains, for example.

• “Unformatted Disk” will appear on the display if an unformatted write-

protected disk is loaded. Make sure the disk’s write protect tab is in

the write position before formatting.

XConfirm and Format ...............................................................................................................................

Press the [YES] button to confirm and execute the format operation (or

press [NO] to cancel). Formatting an entire disk takes a few seconds, and

the progress of the operation is shown on the LCD display panel in percent

formatted: “0%” through “100%”. When the disk has been 100% formatted

the format function will be automatically disengaged.

Insert a new blank disk. Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set

to the “write” position (tab closed), and insert the new disk into the disk

drive unit with the sliding door facing the drive slot and the label side of the

disk facing upward. The disk should click securely into place.

When an unformatted disk is properly loaded, “Format?” will appear on

the LCD display panel, the ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash and the

PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?”.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Format?

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Format?

DELETE FORMAT

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Formatting: 75%

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Formatting: 75%

NOTES

• Be careful not to format a disk that already contains data you

want to keep. The format operation erases all data on the floppy

disk!

• The “Format?” display will also appear if you insert a disk that has

been formatted on a piece of equipment other than the PSR-1700 or

PSR-2700.

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

CAUTION

• Never remove the disk or turn the power off while the “Format-

ting” display is showing.

Using Floppy Disks

■Saving, Loading, & Deleting Disk Files

● Saving to Disk

A single floppy disk can hold up to 99 separate files (depending on the file size). Each file on a disk has a

unique file number (01 through 99) and file name. You can specify both the file number and file name you want

to save to.

When saving data to disk you must also specify a file type according to the type of data you want to save.

The file types are listed below (they’re also listed on the panel in the DISK control section). The “file extension”

is a period and three-character suffix attached to the end of each file name to identify the file type.

Type File Extension Data Saved

All .ALL All data except sampled voices: song, custom accompaniment, multi pad,

registration memory.

Song .SNG The song data currently in the song memory.

Custom Style .STY The current custom style (style no. 00)

Multi Pad .PAD All current multi pad data; pads [1] through [4].

Registration Memory .REG All current registration memory settings; [1] through [8].

Single Voice (PSR-2700) .VCE A single specified sampled voice (the currently selected sampled voice in

the digital sampling section).

Sample Dump (PSR-2700) .VDP All sampled voices currently in the sample memory.

Press the [FILE #] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number

buttons, the data dial, or the [FILE #] button itself to specify the file

number you want to save to.

CAUTION

• If you select a file number that already contains data, the original

data will be erased and replaced by the new data!

PSR-2700PSR-1700

F0–1:********.***

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff F0–1:********.***

CSelect a File Number ..............................................................................................................................

FILE #

NOTES

• In the case of a Single Voice (.VCE) the currently selected sampled

voice number will be saved with the sampled voice data. The same

sampled voice number will then be automatically selected when the

voice is loaded (the load destination voice number can be changed as

required).

If an appropriate disk is not already in the drive, insert the disk you want

to save the data to. If necessary, format the disk as described in the previous

section before proceeding.

NOTES

• When a formatted disk is inserted the amount of space remaining on

the disk is displayed in kilobytes.

Press the [SAVE PART] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the

number buttons, the data dial, or the [SAVE PART] button itself to specify

the file type that you want to save.

SAVE

PART

PSR-2700PSR-1700

PART=A–LL

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff PART=A–LL

XSelect a File Type ...................................................................................................................................

ZInsert a Formatted Disk .........................................................................................................................

VPress the [SAVE] Button and Confirm .................................................................................................

When the desired file type and number have been specified, press the

[SAVE] button. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash, and the PSR-1700/

PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?”. Press [YES] to continue or [NO] to cancel

the save operation.

“Saving” will appear on the LCD display panel for a few seconds while the

data is being saved. “Save Completed” will appear briefly when the data has

been saved.

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

SAVE

PSR-2700PSR-1700

---ALL Saving---

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff ---ALL Saving---

NOTES

• An “S” will appear in front of the file number when the save function is

selected .

MNOPQRSTUVWXYZ012345678

● Enter an Original File Name Prior to Saving

The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 automatically creates a file name (for example

“PSR_ _ _01”) for the file you are about to save. If you want to enter a more

descriptive name for easier file identification (and this is recommended), this

can be done via the keyboard immediately before executing step V, above. A

file name can consist of up to eight characters. Each key on the keyboard en-

ters a different character, listed immediately below the key. The lowest key

(C1) functions as a shift key that shifts between lower- and upper-case charac-

ters: hold the SHIFT key while pressing a character key to enter the upper-

case character. Each time a character is entered the cursor moves to the next

character position (you cannot write over the file extension following the pe-

riod at then end of the file name). The F5 and F#5 keys move the cursor back-

ward and forward within the file name. Use these keys to place the cursor

where you want to enter or change a character. The DELETE key (G5) deletes

the character at the cursor position.

When you’ve completed the name, start the save operation by pressing the

ENTER key (C6) or by pressing the [YES] button as described in step V. Du-

plicate file names are not accepted. If you enter a file name that already exists

on the disk, the “Same Name” error message will appear on the display.

CAUTION

• Never remove the disk or turn the power off while the “Saving” dis-

play is showing.

NOTES

• If the file number you have selected already contains data, the PSR-1700/

PSR-2700 will ask for confirmation with then “Overwrite OK?” display. If

you’re sure you want to write of the existing data press the [YES] button.

Press [NO] if you want to cancel.

• If the disk becomes full during a save operation “Disk Full” will appear on

the display and the save operation will be aborted. In this case the data

saved up to that point will be cleared. Sampled voices are an exception,

however, since they can be saved individually. If the disk becomes full

while saving sampled voices the PSR-2700 will request a new disk in

order to save the remaining voices (“Insert Disk No. X” display — “X”

being the number of the required disk).

• When saving song, custom accompaniment, or multi pad data which uses

a sampled voice, be sure to save the sampled voice separately. The sam-

pled voice must then be independently loaded when the song, custom

accompaniment, or multi pad data is loaded for use. The sampled voice

data will automatically be loaded into the appropriate voice number (do

not change the destination voice number when loading).

• Save and Load operations can be canceled by pressing and holding the

[NO] button.

Using Floppy Disks

ZSelect a File.............................................................................................................................................

● Loading From Disk

LOAD

XPress the [LOAD] Button and Confirm.................................................................................................

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

CAUTION

• Never remove the disk or turn the power off while the “NowLoading”

display is showing. If you turn the power off while loading sampled

voices from disk, all data in the PSR-2700 Wave Ram will be lost.

NOTES

• Please note that when you load data from disk the loaded data will

replace any current data of the same type in the PSR-1700/PSR-2700

memory.

• An “L” will appear in front of the file number when the load function is

selected.

• If you select a file number with data that cannot be loaded or a file

number with no corresponding data, the “Can’t Load!” or “File Not Found!”

error message will appear (see “Error Messages” on page 81).

• If you load style data from disk, it will automatically be loaded into style

number “00” and can be selected and used in the same way as the preset

styles.

● Loading Data From the Supplied Demonstration Disk

File numbers 01 through 04 on the PSR-1700/2700 demonstration disk and

file numbers 01 and 02 on the PSR-2700 demonstration disk are demo songs

that can be played by using the quick play function. When the PSR-2700 dem-

onstration disk is inserted, the sampled voice data will automatically be loaded

into sampled voice number 128. The sampled voice will not be loaded

automatically if there is already data in sampled voice number 128, or if the

wave RAM is full. If there is already data in voice number 128 “Replace OK?”

will appear on the LCD display and the “Are you sure?” prompt will sound.

press [YES] to continue with the load operation. If the wave RAM is full

“Wave Ram Full” will appear on the LCD display. You will have to delete un-

necessary data before continuing with the load operation.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

---NowLoading---

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff ---NowLoading---

Press the [LOAD] button. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash and

the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?”. Press [YES] to load or

[NO] to cancel the load operation. “NowLoading” will appear on the display

while the data is being loaded, “Load Completed” will appear briefly when the

specified data has been loaded.

With the disk containing the file you want to load properly inserted in the

disk drive, press the [FILE #] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the

number buttons, the data dial, or the [FILE #] button itself to specify the file

number you want to load. The name of the selected file appears to the right of

the file number on the display.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

F0–1:-PSRååå01.ALL

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff F0–1:-PSRååå01.ALL

FILE #

File numbers 05 through 12 on the demonstration disk are accompaniment

styles that load into style number 00 and can be played by selecting that

number. A complete set of 8 voice and other settings appropriate for use with

the selected style are also loaded and stored in the registration memory. Press

the various REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons to try out these settings.

File numbers 13 through 20 contain complete sets of MULTI PAD data.

For the PSR-2700 file numbers 21 through 24 contain a range of sampled

sound effects (sampled voice). Select the destination sampled voice number

before loading these (below).

CAUTION

• If you set the supplied data disk’s write protect tab to the “off” posi-

tion and execute a save or delete operation, the data on the disk will

be lost. Keep the disk’s write protect tab in the “on” position to pre-

vent this.

• When the style data from the supplied disk is loaded, any previous

data in style number 00 and the contents of registration memories 1

through 8 will be overwritten.

NOTES

• Demo song data on the supplied disk(s) are in Standard MIDI File format.

● Loading Sampled Voices (PSR-2700)

When loading individual sampled voices it is also necessary to select the

sampled voice number to which you want the voice from disk to be loaded. First

select the sampled voice (single) file, press [LOAD], press [YES], and “Load

SVC to xxx” will appear on the LCD display. The first number to appear in the

“xxx” position is the voice number saved with the voice. At this point you

should select the destination sampled voice number (refer to page 66) and the

press [YES] to begin loading the voice.

NOTES

• “File Not Found!” will appear on the display if you attempt to delete a file

number that is already empty.

• A “D” will appear in front of the file number when the delete function is

selected.

Press the [DELETE] button. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash

and the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?”. Press [YES] to delete

the selected file or [NO] to cancel the delete operation. “Delete Completed”

will appear briefly when the specified file has been deleted.

DELETE FORMAT

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

PSR-2700PSR-1700

Delete Completed

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Delete Completed

XPress the [DELETE] Button and Confirm .............................................................................................

With the disk containing the file you want to delete properly inserted in the

disk drive, press the [FILE #] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the

number buttons, the data dial, or the [FILE #] button itself to specify the file

number you want to delete. The name of the selected file appears to the right

of the file number on the display.

ZSelect the File To Be Deleted ................................................................................................................

● Deleting a Disk File

PSR-2700PSR-1700

F0–1:-PSRååå01.ALL

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff F0–1:-PSRååå01.ALL

FILE #

NOTES

• When you try to load the sound effect data, file numbers 21 through 24, of

the included disk to your PSR-2700, the sampled voice numbers 124

through 127 will automatically be shown on the LCD display.

Using Floppy Disks

■Quick Play: Disk Orchestra Collection & Standard MIDI File Disks

In addition to using files recorded by the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 itself, the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 can play

back pre-recorded Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection music disks, Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft, ESEQ files,

and Standard MIDI File (file format 0) disks recorded on other equipment.

ZInsert the Disk.........................................................................................................................................

XStart Playback.........................................................................................................................................

Insert the Disk Orchestra Collection, PianoSoft, or Standard MIDI File disk.

NOTES

• You can select the song from which you want to start playback by using the

standard file number selection procedure (page 60).

• Touch sense 2 is automatically selected when a Disk Orchestra Collection

disk is inserted.

QUICK PLAY

MINUS ONESTART/STOP

• The file extensions for the

playable files are as follows:

Disk Orchestra Collection:

.EVT

Standard MIDI File (format 0):

.MID and .Xxx (“Xxx” is a number)

ESEQ File:

.EVT and .Pxx (“xx” is a number)

PianoSoft:

.(spaces)

CStop Playback.........................................................................................................................................

Press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

NOTES

• If you re-start playback after stopping it, playback will begin from the top of

the song that was in progress when playback was stopped.

Press the [MINUS ONE SELECT] button — the currently selected part will

appear on the LCD display panel. Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number but-

tons, the data dial, or the [MINUS ONE SELECT] button itself to specify the

part you want to mute:

0: L+R mutes the left- and right-hand parts.

1: R mutes the right-hand part.

2: L mutes the left-hand part.

NOTES

• In the case of Disk Orchestra Collection or PianoSoft disks, the left and right-

hand parts will be set automatically. With other files the MIDI transmit chan-

nels corresponding to “R” and “L” will be selected.

ZSelect the Part to Mute...........................................................................................................................

This function lets you mute (turn off) various parts of a Quick Play song so you can play them yourself on

the keyboard while the others are played automatically.

MINUS ONE

SELECT

● Minus One Playback

XEngage the Minus One Mode ................................................................................................................

Press the [MINUS ONE] button so that its indicator lights to actually mute the

selected part. The Minus One mode can be engaged either before or during Quick

Play playback.

Press the [MINUS ONE] button again so that its indicator goes out to exit

from the Minus One mode.

NOTES

• The Metronome function cannot be used during Quick Play.

MINUS ONESTART/STOP

QUICK PLAY

Press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button to start playback. Playback

will begin from the first song on the disk (or the selected song) and all songs on

the disk will be automatically played in sequence.

NOTES

• During Quick Play the file number and file name will appear on the LCD dis-

play, and “Q” will appear in front of the file number.

• If you press one of the PSR-1700/2700 function buttons during Quick Play,

the value of the corresponding function will be displayed for a few seconds

then the Quick Play file number/name display will re-appear.

• During Quick Play you can adjust the tempo of playback (page 28).

• If you press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button while a disk that does not

contain data that can be played by the Quick Play function is inserted, “Can’t

Play!” will appear on the display and the Quick Play operation will be aborted.

• If a Standard MIDI File or ESEQ File is not based on GM voice allocation, the

data will not be played back correctly.

The PSR-2700 features a built-in digital voice sampling system that lets you digitally

record any sounds from a microphone or line-level source and play those sounds via the

four SAMPLE PADS and/or the keyboard. The Digital Sampling system can record a maxi-

mum of 6 seconds of sound per sample pad, up to a total of 60 seconds. A sampled

“voice” is a complete set of data for the four SAMPLE PADS.

PSR-2700 Digital Sampling

CAUTION

• Never interrupt the PSR-2700 power supply - either by unplug-

ging the power cord or by turning the power switch off - during

sampling, during a clear operation, while the PSR-2700 is

processing sampled data (i.e. while “Squeezing” appears on the

display), or while loading sampled voices from disk. Doing so will

result in the loss of all data in the PSR-2700 wave RAM!

VOICE

NAME

FREQ TRIGGER

LEVEL



PITCH

MAPPINGVOICE #

REC

CLEAR

DIGITAL SAMPLING



INPUT LEVEL

MIN MAX

0 dB

–

6

–

12

–

18

–

24

–

30

–

SAMPLE PADS

1 2 3 4

■Setting the Input Level

For optimum sound quality you’ll need to match the input sensitivity on the PSR-2700 Digital Sampling sys-

tem to the output level of your source. After connecting and preparing your source:

ZEngage the Level Check Mode..............................................................................................................

Press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [REC] button. “LEVEL

CHECK MODE” will appear on the display and the [REC] indicator will

flash.

CD Player

REC

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

----LEVEL CHECK MODE----

LINE

SAMPLE IN

MIC

To use the Digital Sampler you’ll need to connect the source you intend

to use to either the rear-panel SAMPLE IN LINE or MIC jack. If you’ll be

recording via a microphone, plug the microphone into the SAMPLE IN

MIC jack. If you’ll be recording from a line-level source such as a cassette

player or other audio playback device, plug the player’s line output into the

SAMPLE IN LINE jack. If your audio playback device has RCA pin-jack

type outputs you’ll need to acquire a cable or connector converter that al-

lows connection to the PSR-2700’s 1/4-inch mono phone jack.

NOTES

• Be sure to obtain proper permission when sampling copyrighted mate-

rial.

■Connections

PSR-2700 Digital Sampling

XPlay the Source and Adjust the Level ..................................................................................................

Play the sound you intend to record, via microphone or line, and adjust

the INPUT LEVEL control while watching the level indicators above the

control. The length of the “bar” formed by the level indicators increases as

input level increases. For optimum sound quality, your input signal should

cause most of the indicators to light, but not all. If all indicators including

the red “0 dB” indicator light in response to the input signal you’re prob-

ably overloading the input circuitry and will end up with distorted sound. At

the other extreme, if none of the indicators light, or only the lowest one or

two indicators light, then the input signal is too small and the level of the

recorded sound will be too low.

NOTES

• The keyboard and other function buttons will not operate in the level

check mode.

■Setting the Sampling Frequency

The length of the sample you can record and its sound quality are determined by the “sampling frequency”. A

high sampling frequency produce better sound quality but shorter samples; a low sampling frequency allow

longer recording but with reduced sound quality. The PSR-2700 gives you two sampling frequency settings:

ZPress the [FREQ] Button .......................................................................................................................

Press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [FREQ] button. The current

sampling frequency setting will appear on the LCD display panel.

XSelect a Frequency Setting ...................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[FREQ] button itself to select the desired sampling frequency setting

(“LOW” or “HIGH”).

NOTES

• The “LOW” setting is automatically selected when the PSR-2700

power is initially turned on.

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Frequency=1–:LOW



INPUT LEVEL

MIN MAX

0 dB

–

6

–

12

–

18

–

24

–

30

–

FREQ

021

–+

RESET

Setting Length Sound Quality

1: LOW 6 sec. (approx.) Low

2: HIGH 3 sec. (approx.) High

CExit...........................................................................................................................................................

Once the input level has been set properly, press the DIGITAL SAM-

PLING [REC] button to exit from the level check mode.

REC

■Setting the Trigger Level

There are two ways to start sample recording: manual and triggered. With manual recording recording starts

the moment you press the [REC] and pad buttons, as described in the “Recording” section, below. With trig-

gered recording you initially engage the record standby mode and recording actually begins as soon as the PSR-

2700 detects an input signal that is higher than the selected trigger level. The [TRIGGER LEVEL] button lets

you select the method you want to use, and provides 5 different trigger levels. The trigger level you choose will

depend on the type of signal you want to record and the level of the background noise where you record. The

idea is to set the highest trigger level that will start recording without cutting off the attack of the sound you are

recording. If the trigger level is too low, recording can be triggered by ambient background noise at the wrong

time.

ZPress the [TRIGGER LEVEL] Button ....................................................................................................

Press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [TRIGGER LEVEL] button.

The current trigger level setting will appear on the LCD display panel.

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff Trig.Level=3–

TRIGGER

LEVEL

XSelect a Trigger Level ............................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[TRIGGER LEVEL] button itself to select the desired trigger level setting

(“OFF” or “1” through “5”).

When the trigger level is set to “OFF”, manual recording is selected and

recording will start immediately when the [REC] and pad buttons are

pressed (see the “Recording” section, below). Automatic triggering is se-

lected when a value from 1 to 5 is selected. “1” produces the lowest trigger-

ing level, triggering recording when even a very soft sound is detected at

the input. Increasing values produce progressively higher trigger levels. Try

a trigger level of 2 or 3 to begin with. The default setting of “3” can be in-

stantly selected by pressing the [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously.

NOTES

• Proper trigger operation depends on proper input level adjustment.

Make sure you set the input level properly as described on page 63.

• The trigger level is set to “3” when the PSR-2700 power is initially

turned on.

021

–+

RESET

PSR-2700 Digital Sampling

■Recording

NOTES

• Although a maximum of 255 individual samples can be recorded,

the samples have to be extremely short — a fraction of a second

each — to achieve this number. During normal sample recording the

sample memory is likely to become full long before the maximum of

255 samples is reached. The maximum total recording time — 60

seconds — is a more reliable guide as to how much of the sample

memory has been used or is available.

Each sampled “voice” recorded by the PSR-2700 can contain four separate samples, one in each SAMPLE

PAD. You can play the individual samples included in the selected sample voice by playing the appropriate pad,

or by playing on the keyboard when the VOICE section SAMPLED VOICE indicator is lit. When you play a

sampled voice via the keyboard, the four separate samples it contains are assigned to different ranges of the key-

board. This will be explained in more detail in the “Playing Samples via the Keyboard” section on page 70.

Your sampled voices will be retained in the PSR-2700 sample memory even when the power is turned off as

long as the backup batteries are installed on the AC plug is connected. Your samples can also be saved to and

loaded from disk so you can create and original sample library.

ZSelect a Sample Voice Number.............................................................................................................

Press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [VOICE #] button. The cur-

rent selected sample voice number will appear on the LCD display panel.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the

[VOICE #] button itself to select the desired sample voice number. If the

selected voice number contains no data, “********” will appear on the

display in place of the voice name.

VOICE #

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff SVC=0–01:********

Press the SAMPLE PAD to which you want to record while holding

the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [REC] button. “Sampling Ready” will

appear on the display. Recording will begin immediately if you set the

trigger level to “OFF” (see “Setting the Trigger Level, above). If you se-

lected automatic triggering, the [REC] button and selected SAMPLE PAD

will flash until recording is triggered by an input signal. When recording

starts, whether manual or triggered, the [REC] button indicator will light

continuously and “Sampling” will appear on the display.

NOTES

• The keyboard and other function buttons will not operate during

sample recording.

• If the “No Bank” or “Wave Ram Full” error message appears, there

is not enough memory available for sampling and some data will

have to be cleared before sampling will be possible (See “Error

Messages” on page 81).

SAMPLE PADS

REC

1 2 3 4

SVC=001 Frq=LOW Trg=3

>>>> Sampling !!!!! <<<<

Press the SAMPLE PAD to which you are recording to stop recording.

Both the [REC] button and SAMPLE PAD indicators will go out.

NOTES

• Try to stop record immediately after the sound has finished in order

to conserve sample memory and allow maximum total recording

time.

• If the maximum sampling time is exceeded, “Sampling End” will

appear on the display and recording will stop automatically.

• In some cases “SQUEEZING XXX%” will appear on the display

while the PSR-2700 processes the sampled data after recording.

“XXXKByteFree” will then appear, indicating the amount of RAM

remaining after the data has been processed.

SAMPLE PADS

1 2 3 4

XRecord .....................................................................................................................................................

CStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

VRepeat as Necessary .............................................................................................................................

Repeat the above procedure to record the remaining SAMPLE PADS, as

required.

NOTES

• The PSR-2700 has 1,020 kilobytes (1.02 megabytes) of waveform

RAM memory for sampled voice storage. To find out how much of this

memory is available for recording press the [CLEAR] button: “XXXX

KByteFree” will appear on the display (“XXXX” indicates the remaining

RAM in kilobytes).

• The sample data is retained in memory even when the power switch is

turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug

is connected.

● Enter an Original Voice Name

The PSR-2700 automatically creates a voice name for each sampled

voice. If you want to enter a more descriptive name for easier identification

(and this is recommended), this can be done via the keyboard after pressing

the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [VOICE NAME] button so that its indi-

cator lights. A voice name can consist of up to eight characters. Each key on

the keyboard enters a different character, listed immediately below the key.

The lowest key (C1) functions as a shift key that shifts between lower- and

upper-case characters: hold the SHIFT key while pressing a character key

to enter the upper-case character. Each time a character is entered the cursor

moves to the next character position. The F5 and F#5 keys move the cursor

backward and forward within the voice name. Use these keys to place the

cursor where you want to enter or change a character. The DELETE key

(G5) deletes the character at the cursor position. Press the ENTER key

(C6) when you’ve finished entering the voice name — this returns you to

the voice number display (your voice name will not be entered if you don’t

press the ENTER key).

NOTES

• Playing the keyboard will produce no sound during voice name entry.

• No name can be entered for a voice that contains no data.

SAMPLE PADS

1 2 3 4

VOICE #

VOICE

NAME

MNOPQRSTUVWXYZ012345678

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff SVC=001:H–ello!

The recorded samples can be played simply by pressing the appropriate

SAMPLE PAD. The sample sounds only as long as the pad is held, so you

play only a section of a sample by releasing the pad early, or rapidly

retrigger the first section of the sample by repeatedly pressing the pad. The

pads can also be played at the same time so you can play all four samples

simultaneously, as required.

To select a different sample voice for playback via the pads, then press

the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [VOICE #] button and use the [+] and

[–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE #] button

itself to select the desired sample voice number.

NOTES

• Different voices can be selected for playback via the pads and key-

board (see page 70), and these can be played simultaneously via the

pads and keyboard.

• To use sample pad data from disk, load the data into the PSR-2700

as described on page 60.

■Playing the Sample Pads

PSR-2700 Digital Sampling

■Editing Samples

The following functions provide a range of useful sample editing capabilities.

NOTES

• If the sample data cannot be edited the following messages will ap-

pear on the LCD display: “No Wave Data” if there is no data in the

pad; “Protected Voice” is the data is protected and cannot be edited

by the PSR-2700.

Press the [PITCH] button or any other function button — the

[VOICE#] button, for example — to exit from the pitch function.

ZHold [CLEAR] and Select the Voice Or a Pad......................................................................................

While holding the [CLEAR] button press the [VOICE #] button if you

want to clear the entire voice, or the SAMPLE PAD you want to clear if

you only want to clear one pad. The [CLEAR] button, pad indicator if a

pad was selected, and ARE YOU SURE? indicators will flash and the “Are

you sure?” prompt will also sound.

VOICE #

CLEAR

The contents of an entire sampled voice (four pads) or individual SAMPLE PADS can be completely cleared

(erased) as follows:

XClear the Voice or Pad ...........................................................................................................................

Press the [YES] button to clear the current sample voice or selected

pad, or the [NO] button to cancel the clear operation.

NOTES

• In some cases “SQUEEZING XXX%” will appear on the display while

the PSR-2700 processes the sampled data during the clear process.

“XXXXKByteFree” will then appear, indicating the amount of RAM

remaining after the data has been processed.

• When a sample pad is cleared, the mapping applied to that pad is also

cleared and the default mapping will be restored.

ARE YOU SURE ?

YES NO

● Clearing Samples

ZHold [PITCH] and Select a Pad..............................................................................................................

While holding the [PITCH] button press the SAMPLE PAD containing

the sample you want to tune. The selected SAMPLE PAD indicator will

flash and its current pitch value will appear on the LCD display.

SAMPLE PADS

1 2 3 4



PITCH

The pitch of each SAMPLE PAD can be adjusted over approximately a ±50-cent range (100 cents total —

approximately one semitone). This is a convenient way to tune samples to match the music in which they will be

used.

● Tuning the Samples

XSelect the Pitch.......................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to set

the pitch as required. The pitch range is from “–10” through “0” to “+10”. A

setting of “0” produces normal pitch. Each increment raises (+) or lowers (–

) the pitch by approximately 5 cents. You can play the pads while tuning to

check the sound.

The normal tuning value can be recalled instantly by pressing the [+]

and [–] buttons at the same time.

021

–+

RESET

08:Showtune 001:Sampl001

AccOff Pitch PAD2= 0–0

If you press only the [PITCH] button SAMPLE PAD 1 will automati-

cally be selected.

CExit...........................................................................................................................................................

The VOICE section [VOL], [DSP DEPTH], and [PAN] buttons can be used to set the overall volume, DSP

depth, and pan position of all four SAMPLE PADS.

ZHold [EDIT] and Press [VOICE #] ..........................................................................................................

While holding the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button press the DIG-

ITAL SAMPLING section [VOICE #] button. All four SAMPLE PAD indi-

cators will flash and the volume parameter will appear on the LCD display

panel.

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

ORCHESTRATION

VOICE #

08:Showtune 001:Sampl001

AccOff Volume=2–1

XSelect & Set the Parameters..................................................................................................................

Use the [VOL], [DSP DEPTH], and [PAN] buttons to select the param-

eter you want to adjust, then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number but-

tons, the data dial, or the selected function button itself to set the parameter

as required (see page 14 for details on the volume parameter, page 15 for

the DSP depth, and page 15 for pan).

VOL DSP

DEPTH

PAN

● Volume, DSP Depth, & Pan Settings

CExit...........................................................................................................................................................

Press any other function button to exit from the parameter adjustment

mode.

ZHold [EDIT] and Select a Pad ................................................................................................................

While holding the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button press the SAM-

PLE PAD containing the sample you want to adjust. The selected SAMPLE

PAD indicator will flash and its current volume value will appear on the

LCD display panel.

08:Showtune 001:Sampl001

AccOff Volume=2–1

XSet the Volume .......................................................................................................................................

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to set

the volume as required (“0” for no sound through “24” for maximum vol-

ume).

021

–+

RESET

L1 R1

L2 R2

EDIT

ORCHESTRATION

CExit...........................................................................................................................................................

Press any other function button to exit from the individual pad volume

adjustment mode.

NOTES

• The individual volume setting also apply when the sampled voices are

played via the keyboard.

◆ Individual SAMPLE PAD Volume Settings

It is also possible to individually adjust the volume of each pad as follows:

PSR-2700 Digital Sampling

■Playing Samples via the Keyboard

To play your samples via the PSR-2700 keyboard, press the VOICE sec-

tion [SAMPLED VOICE] button so that its indicator lights. If all four

SAMPLE PADS have been recorded for the currently selected sampled

voice, the individual samples will initially be assigned to the keyboard as

follows:

VOICE

SELECT

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

SAMPLED

VOICE

PAD Key Range

PAD 1 C2 C1 … F#2

PAD 2 C3 G2 … F#3

PAD 3 C4 G3 … F#4

PAD 4 C5 G4 … C6

C2 C3 C4 C5

PAD 1

(C1…F#2)

PAD 2

(G2…F#3)

PAD 3

(G3…F#4)

PAD 4

(G4…C6)

In the above chart “Key” is the key on the keyboard to which the

original pitch of the recorded sample is assigned. For example, pressing the

C2 key will produce exactly the same sound as pressing PAD 1. Other keys

within the specified range play the sample at appropriately higher or lower

pitches. If only one sample is recorded, the sample will play across the

entire range of the keyboard. If two or three samples are recorded they will

be assigned to the same keys but the ranges will be adjusted to suit the

number of samples. The sample key assignments can be changed by using

the “Mapping” function, described below.

To select a different sample voice for playback via the keyboard, make

sure the VOICE section [SAMPLED VOICE] indicator is

on, then use the

[+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE SE-

LECT] button to select the desired sample voice number.

Press the [SAMPLED VOICE] button so that its indicator goes out

when you want to return to the normal voice mode.

NOTES

• The sampled voices have 26-note polyphony in addition to the 28

notes available for the normal voices.

• The sampled voices can be assigned to any of the ORCHESTRA-

TION parts.

021

–+

RESET

Initial mapping

● Mapping

This function allows the original pitch of the sampled sound to be “mapped” to any key on the keyboard,

thus changing the key assignments and keyboard ranges described above.

ZHold [MAPPING] and Select a Pad........................................................................................................

While holding the [MAPPING] button press the SAMPLE PAD con-

taining the sample you want to re-map to the keyboard. The selected SAM-

PLE PAD indicator will flash and the note number to which it is currently

assigned will appear on the display.

08:Showtune 001:Sampl001

AccOff Mapping PAD2=0–60

If you press only the [MAPPING] button SAMPLE PAD 1 will auto-

matically be selected.

SAMPLE PADS

MAPPING

1 2 3 4

XSelect a New Key....................................................................................................................................

Press the key to which the original voice of the sample is to be mapped.

The note number of the selected key will appear on the LCD display panel.

The key can also be selected by using the [+] and [–] buttons, the number

buttons, or the data dial to select the appropriate note number on the display

(the note numbers, 36 through 96, are listed above the keys). You can play

the pad while mapping to confirm the sound.

CExit...........................................................................................................................................................

Press the [MAPPING] button or any other function button — the

[VOICE SELECT] button, for example — to exit from the mapping func-

tion.

NOTES

• Normally the key to which a sample is mapped will become approxi-

mately the center of its range. The actual range will depend on how

many of the four samples are recorded and to which keys they are

mapped.

• The default mapping assignments are restored for pads which are

cleared as described in “Clearing Samples”: PAD 1 to C2, PAD 2 to

C3, PAD 3 to C4, and PAD 4 to C5.

• If you press several keys simultaneously while mapping the last key

pressed take priority.

• Mapping assignments are retained even if new samples are recorded.

• Mapping is not possible for: pads that contain no data (“No Wave

Data” error); a key that is already mapped (“Same Note” error).

MAPPING

The PSR-2700 is backed up by the backup batteries and will remain in-

tact as long as a good set of batteries is installed. Even if no batteries are

installed the memory will be maintained as long as the power plug is con-

nected to an AC outlet. It is always a good idea, however, to save samples

you want to keep to floppy disk. You can save either single voices or the

entire contents of the sample memory to disk as required. Full instructions

on floppy disk use are given in the “Floppy Disk” section beginning on

page 56.

■Sample Memory Backup & Disk Storage

Optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitches and/or or

FC7 foot controllers can be plugged into either or both

of the rear-panel PEDAL jacks and used to control a

wide range of functions.

Pedal Assign

PEDAL

(FC7) (FC5)

The functions listed below can be assigned to the footswitch or foot con-

troller connected to the PEDAL 1 and PEDAL 2 jacks by pressing the appro-

priate function button while holding the PEDAL ASSIGN [1] or [2] button.

PEDAL ASSIGN

STYLE

SELECT

AUTO

ACCOMP

Example: Assigning AUTO ACCOMP

on/off switching to the pedal.

PEDAL ASSIGN

PEDAL

Assignable Footswitch Functions (FC4, FC5)

• AUTO ACCOMP ON/OFF

• FADE IN/OUT

• INTRO

• VARIATION [A]

• VARIATION [B]

• FILL IN 1

• FILL IN 2

• BREAK

• ENDING

• ACCOMPANIMENT CON-

TROL START/STOP

• SYNC-START ON/OFF

• CHORD 2 FINGERING

• EFFECT ON/OFF

• HARMONY ON/OFF

• SONG RESET

• SONG PLAY/STOP

• GATE TIME

• STEP SIZE

Assignable Foot Controller Function (FC7)

NOTES

• Using the foot controller while an Assignable Foot Controller Function is

assigned has the same effect as holding the corresponding panel but-

ton.

• The PEDAL 1 jack is initially assigned to sustain control. A footswitch

connected to this jack functions as a damper pedal, controlling sustain.

Press the pedal to sustain notes after the keys are released.

• The PEDAL 2 jack is initially assigned to the voice volume control (MIDI

Expression control). An FC7 foot controller connected to this jack can

be used to control voice volume: press the pedal forward to increase

voice volume; backward to decrease voice volume.

• A footswitch or foot controller can be returned to its default function by

pressing it while holding the corresponding PEDAL ASSIGN button.

• The ON/OFF operation of a footswitch or the control direction of a foot

controller can be reversed by double-clicking the corresponding PEDAL

ASSIGN button (press the button twice rapidly) without pressing the

pedal.

• If the GATE TIME or STEP size parameter is assigned to PEDAL 1, the

parameter will be decremented each time the pedal is pressed. If as-

signed to PEDAL 2, the parameter will be incremented each time the

pedal is pressed.

• For CHORD 2 mode control press the [FINGERING] button while hold-

ing the appropriate PEDAL ASSIGN button. Then the footswitch can be

pressed while the Auto Accompaniment is playing to switch to the

CHORD 2 mode. The CHORD 2 mode remains active only as long as

the footswitch is pressed.

• The pedal assignment can be stored in the Registration Memory.

VOICE • VOLUME (24 steps) • DSP DEPTH (15 steps) • PAN (14 steps)

ACCOMP • VOLUME (24 steps)

MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that

allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and

control one another. This makes it possible to create “systems” of MIDI instruments and equip-

ment that offer far greater versatility and control than is available with isolated instruments.

Most MIDI keyboards transmit note and velocity (touch response) infor-

mation via the MIDI OUT connector whenever a note is played on the key-

board. If the MIDI OUT connector is connected to the MIDI IN connector

of a second keyboard (synthesizer, etc.) or a tone generator (essentially a

synthesizer with no keyboard), the second keyboard or tone generator will

respond precisely to notes played on the original transmitting keyboard.

The result is that you can effectively play two instruments at once,

providing thick multi-instrument sounds. The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 also

transmit “program change” data when one of its voices is selected. Depend-

ing on how the receiving device is set up, the corresponding voice will be

automatically selected on the receiving keyboard or tone generator

whenever a voice is selected on the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700.

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 are capable of receiving the same MIDI

data, so a second MIDI keyboard connected to the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700

MIDI IN connector can be used to remotely play the instrument and select

voices as required.

● Simple MIDI Control ................................................................................................................................

Tone Generator

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

PSR-1700/2700

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI Keyboard

PSR-1700/2700

MIDI

Although the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 feature a built-in “sequencer”

(the Song Memory is a type of sequencer), the same type of musical infor-

mation transfer described above can be used for more sophisticated MIDI

sequence recording using an external sequencer or music computer. A MIDI

sequence recorder or music computer can be used to “record” MIDI data

received from a PSR-1700 or PSR-2700, for example. When the recorded

data is played back, the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 automatically “plays” the

recorded performance in precise detail.

NOTES

• Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters, since cables

longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors.

Sequencer

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

PSR-1700/2700

● MIDI Sequence Recording ......................................................................................................................

The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external MIDI de-

vice which can be used to control the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700. The MIDI

THRU connector re-transmits data received at the MIDI IN connector, al-

lowing “chaining” of several MIDI devices. The MIDI OUT connector

transmits MIDI data generated by the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 (e.g. note and

velocity data produced by playing the keyboard).

● The MIDI Connectors ..............................................................................................................................

THRU

MIDI

OUT IN

MIDI

TRANSMIT

CH

L R

RECEIVE

CH/CL/COM

LOCAL/

MIDI OUT

LOCAL



MIDI

OUT

MODE

................

0 RX OFF

1 MULTI

2 REMOTE

3 CHORD

4 ROOT

MIDI Reception Modes

The [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] button is used to specify the reception mode for each of the 16 MIDI channels,

the internal or external clock mode, and MIDI start/stop command reception mode.

■ Channel Reception Modes

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 allow any of five reception modes to be individually assigned to MIDI chan-

nels 1 through 16. The five modes are:

Mode “0” RX OFF: Reception disabled.

Mode “1” MULTI: Received MIDI note data directly controls the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 tone

generator. Different voices can be played on different channels.

Mode “2” REMOTE: Received MIDI note data is handled in the same way as data from the

PSR-1700/PSR-2700’s own keyboard.

Mode “3” CHORD: Received MIDI note data is interpreted as Auto Accompaniment chord

commands.

Mode “4” ROOT: Received MIDI note data is interpreted as Auto Accompaniment bass note

commands .

MIDI

NOTES

• If the PSR-1700/2700 receives more than one note at the same time while mode “4” (Root) is

selected, the last note will be interpreted as the Auto Accompaniment bass note.

NOTES

• “Clock Rx” and “Cmnd Rx” will appear on the display if you increment

above channel number 16 or below channel number 1. These selec-

tions are used for the Clock Mode and Start/Stop Mode functions

described below.

• Be sure to set the transmit channel to the same channel specified in

mode 2, 3, or 4.

ZPress the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] Button & Select a Channel...........................................................

Press the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] button, then use the [+] and [–]

buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [RECEIVE CH/CL/

COM] button itself to select the MIDI channel (1 … 16) for which you

want to specify a new reception mode. The channel number appears on the

right of the LCD display panel.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

RxCh0–1=1:Multi

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff RxCh0–1=1:Multi

RECEIVE

CH/CL/COM

MODE

................

0 RX OFF

1 MULTI

2 REMOTE

3 CHORD

4 ROOT

XSelect the Desired Mode ........................................................................................................................

Use the [+/–] button in the number-button row to select the desired re-

ception mode for the selected channel. The modes are selected in sequence

each time the [+/–] button is pressed, and the mode number appears on the

LCD display panel.

NOTES

• The currently selected reception mode is retained in memory even

when the power switch is turned off, as long as backup batteries are

installed or an AC plug is connected.

–

_ _

■ Clock Mode

Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as required. When disabled, all of the

time-based functions (Auto Accompaniment, SONG MEMORY, etc.) are controlled by the PSR-1700/PSR-

2700’s own internal clock, the speed of which is set by the [TEMPO] button. When MIDI clock reception is

enabled, however, all timing is controlled by an external MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN terminal

(the [TEMPO] setting has no effect).

NOTES

• If clock reception is enabled but no MIDI clock signal is received for more than 400

milliseconds, external clock reception is automatically disable and normal internal

clock operation resumes.

• If you attempt to change the tempo setting when MIDI clock reception is enabled,

“Tempo

=External” will appear on the LCD display panel.

ZPress the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] Button & Select “Clock Rx” .........................................................

Press the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] button, then use the [+] and [–]

buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [RECEIVE CH/CL/

COM] button itself to select “Clock Rx” on the LCD display panel (“Clock

Rx” is the next step above MIDI channel 16).

Use the [+/–] button in the number-button row to select the desired clock

mode. The disable and enable modes are selected alternately each time the

[+/–] button is pressed, and the selected mode appears on the right digit of

the LCD display panel (“Clock Rx=0:Off” for disable; “Clock Rx:=1:On”

for enable).

–

_ _

XSelect the Desired Mode ........................................................................................................................

Use the [+/–] button in the number-button row to select the desired start

mode. The start/stop modes are selected in sequence each time the [+/–]

button is pressed: “Cmnd Rx=0:Off”, “Cmnd Rx=1:Accomp”, or “Cmnd

Rx=2:Song”.

ZPress the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] Button & Select “Cmnd Rx”.........................................................

Press the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] button, then use the [+] and [–]

buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [RECEIVE CH/CL/

COM] button itself to select “Cmnd Rx” on the LCD display panel (“Cmnd

Rx” is the next step above “Clock Rx” — or the next step

below MIDI

channel 1).

–

_ _

■ Start/Stop Mode

This function determines the effect of external MIDI start and stop signals. There are three start/stop modes,

as follows:

Mode “0” Start/stop reception disabled.

Mode “1” MIDI start and stop commands start and stop the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 Auto Accompani-

ment feature.

Mode “2” MIDI start and stop commands start and stop the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 SONG MEMORY

feature.

RECEIVE

CH/CL/COM

MODE

................

0 RX OFF

1 MULTI

2 REMOTE

3 CHORD

4 ROOT

RECEIVE

CH/CL/COM

MODE

................

0 RX OFF

1 MULTI

2 REMOTE

3 CHORD

4 ROOT

MIDI Transmission

The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 allows independent MIDI transmit channels to be assigned to the L and R ORCHES-

TRATION voices. It is also possible to independently turn local control and MIDI output on or off for the L and R

voices.

MIDI

■ MIDI Transmit Channels

The L and R ORCHESTRATION voices can be independently set to transmit on any of the 16 MIDI channels as

follows:

ZPress the [L] or [R] TRANSMIT CH

Press the [L] button if you want to set the L voice transmit channel, or the [R]

to set the R voice transmit channel. The currently selected channel for the selected

voice will appear on the LCD display panel.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [L] or [R]

button itself to select the desired transmit channel.

XSelect the Desired Transmit Channel...................................................................................................

NOTES

• The currently selected transmit channel is retained in memory even when the power switch is

turned off, as long as backup batteries are installed or an AC plug is connected.

• To record the Song Memory data to an external sequencer, start the sequencer running in the

record mode, press the [RESET] button, and then press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

• To record the Auto Accompaniment data to an external sequencer, start the sequencer run-

ning in the record mode, select the style you want to record, then start Auto Accompaniment

playback.

• Notes played on the keyboard are transmitted on channel 1 or 2 (selectable), Auto Accompa-

niment data is transmitted on channels 10 through 16, and Song Memory data is transmitted

on channels 3 through 8.

Normally the Auto Accompaniment Rhythm 1 and Rhythm 2 tracks are both transmitted on

channel 10. To transmit these tracks separately, hold the C1 key while turning the power on.

When this is done the Rhythm 1 data will be transmitted on channel 9 and the Rhythm 2 data

will be transmitted on channel 10.

0 1

–+

RESET

TRANSMIT

CH

L R

LOCAL/

MIDI OUT

LOCAL



MIDI

OUT

The [LOCAL/MIDI OUT] buttons and indicators below the TRANSMIT CH [L] and [R] buttons can be

used to turn local control and MIDI output ON or OFF as required. The status of the LOCAL and MIDI OUT

indicators changes as shown below each time the corresponding [LOCAL/MIDI OUT] button is pressed:

NOTES

• When “LOCAL” control is turned ON (indicator lit), the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 is controlled by

its own keyboard. When “LOCAL” control is off, playing the keyboard produces no sound — it

can only be played by MIDI data received via the MIDI IN terminal.

• When MIDI OUT is turned ON (indicator lit), operating the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 produces

corresponding MIDI output. When MIDI OUT is turned OFF (indicator out) no MIDI output is

produced by the PSR-1700/PSR-2700.

• LOCAL & MIDI OUT ON/OFF controls note on/off only. All other data is always output auto-

matically.

• Since LOCAL & MIDI OUT ON/OFF status is memorized in the Registration Memory, you can

select the tone generator to be used (PSR-1700/PSR-2700 or an external tone generator) by

changing the registration memory.

• Auto accompaniment will not function when Left LOCAL OFF is selected. Auto accompani-

ment note on/off data will not be output when Left MIDI OUT OFF is selected.

LOCAL/

MIDI OUT

TRANSMIT

CH

L R

LOCAL



MIDI

OUT

■ Local & MIDI Output ON/OFF

NOTES

• After selecting L or R, as described above, the default transmit channel can be

recalled by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [–] buttons. The default “L”

channel number is “2”, and the default “R” channel is “1”.

PSR-2700PSR-1700

MIDI TxCh R=0–1

08:Showtune 001:GrandPno

AccOff MIDI TxCh R=0–1

■Voice & Polyphony List

The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 can play up to 28 individual notes at the same time (i.e. it has a maximum “po-

lyphony” of 28). This number includes all voices used: dual, split, auto accompaniment, song memory, and multi

pads. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded excess notes will be truncated (they will not sound).

Another feature affecting polyphony is the fact that some voices actually use two voices at once, as shown in

the voice list below. The effective maximum polyphony is correspondingly reduced when these voices are used.

NOTES

• The voice list includes the MIDI program numbers that control each voice when the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 is

played from an external MIDI device.

• An additional 26 notes are available in the PSR-2700 when a sampled voice is used. These notes are only avail-

able for the sampled voice.

Appendix

* The following voices use only one voice

in the indicated ranges: 46 (Pizzicato

Strings): all notes below C

2 and above

F5. 110 (Bagpipe): all notes above A

MIDI Number

Voice

Program Voice Name of Voices

Number

Number Used

Synth Pad

89 88 Pad 1 (new age) 2

90 89 Pad 2 (warm) 2

91 90 Pad 3 (polysynth) 2

92 91 Pad 4 (choir) 2

93 92 Pad 5 (bowed) 2

94 93 Pad 6 (metallic) 2

95 94 Pad 7 (halo) 2

96 95 Pad 8 (sweep) 2

Synth Effects

97 96 FX 1 (rain) 2

98 97 FX 2 (soundtrack) 2

99 98 FX 3 (crystal) 2

100 99 FX 4 (atmosphere) 2

101 100 FX 5 (brightness) 2

102 101 FX 6 (goblins) 2

103 102 FX 7 (echoes) 2

104 103 FX 8 (sci-fi) 2

Ethnic

105 104 Sitar 1

106 105 Banjo 1

107 106 Shamisen 1

108 107 Koto 1

109 108 Kalimba 1

110 109 Bagpipe 2

111 110 Fiddle 1

112 111 Shanai 1

Percussive

113 112 Tinkle Bell 2

114 113 Agogo 1

115 114 Steel Drums 2

116 115 Woodblock 1

117 116 Taiko Drum 1

118 117 Melodic Tom 1

119 118 Synth Drum 1

120 119 Reverse Cymbal 1

Sound Effects

121 120 Guitar Fret Noise 1

122 121 Breath Noise 1

123 122 Seashore 2

124 123 Bird Tweet 2

125 124 Telephone Ring 1

126 125 Helicopter 2

127 126 Applause 2

128 127 Gunshot 1

MIDI Number

Voice

Program Voice Name of Voices

Number

Number Used

Piano

01 0 Acoustic Grand Piano 1

02 1 Bright Acoustic Piano 1

03 2 Electric Grand Piano 2

04 3 Honky-tonk Piano 2

05 4 Electric Piano 1 2

06 5 Electric Piano 2 2

07 6 Harpsichord 1

08 7 Clavi 1

Chromatic Percussion

09 8 Celesta 1

10 9 Glockenspiel 1

11 10 Music Box 2

12 11 Vibraphone 1

13 12 Marimba 1

14 13 Xylophone 1

15 14 Tubular Bells 1

16 15 Dulcimer 2

Organ

17 16 Drawbar Organ 2

18 17 Percussive Organ 2

19 18 Rock Organ 2

20 19 Church Organ 2

21 20 Reed Organ 1

22 21 Accordion 2

23 22 Harmonica 1

24 23 Tango Accordion 2

Guitar

25 24 Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1

26 25 Acoustic Guitar (steel) 1

27 26 Electric Guitar (jazz) 1

28 27 Electric Guitar (clean) 2

29 28 Electric Guitar (muted) 1

30 29 Overdriven Guitar 1

31 30 Distortion Guitar 1

32 31 Guitar Harmonics 1

Bass

33 32 Acoustic Bass 1

34 33 Electric Bass (finger) 1

35 34 Electric Bass (pick) 1

36 35 Fretless Bass 1

37 36 Slap Bass 1 1

38 37 Slap Bass 2 1

39 38 Synth Bass 1 1

40 39 Synth Bass 2 1

Strings

41 40 Violin 1

42 41 Viola 1

43 42 Cello 1

44 43 Contrabass 1

MIDI Number

Voice

Program Voice Name of Voices

Number

Number Used

45 44 Tremolo Strings 2

46 45 Pizzicato Strings 2

47 46 Orchestral Harp 1

48 47 Timpani 1

Ensemble

49 48 Strings Ensemble 1 1

50 49 Strings Ensemble 2 1

51 50 Synth Strings 1 2

52 51 Synth Strings 2 2

53 52 Choir Aahs 2

54 53 Voice Oohs 1

55 54 Synth Voice 1

56 55 Orchestra Hit 1

Brass

57 56 Trumpet 1

58 57 Trombone 1

59 58 Tuba 1

60 59 Muted Trumpet 1

61 60 French Horn 1

62 61 Brass Section 1

63 62 Synth Brass 1 2

64 63 Synth Brass 2 2

Reed

65 64 Soprano Sax 1

66 65 Alto Sax 1

67 66 Tenor Sax 1

68 67 Baritone Sax 1

69 68 Oboe 1

70 69 English Horn 1

71 70 Bassoon 1

72 71 Clarinet 1

Pipe

73 72 Piccolo 1

74 73 Flute 1

75 74 Recorder 1

76 75 Pan Flute 1

77 76 Blown Bottle 2

78 77 Shakuhachi 1

79 78 Whistle 1

80 79 Ocarina 1

Synth Lead

81 80 Lead 1 (square) 2

82 81 Lead 2 (sawtooth) 2

83 82 Lead 3 (calliope) 2

84 83 Lead 4 (chiff) 2

85 84 Lead 5 (charang) 2

86 85 Lead 6 (voice) 2

87 86 Lead 7 (fifth) 2

88 87 Lead 8 (bass+Lead ) 2

■Style List

Appendix

# Name Rhythm Comments

Pop

01 16-Beat Pop 16-Beat Contemporary 16-beat pop.

02 8-Beat Pop 8-Beat Bright piano/guitar-based ’70s pop.

03 8-Beat Light 8-Beat Eight-beat easy-listening style with arpeggiated piano part.

04 FolkRock 16-Beat Guitar-based folk-rock.

05 Detroit Pop 12-Beat Motown-style rhythm, with modern touches.

06 Pop Shuffle 12-Beat ’70s European pop-shuffle.

07 Pop Rock 12-Beat Upbeat, fast pop-rock. Try using your own chords in the Intro B and Ending B. The lead guitar part plays

various phrases according to the chords chosen.

08 Showtune 8-Beat Bouncy, fully orchestrated style from ’40s/’50s musicals.

Pop Ballad

09 16-Beat Ballad 16-Beat Warm, romantic American soul ballad style.

10 Pop Ballad 8-Beat Romantic pop ballad

11 Big Ballad 8-Beat Slow ballad with full arpeggios and fancy organ fills.

12 Piano Ballad 8-Beat Piano-based ballad with slow arpeggios. Huge drum fills in Intro and Fill In 2.

13 Epic Ballad 8-Beat Pop ballad style from the ’60s and ’70s, featuring gentle strings accompaniment in MAIN A and full

orchestra in MAIN B.

14 6/8 Ballad Six-Eight Slow rock ballad with triplet feel and classical overtones.

Dance

15 Eurobeat 16-Beat Fast, 16-beat Eurobeat sound, for disco and house music.

16 Dance Pop 16-Beat 80s English disco sound.

17 Casa 16-Beat Italian house music.

18 Dance Shuffle 24-Beat Rap/dance feel, especially for one-chord songs. Try playing with CHORD 1 & 2 off. There are two sepa-

rate types for Intro B/Ending B: major and minor.

19 Groundbeat 24-Beat Contemporary soul ballad with funky bass. PHRASE 1 adds high string lines and PHRASE 2 adds bass.

20 Synth Boogie Six-Eight Fast, machine-like 6/8 computer groove with synth bass.

Disco

21 Disco Party 16-Beat Big band disco party style, hugely popular in Europe.

22 Disco Soul 16-Beat Philadelphia disco style from the ’70s.

23 Disco Tropical 16-Beat Disco sound with a Latin feel — echoes of American TV themes from the ’80s.

24 Disco Funk 16-Beat Late ’70s New York disco style.

25 Disco Pop 16-Beat The world-famous (and recently revived) ’70s Swedish disco sound.

26 Polka Pop 8-Beat Updated Polka style. Latin percussion in Rhythm 2.

Rhythm & Blues

27 R&B 8-Beat Eight-beat rhythm and blues from the ’60s .

28 R&B Ballad 16-Beat Upbeat West Coast soul ballad.

29 Fast Gospel 8-Beat Bright and brassy ’60s Chicago Rhythm & Blues style.

30 Gospel Six-Eight Gospel ballad groove for slow tempo songs.

31 6/8 Blues Six-Eight New Orleans R&B from the ’50s.

32 Blues Shuffle 12-Beat Chicago-type blues shuffle.

33 Soul 8-Beat Simple-but-effective Memphis R&B groove.

34 Funk 16-Beat Oakland’s East Bay funk style, with fat horn section and big finale for ending.

35 Funk Shuffle 24-Beat Funky guitar and funky brass stabs in a funky organ-driven shuffle. Funky!

Rock

36 Hard Rock 8-Beat Fast, hard-driving rock. P2 brings in cymbal crashes with every chord change.

37 Rock Boogie 12-Beat Hard-driving boogie with distorted guitar.

38 Rock Pop 8-Beat Mid-tempo guitar-based rock.

39 Rock Shuffle 12-Beat Smooth pop-rock style. Try bringing in the instrument parts one by one.

40 6/8 Rock Six-Eight Slow rock pattern with triplet feel and “House of the Rising Sun”-style arpeggios.

41 Rock Ballad 8-Beat Slow rock ballad. Use RHYTHM 2 to add crash cymbal at chord changes. Take out PHRASE 1 & 2

(guitars) for smoother sound.

42 Rock Classical 16-Beat Classical instruments like harpsichord and strings over a pop music rhythm section.

# Name Rhythm Comments

Rock & Roll

43 Rock & Roll 12-Beat Old-time ’60s Rock&Roll.

44 Boogie Woogie 12-Beat Late ’50s piano-based rock ‘n’ roll, with boogie woogie bass. Brass in PHRASE 1 & 2, piano bass in

PAD.

45 Twist 8-Beat Straight-eight boogie, with a “Twist.”

46 Rockabilly 12-Beat Simple, updated version of the Memphis “Sun” sound.

47 16-beat 16-Beat Hard rock & roll — bringing the “Bo Beat” into the ’90s. Bring in more complex guitar, brass comping by

Rock & Roll playing more complex chords.

Traditional Jazz

48 Ragtime 8-Beat Turn-of-the-century piano style. Piano fills at PHRASE 1, piano bass at PHRASE 2.

49 Dixieland 12-Beat Old-time New Orleans jazz. Trumpet at PHRASE 1, Trombone at PHRASE 2, and Clarinets at PAD.

50 Big Band 12-Beat Big Band orchestra style and instrumentation. Piano at CHORD 1, guitar at CHORD 2, trumpets at

PHRASE 1, trombones at PHRASE 2, and saxes at PAD.

Big Band Ballad

12-Beat Slowly swaying Big Band sound. Use in medley with Jazz Ballad to switch to piano/guitar quartet.

52 Swing 12-Beat European big-band swing style. Good for all mid-tempo swing tunes.

53 Swing Waltz

Nine-Eight

Mid-tempo 9/8 waltz.

Contemporary Jazz

54 BeBop 12-Beat ’40s New York fast Bepop style. Good also for instantly adding a double-time feel to any style!

55 Jazz Ballad 12-Beat Slow jazz style with piano, guitar, bass and brush drums. Turn off PHRASE 1 & 2 when playing piano

melody. Use in medley with Big Band Ballad to change orchestration.

56 Jazz Waltz

Nine-Eight

Swing style in 3/4 time for playing jazz waltz standards.

57 Fusion 16-Beat Latin flavored 16-beat fusion.

58 Fusion Shuffle 24-Beat West Coast type funk shuffle.

Latin

59 Mambo 8-Beat Contemporary Latin dance music. If playing the melody with a piano sound, turn off CHORD 2.

60 Merengue 8-Beat High-energy Latin style with lots of percussion and punchy brass.

61 Beguine 8-Beat Slow rumba rhythm, a la “Begin the Beguine.”

62 Bomba 16-Beat Puerto Rican dance rhythm, cousin to the Merengue.

63 Guaguanco 16-Beat Another high-powered Latin dance style, usually played with drums/percussion only. Use RHYTHM 1 &

2, PHRASE 1 & 2 to bring individual percussion in and out.

Latin Pop

64 Pop Bossa 8-Beat Soft, electric-piano based Latin pop sound.

Bossa Nova Slow

8-Beat Mellow and jazzy Bossa Nova style, good for mid to slow tempos. There are two separate types for Intro

B/Ending B: major and minor.

66 Jazz Samba 16-Beat Traditional Brazilian samba with an added drum set.

Modern Cha Cha

16-Beat Afro-Cuban dance style for medium slow tempos.

68 Latin Rock 16-Beat Contemporary Cha Cha with electric bass and drum kit.

Caribbean

69 Ska 8-Beat Ska rhythm. Minor keys add doubled “skank.”

70 Calypso 16-Beat Traditional Jamaican Calypso music from the ’60s.

71 Reggae 16 16-Beat Modern Jamaican Reggae rhythm with fat synth bass.

72 Reggae 12 12-Beat Reggae shuffle.

Country & Western

73 Bluegrass 16-Beat Try this one with just CHORD 1 and RHYTHM 1 at first, then build up the arrangement by adding different

instruments.

74 Country Pop 8-Beat Contemporary country style.

75 Country Rock 8-Beat Soft country style with pedal steel sound. Guitar voicings are most authentic for simple chords, like ma-

jor, minor, 7th, etc.

76 Country Ballad 8-Beat Especially suited to slow tempos. Also, try playing with CHORD 1 only.

77 Country Waltz

Nine-Eight

Simple, versatile country style with acoustic guitar. Guitar voicings are most authentic for simple chords,

like major, minor, 7th, etc.

78 Country Shuffle 12-Beat Traditional country style using acoustic guitar. Guitar voicings are most authentic for simple chords, like

major, minor, 7th, etc.

Western Shuffle

12-Beat Down-home Country and Western shuffle, with a modern touch.

Appendix

■ Style List

# Name Rhythm Comments

World Music

80 Polka 8-Beat Traditional Polka style with acoustic instruments. Try altering the arrangement by bringing the accordion

and the horn parts in and out.

Traditional Waltz Three-Four

European waltz with guitar, accordion, clarinet, bass, drums and a string pad. Use CHORD 1 & 2 and

PHRASE 1 for guitar/accordion arrangement.

82 Sevillianas

Three-Four

Fast waltz time — almost flamenco style.

83 Bolero Lento 8-Beat Guitar-based style, quite romantic. Bolero Lento is related to Rumba and can be used as a slower varia-

tion.

Rumba Espagnole

16-Beat Spanish guitar style, with relatively full orchestration.

85 Dangdut 8-Beat Contemporary Indonesian pop sound.

March

86 Military March 8-Beat Traditional march style. Trombones at CHORD 1, trumpets at CHORD 2, french horn at PHRASE 1,

piccolo at PHRASE 2, xylophone at PAD.

87 6/8 March Six-Eight Marching brass band. Brass is added to the drum sound when you change chords during Intro B. Enjoy

different drum fills with breaks A and B.

88 Tarantella Six-Eight Named after the Tarantula spider, whose bite might cause one to dance in this style, this rhythm is used

in the popular song “Funiculi Funicula.”

Ballroom Standard

89 Slow Waltz

Three-Four

This slow waltz (or English waltz) style has been arranged in the style of a small band.

Tango Argentina

8-Beat Traditional ballroom style Tango.

Tango Habanera

8-Beat Latin rhythm best known from the opera “Carmen.”

92 Slowfox 12-Beat A standard ballroom dance. This style is suitable for many ballads and slow mellow jazz or swing tunes.

Viennese Waltz

Three-Four

Relaxed, ballroom waltz. Guitar is at CHORD 1, accordion at CHORD 2, pizzicato strings at PHRASE 1,

clarinets at PHRASE 2 and mid-register strings at PAD.

94 Foxtrot 12-Beat Strict tempo Foxtrot for ballroom dancing.

95 Jive 12-Beat Jive (or Boogie) is a fast ballroom dance.

Ballroom Latin

96 Rumba 8-Beat Rumba played in the style of a ballroom orchestra. Related to Beguine and Bolero Lento.

97 Samba 16-Beat Standard ballroom Samba. Guitar is at CHORD 1 & 2, with 2 playing the lower strings. Turning

RHYTHM 2 on/off provides additional variation.

98 Cha Cha 8-Beat Strict tempo ChaCha style for ballroom dancing. Try starting only with RHYTHM 2, BASS and CHORD ,

then bring in other instruments one by one.

99 Pasodoble 8-Beat Flamenco-style rhythm, featuring Spanish guitar. Turning RHYTHM 2 on/off provides additional variation.

Custom

00 Enka 8-Beat Modern arrangement of old Japanese pop style.

Disk Style

FILE # Rap 16-Beat Modern rap/hip-hop rhythm with turntable scratching and other effects. RHYTHM 1 & 2 can

05 stand on their own as basic rhythm tracks.

FILE # Rave 16-Beat Hard-driving synth bass and “space bleep” synth percussion.

FILE # Enka 8-Beat Modern arrangement of old Japanese pop style.

FILE # Zouk 16-Beat Upbeat Afro-Caribbean dance rhythm with kalimba at PHRASE 1 and xylophone at PHRASE 2.

FILE # Charleston 12-Beat ’20s dance music.

FILE # Modern Jazz 12-Beat Contemporary jazz style. Rhythm 2 adds drum comping.

FILE # Batucada 16-Beat Also known as a Carnival or Street Samba.

FILE # Rock Cha Cha 8-Beat An exciting rock style embellished with Latin percussion instruments.

* Disk Style (FILE# 05 … 12) are the styles provided on the supplied PSR-1700/2700 demonstration disk.

■ Error Messages

If an error occurs during operation of the PSR-1700/2700, one of the following error messages will appear so

you’ll know what went wrong and how to remedy the situation.

Disk-related Error Messages

You have attempted to load a file that cannot be loaded. Check the file number, select an

appropriate file and try again.

You have attempted to start the QUICK PLAY function with a disk that contains no files suit-

able for quick playback. Only Yamaha DOC files, SMF format-0 files, ESEQ files, or

PianoSoft files can be used with the Quick Play function.

The disk does not have sufficient capacity remaining for the file you have attempted to save.

Either delete unwanted data from the disk to make more room, or use a different disk.

You have attempted to execute a disk operation while no disk is loaded. Insert an appropriate

disk and try again.

You have attempted to save to, delete, or format a write-protected disk. Slide the floppy disk

write-protect tab to the write-enable position and try again.

The file you have attempted to delete or load cannot be found. This error message will also

appear if you specify a file number that has no data for deleting or loading.

You have attempted to save to or delete a write-protected file. Such files can not be

overwritten or deleted by the PSR-1700/2700.

An error occurred while reading data from the disk. If the error persists there could be some-

thing wrong with the floppy disk or the data on the disk might be corrupted. If possible try a

different disk.

You have specified a file name that already exists on the current disk. Try again and change

the name.

The loaded disk is not formatted for use with the PSR-1700/2700. Either format the disk or

replace it with an already-formatted disk.

An error occurred while writing data to the disk. Try the operation again. If the error persists

there could be something wrong with the floppy disk. Try re-formatting the disk. If this doesn’t

help, try a different disk.

You have attempted to save a file with a file name consisting of all spaces. Try again with a

different file name.

Can't Load

Can't Play

Disk Full

File Protected

File Not Found!

Disk Protected

Disk Not Ready!

Write Error

Read Error

Same Name

Unformatted Disk!

Wrong File Name

Appendix

The maximum of 255 “banks” of data has been exceeded (one pad contains one “bank”).

Clear all unnecessary pads and voice data before attempting to sample more data.

You have attempted to map or tune a pad or entering an original voice name that contains

no sampled voice data.

You have attempted to clear, record, or edit a pre-programmed disk voice file. In some

cases pre-programmed sampled voices (“Protected Voices”) can only be loaded.

You have attempted to map a pad to key to which another pad is already mapped. Map

either pad to a different key.

The wave RAM memory is full and can accept no more sampled voice data (the wave RAM

is 1,020 kilobytes). Clear all unnecessary pads and voice data before attempting to sample

more data.

You have inserted the wrong disk or a disk that does not contain the required data. Large

sampled voice data files may span more than one disk, and these must be inserted in the

correct order when loading the file. Check the disk number and try again.

No Bank

No Wave Data

Digital Sampling-related Error Messages (PSR-2700)

Wave Ram Full

Protected Voice

Same Note

Wrong Disk

Other Error Messages

You have pressed a button that can not be used in the current mode. Read the instructions

for the function you are using carefully, and use appropriate function button.

IllegalOperation

The PSR-1700/2700 recording memory has become full while recording Song Memory,

Custom Accompaniment, or Multi Pad data. Save data you want to keep to disk and clear

all unnecessary data from memory to make more room.

Memory Full

■System Reset Procedure

All internal memory settings are retained in memory even when the power switch is turned OFF as long as a

good set of backup batteries is present or the AC plug is connected. You can, however, restore the factory default

settings by following the procedures outlined below.

–+

RESET

POWER

ON/ OFF

ZPress the [POWER] switch to turn the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 power OFF.

XTurn the power back ON while holding both the [+] and [–] buttons.

“Backup RAM Clear” will appear on the LCD display panel while the

data is being reset.

IMPORTANT

• Executing the System Reset function will erase all internal

memory settings

■Troubleshooting

Something not working as it should? In many cases what appears to be a malfunction can be traced to a sim-

ple error that can be remedied immediately. Before assuming that your PortaTone is faulty, please check the fol-

lowing points.

POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTIONPROBLEM

• You are probably exceeding the instrument’s maximum polyphony. The

PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 can play up to 28 notes at the same time —

including split, dual, auto-accompaniment, and multi pad notes. Notes

exceeding this limit will not sound. The same applies to the 26-note

polyphony of the PSR-2700 sampled voices.

• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.

• Auto accompaniment won’t function prop-

erly. No lower keyboard sound.

• Auto accompaniment won’t sound right if you’re using SINGLE type

fingering when the SINGLE mode is not selected (page 27).

• Are you sure you’re playing in the Auto-Accompaniment section of the

keyboard?

• Are you playing chords that the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 can recog-

nize (see chord types on pages 26, 27, and 28)?

• The speakers produce a “pop” sound

whenever the power is turned ON or OFF.

• This is normal and is no cause for alarm.

• The orchestration part to which the voice is assigned must be turned

ON (page 11).

• Make sure that the voice volume parameter for the orchestration part to

which the voice is assigned is set to an appropriate level (page 14).

• The selected voice does not sound when

the keyboard is played.

• The edit mode for the voice to which the changes are to be applied must

be turned ON (page 13).

• Voice parameter changes do not affect the

desired voice.

• Some sections of some styles have no data in the rhythm track. Try

turning Auto Accompaniment on and fingering an appropriate chord —

the Auto Accompaniment should begin to play.

• No sound when rhythm started.

• You may have executed the clear function from a point in the middle of

the track, thus only clearing the data after that point. Press the [RESET]

button to go to the beginning of the track, then clear.

• Song Memory track indicator does not go

out when the track is cleared.

• LOCAL OFF is selected for the left- or right-hand section of the key-

board. Set to LOCAL ON (page 76).

• No sound when the keyboard is played.

Index

+ and – buttons .................................10

Accompaniment control ....................29

Accompaniment & melody playback .43

Accompaniment structure .................31

Accompaniment track recording,

realtime.........................................40

Auto accompaniment ........................24

Auto harmony....................................16

Backup batteries .................................5

Beat indicator ....................................29

Breaks ...............................................30

Chord 1 mode, fingering ...................26

Chord 2 mode, fingering ...................27

Clear, song memory/custom

accompaniment/multi pad.............54

Clock mode, MIDI..............................75

Connections for sampling (PSR-2700)

Connectors, MIDI ..............................73

Control, MIDI .....................................73

Custom accompaniment ...................47

Data backup........................................4

Data dial ............................................10

Delete disk file...................................61

Demo playback ...................................7

Digital sampling (PSR-2700).............63

Disk demo ...........................................8

Disk operations .................................56

Disk Orchestra Collection disks ........62

DSP depth.........................................15

DSP depth, sample (PSR-2700) .......69

DSP type ...........................................22

Dual mode.........................................12

Editing procedure ................................9

Editing samples (PSR-2700).............68

Effects ...............................................17

Ending ...............................................31

Error messages.................................81

Expression ........................................72

Fade-in & Fade-out ...........................32

File extension ....................................58

File name ..........................................59

File types...........................................58

Fill-ins................................................30

Fingering, auto accompaniment........25

Floppy disks, using ...........................56

Formatting disks................................57

Freeze ...............................................38

Full mode, fingering ..........................28

Function button ...................................9

Gate time...........................................51

GM System Level 1.........................342

Harmony............................................16

Headphones........................................6

Input level, sampling (PSR-2700) .....63

Introduction (intro) .............................30

Keyboard percussion ........................18

Level check mode,

sampling (PSR-2700) ...................63

LCD display panel ...............................9

Load from disk ..................................60

Local & MIDI output ..........................76

Main A and B sections ......................30

Mapping samples (PSR-2700) ..........70

Measure number ...............................44

Melody track recording, realtime .......42

Metronome ........................................28

MIDI...................................................73

MIDI implementation chart ..............340

Minus-one playback ..........................62

Modulation ........................................19

Multi mode, fingering.........................27

Multi pads..........................................45

Music stand .........................................6

Number buttons ................................10

Octave...............................................14

One touch setting ..............................36

Orchestration.....................................11

Overall control ...................................20

Pan....................................................15

Pan, sample (PSR-2700) ..................69

Panel Controls ....................................2

Pedal assign .....................................72

Percussion kit list ............................338

Pitch bend .........................................18

Power supply ......................................5

Quantization......................................53

Quick play .........................................62

Receive modes, MIDI........................74

Record functions ...............................39

Recording samples (PSR-2700) .......66

Registration memory .........................37

Reset, song memory .........................44

Revoice .............................................34

Rewrite setting ..................................55

Sample pads (PSR-2700) .................67

Sampled voice name (PSR-2700) ....67

Sampling frequency (PSR-2700) ......64

Save to disk ......................................58

Selecting & playing voices ................11

Single mode ......................................11

Single modes, fingering ....................27

Song memory....................................39

Specifications ..................................343

Split & Dual modes ...........................12

Split modes .......................................12

Split point change .............................20

Split point, auto accompaniment .......25

Standard MIDI file disks ....................62

Star/stop mode, MIDI ........................75

Step recording...................................50

Step size ...........................................50

Stopping the accompaniment ...........31

Straight start......................................29

Style list.............................................78

Style selection ...................................24

Supplied demonstration disk .............60

Sustain ..............................................72

Synchro start .....................................29

System reset .....................................82

Tempo control ...................................28

Touch sensitivity................................23

Track buttons ....................................33

Transmit channels, MIDI ...................76

Transpose .........................................21

Trigger level, sampling (PSR-2700) ..65

Troubleshooting ................................83

Tuning ...............................................21

Tuning samples (PSR-2700).............68

Voice & polyphony list .......................77

Voice assignment..............................13

Volume ..............................................14

Volume, accompaniment ..................32

Volume, sample (PSR-2700) ............69

Yes/no confirmation ..........................10

338

Note# Note 1: Standard (0) 2: Room (8) 3: Rock (16) 4: Electronic (24)

36 C1 Click (Square wave) <—— <—— <——

37 C#1 Brush Tap <—— <—— <——

38 D1 Brush Swirl <—— <—— <——

39 D#1 Brush Slap <—— <—— <——

40 E1 Brush Swirl W/Attack <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal

41 F1 Snare Roll <—— <—— <——

42 F#1 Castanet <—— <—— Hi-Q

43 G1 Snare H Soft Snare Room L Snare Rock L Snare Gate L

44 G#1 Sticks <—— <—— <——

45 A1 Bass Drum H Soft Bass Drum Room L Bass Drum Rock L Bass Drum Gate L

46 A#1 Open Rim Shot <—— <—— <——

47 B1 Bass Drum L Bass Drum Room M Bass Drum Rock M Bass Drum Gate M

48 C2 Bass Drum H Hard Bass Drum Room H Bass Drum Rock H Bass Drum Gate H

49 C#2 Closed Rim Shot <—— <—— <——

50 D2 Snare L Snare Room M Snare Rock M Snare Gate M

51 D#2 Hand Clap <—— <—— <——

52 E2 Snare H Hard Snare Room H Snare Rock H Snare Gate H

53 F2 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 Electronic Tom 1

54 F#2 Hi-Hat Closed <—— <—— <——

55 G2 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 Electronic Tom 2

56 G#2 Hi-Hat Pedal <—— <—— <——

57 A2 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 Electronic Tom 3

58 A#2 Hi-Hat Open <—— <—— <——

59 B2 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 Electronic Tom 4

60 C3 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 Electronic Tom 5

61 C#3 Crash Cymbal 1 <—— <—— <——

62 D3 High Tom Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 Electronic Tom 6

63 D#3 Ride Cymbal 1 <—— <—— <——

64 E3 Chinese Cymbal <—— <—— <——

65 F3 Ride Cymbal Cup <—— <—— <——

66 F#3 Tambourine <—— <—— <——

67 G3 Splash Cymbal <—— <—— <——

68 G#3 Cowbell <—— <—— <——

69 A3 Crash Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <——

70 A#3 Vibraslap <—— <—— <——

71 B3 Ride Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <——

72 C4 Bongo H <—— <—— <——

73 C#4 Bongo L <—— <—— <——

74 D4 Conga H Mute <—— <—— <——

75 D#4 Conga H Open <—— <—— <——

76 E4 Conga L <—— <—— <——

77 F4 Timbale H <—— <—— <——

78 F#4 Timbale L <—— <—— <——

79 G4 Agogo H <—— <—— <——

80 G#4 Agogo L <—— <—— <——

81 A4 Cabasa <—— <—— <——

82 A#4 Maracas <—— <—— <——

83 B4 Samba Whistle H <—— <—— <——

84 C5 Samba Whistle L <—— <—— <——

85 C#5 Guiro Short <—— <—— <——

86 D5 Guiro Long <—— <—— <——

87 D#5 Claves <—— <—— <——

88 E5 Wood Block H <—— <—— <——

89 F5 Wood Block L <—— <—— <——

90 F#5 Cuica Mute <—— <—— Scratch H

91 G5 Cuica Open <—— <—— Scratch L

92 G#5 Triangle Mute <—— <—— <——

93 A5 Triangle Open <—— <—— <——

94 A#5 Shaker <—— <—— <——

95 B5 Jingle Bell <—— <—— <——

96 C6 Bell Tree <—— <—— <——

97 C#6 Voice ‘One’ <—— <—— <——

98 D6 Voice ‘Two’ <—— <—— <——

99 D#6 Voice ‘Three’ <—— <—— <——

100 E6 Voice ‘Four’ <—— <—— <——

101 F6 Voice ‘Are You Sure?’ <—— <—— <——

Percussion Kit List

*“<——” indicates the content is the same as that of Standard Kit.

*Only 1 note can be played at a time when Keyboard Percussion is engaged.

*The number in parentheses () after the percussion kit name is the MIDI program

number.

* The corresponding MIDI note numbers for the notes listed in the chart below are

actually one octave lower. For example, the MIDI note number for note #36 (C1)

in the chart is note #24 (C0).

339

Note# Note 5: Analog (25) 6: Jazz (32) 7: Brush (40) 8: Classic (48)

36 C1 <—— <—— <—— <——

37 C#1 <—— <—— <—— <——

38 D1 <—— <—— <—— <——

39 D#1 <—— <—— <—— <——

40 E1 Reverse Cymbal <—— <—— <——

41 F1 <—— <—— <—— <——

42 F#1 Hi-Q <—— <—— <——

43 G1 Snare Analog L <—— Brush Slap L Snare Classic L

44 G#1 <—— <—— <—— <——

45 A1 Bass Drum Analog L <—— <—— Gran Casa L

46 A#1 <—— <—— <—— <——

47 B1 Bass Drum Analog M <—— <—— Gran Casa M

48 C2 Bass Drum Analog H <—— <—— Gran Casa H

49 C#2 Closed Rim Shot Analog <—— <—— <——

50 D2 Snare Analog M <—— Brush Slap H Snare Classic M

51 D#2 <—— <—— <—— <——

52 E2 Snare Analog H <—— Brush Tap Snare Classic H

53 F2 Analog Tom 1 Natural Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Natural Tom 1

54 F#2 Analog Hi-hat Closed 1 Dark Hi-Hat Closed Dark Hi-Hat Closed Dark Hi-Hat Closed

55 G2 Analog Tom 2 Natural Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Natural Tom 2

56 G#2 Analog Hi-hat Closed 2 Dark Hi-Hat Pedal Dark Hi-Hat Pedal Dark Hi-Hat Pedal

57 A2 Analog Tom 3 Natural Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Natural Tom 3

58 A#2 Analog Hi-hat Open Dark Hit Hat Open Dark Hit Hat Open Dark Hit Hat Open

59 B2 Analog Tom 4 Natural Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Natural Tom 4

60 C3 Analog Tom 5 Natural Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Natural Tom 5

61 C#3 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cymbal Long L

62 D3 Analog Tom 6 Natural Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Natural Tom 6

63 D#3 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cymbal Short L

64 E3 <—— <—— <—— <——

65 F3 <—— <—— <—— <——

66 F#3 <—— <—— <—— <——

67 G3 <—— <—— <—— <——

68 G#3 <—— <—— <—— <——

69 A3 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cymbal Long H

70 A#3 <—— <—— <—— <——

71 B3 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cymbal Short H

72 C4 <—— <—— <—— <——

73 C#4 <—— <—— <—— <——

74 D4 <—— <—— <—— <——

75 D#4 <—— <—— <—— <——

76 E4 <—— <—— <—— <——

77 F4 <—— <—— <—— <——

78 F#4 <—— <—— <—— <——

79 G4 <—— <—— <—— <——

80 G#4 <—— <—— <—— <——

81 A4 <—— <—— <—— <——

82 A#4 <—— <—— <—— <——

83 B4 <—— <—— <—— <——

84 C5 <—— <—— <—— <——

85 C#5 <—— <—— <—— <——

86 D5 <—— <—— <—— <——

87 D#5 <—— <—— <—— <——

88 E5 <—— <—— <—— <——

89 F5 <—— <—— <—— <——

90 F#5 Scratch H <—— <—— <——

91 G5 Scratch L <—— <—— <——

92 G#5 <—— <—— <—— <——

93 A5 <—— <—— <—— <——

94 A#5 <—— <—— <—— <——

95 B5 <—— <—— <—— <——

96 C6 <—— <—— <—— <——

97 C#6 <—— <—— <—— <——

98 D6 <—— <—— <—— <——

99 D#6 <—— <—— <—— <——

100 E6 <—— <—— <—— <——

101 F6 <—— <—— <—— <——

340

[Portable Keyboard] Date: 1993. 11. 1

Model: PSR-1700/PSR-2700

MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.00

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic Default 1~16 CH 1~16 CH (*1)

Channel Changed 1~16 CH 1~16 CH (*1)

Default Mode 3 (*1)

Mode Messages XX

Altered ***************** X

Note 0~127 0~127

Number : True voice ***************** 0~127

Velocity Note on O 9nH, v=1~127 O 9nH, v=1~127

Note off X 9nH, v=0 X 9nH, v=0 or 8nH

After key’s XX

Touch Ch’s XO (*2)

Pitch Bender OO

Control Change 0, 32 O (*3) O (*4) Bank select MSB, LSB

1 OOModulation depth

6, 38 OOData entry MSB, LSB

7 OOVolume

10 OOPan

11 OOExpression

64 OOSustain

66 XOSostenuto

84 OO (*5) Portamento control

90 XO

91 OOReverb send level

96 XORPN data increment

97 XORPN data decrement

100, 101 O (*6) O (*7) RPN MSB, LSB

120 OOAll sound off

121 XO (*8) Reset all controllers

Program O 0~127 O 0~127

Change : True # ***************** 0~127 (*9)

System Exclusive O (*10) O (*10)

System : Song Position XX

: Song Select XX

Common : Tune XX

System : Clock OO (*11)

Real Time: Commands O (*12) O (*12)

Aux : Local ON/OFF XX

: All Notes Off OO

Messages: Active Sense OO

: Reset XX

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO O: Yes

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO X: No

MIDI Implementation Chart

341

■ GM System Level 1

The existing MIDI protocol allows performance and other data to be transferred between different instruments, even if

they are from different manufacturers. This means, for example, that sequence data that was originally created to control a

tone generator from manufacturer A can also be used to control a different tone generator from manufacturer B. Since the

voice allocation in different devices from different manufacturers is usually different, however, appropriate program change

data must be transmitted to select the right voices.

The General MIDI protocol was developed to minimize confusion and the need for re-programming when playing soft-

ware created by one MIDI device on another. This has been achieved by defining a standard voice allocation in which the

same or similar voices are accessed by the same program change numbers or MIDI channels. The current standard recog-

nized by the International MIDI Association is known as “GM System Level 1.” The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 voice allocation

complies with the GM System Level 1 standard.

*1. The following modes can be set individually for each channel via

the panel control:

Mode 00: Reception OFF.

Mode 01: Direct tone generator control.

Mode 02: Same as keyboard note on/off operation.

Mode 03: Same as auto-accompaniment chord fingering.

Mode 04: Same as the lowest-note (bass note) played in the

auto-accompaniment chord fingerings.

*2. Channel pressure handled as vibrato.

*3. For bank selection transmission only the MSB changes.

The LSB is fixed at 00H.

*4. Bank select reception.

The bank select MSB is used for melody voice and rhythm voice

switching.

The bank select LSB is ignored.

MSB 00H: GM melody voice.

MSB 01H: Sample voice (PSR-2700).

MSB 7FH: GM rhythm voice.

The default for all the channels excepting channel 10 is 00H. Bank

select reception with channel 10 is not possible since channel 10

is assigned to the rhythm accompaniment. However, bank select

reception with channel 10 will be possible when you do the follow-

ing operation: turning the POWER back on while holding the C1

key down.

When the bank select MSB is 01H … 7EH, all subsequent key-ons

received will be ignored.

No voice change will occur when only a bank select is received.

When a program change is received the latest bank select value is

used.

*5. Portamento control is effective only when Reception is set in the

Multi mode.

*6. A pitch bend sensitivity message is transmitted when a panel pitch

bend range setting is made.

Pitch bend sensitivity: BnH, 64H, 00H, 65H, 00H

*7. RPN receives the following data:

Pitch bend sensitivity: BnH, 64H, 00H, 65H, 00H

Default: 02H, 00H

Fine tuning: BnH, 64H, 01H, 65H, 00H

Default: 40H, 00H

Coarse tuning: BnH, 64H, 02H, 65H, 00H

Default: 40H, 00H

Null: BnH, 64H, 7FH, 65H, 7FH

*8. Reset all controllers.

Pitch bend, channel pressure, modulation, expression, sustain,

and sostenuto are returned to their default values.

All RPN data is set to NULL.

Portamento is reset.

*9. GM melody voices 0 through 127 become panel voices 1 through

128.

Sample voices 0 through 127 become panel sample voices 1

through 128. (PSR-2700)

Rhythm voices 0, 8, 16, 24, 25, 32, 40, and 48 become panel

voices 1 through 8.

*10. Exclusive.

<GM1 System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

All parameters except MIDI Master Tuning are reset to their

default values.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H

Allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously

(universal system exclusive).

mm is used as the MIDI Master Volume value (ll is ignored).

The default value for mm is 7FH.

This message is receive-only.

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H

Allows the pitch of all channels to be changed simultaneously

(panel tuning).

mmll is used as the MIDI Master Tuning value, an the actual

tuning is shown by the expression:

T=Mx200/256-100

Where T is the actual tuning value in cents. M is decimal value

represented by 1-byte using bits 0…3 of mm as the MSB and

bits 0…3 of ll as the LSB.

The default values of mm and ll are 07H and 0FH, respectively.

n and cc are also recognized.

This value is not reset by a GM System ON or Reset All Con-

trollers message.

This message is transmitted and received.

<DOC On> F0H, 43H, 73H, 01H, 14H, F7H

Reception only.

MIDI IN channels 1 through 16 apply to the DOC data. The

panel voice assignments are not affected.

Dual data change:

F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 04H, <Data>, F7H

Dual ON/OFF:

F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 05H, <Data>, F7H

Harmony/Effect:

F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 0EH, <Data>, F7H

DSP type:

F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 0EH, 00H, 01H, <Data>, F7H

Chord/Bass:

F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 0BH, <Data>, F7H

*11. Internal/external clock selectable.

*12. Operation when a start/stop command is received is determined by

the RECEIVE CHANNEL, CLOCK, AND COMMAND panel set-

tings.

0. Start/stop command ignored.

1. Auto-accompaniment start/stop.

2. Song memory start/stop.

Continue neither transmitted nor received.

343

Specifications

Keyboards:

61 standard-size keys (C1~C6) with

touch response.

VOICE:

AWM128 voices: 01~128

Polyphony: 28

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION: 1~8

VOL: 00~24

OCTAVE: -2~2

DSP DEPTH: 00~15

PAN: –7~7

ONE TOUCH SETTING

ORCHESTRATION: R1/R2/L1/L2

HARMONY: TYPE 01~10, ON/OFF

EFFECT: TYPE 01~12, ON/OFF

Setup:

POWER: ON/OFF

MASTER VOLUME: MIN~MAX

PEDAL ASSIGN:

1, 2

OVERALL CONTROL:

TEMPO

METRONOME: ON/OFF

SPLIT POINT

TRANSPOSE: -12~12

TUNING: -16~16

DSP TYPE: 1~8

TOUCH: SENSE 1~5,

TOUCH RESPONSE ON/OFF

PITCH BEND: -12~12

MODULATION: 1~3

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT:

100 styles: 00~99

(00: Custom Accompaniment)

AUTO ACCOMP: ON/OFF

FINGERING: 1~5

ACCOMP VOLUME: 00~24

REVOICE

TRACK: RHYTHM 1/2, BASS,

RHYTHMIC CHORD 1/2, PAD CHORD,

PHRASE 1/2

ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL: SYNC-

START/STOP, START/STOP, FADE IN/

OUT, INTRO, FILL IN 1, FILL IN 2,

BREAK, ENDING, VARIATION A/B

REGISTRATION MEMORY:

MEMORIZE

1~8

FREEZE

MULTI PADS:

STOP

1~4 (including 2 chord-match types).

DEMO:

SONG #: Chain Play, 1~8 (8 songs)

START/STOP

SONG MEMORY:

MEASURE #

TRACK: ACCOMP, MELODY 1~6

SONG:

RESET (STEP BWD),

PLAY/STOP (STEP FWD)

RECORDING:

REC, REWRITE SETTING, CLEAR,

STEP REC, QUANTIZE, GATE TIME,

STEP SIZE

DIGITAL SAMPLING (PSR-2700):

VOICE #: 01~128 (26-note polyphony),

VOICE NAME, FREQ, TRIGGER

LEVEL, PITCH, MAPPING, REC,

CLEAR, INPUT LEVEL

SAMPLE PADS (PSR-2700):

1~4

DISK:

FILE #, SAVE PART, MINUS ONE

SELECT, LOAD, SAVE, DELETE,

FORMAT

QUICK PLAY:

START/STOP, MINUS ONE

ARE YOU SURE ?:

YES, NO

LCD Display Panel:

Number Buttons: [+], [–], [0]~[9], [+/–]

Data Dial

MIDI:

RECEIVE CH/CL/COM, TRANSMIT CH

L/R (LOCAL/MIDI OUT)

Auxiliary Jacks:

MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, PEDAL 1/2,

SAMPLE IN (MIC/LINE: PSR-2700),

AUX OUT (L+R/L, R), HEADPHONES

Main Amplifiers:

8W x 2

AUX OUT output: 680Ω impedance.

Speakers:

12cm (4-3/4") x 2

Backup Batteries:

Four SUM-3, “AA” size, R6P or equivalent

batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H):

1045mm x 412mm x 164mm

(41-1/8" x 16-1/4" x 6-1/2")

Weight:

12.0kg (26.4 lbs.) excluding batteries

Supplied Accessories:

■

PSR-1700/2700 Demonstration Disk

Demo Songs (4 songs): 01~04

Styles (8 styles with registration data):

05~12

Multi Pads (8 sets): 13~20

Sound Effects (4 sets): 21~24

■

PSR-2700 Demonstration Disk (PSR-2700)

Demo Songs (2 songs with sampled

voices): 01~02

■

Music Stand

■

Owner’s Manual

Optional Accessories:

■

Headphones HPE-3, HPE-150

■

Foot switch FC4, FC5

■

Foot controller FC7

■

Keyboard stand L-2C

* Specifications subject to change without notice.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions,

Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, including

connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are

manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where

they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists

about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer

for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The

required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name

plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special

Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into

the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists,

contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT

defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting

cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size

for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG

number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer exten-

sion cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically de-

signed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that

do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed

installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed

ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their

operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat

sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that

produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp

locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa,

tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when

there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm

activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids

are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may

exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a quali-

fied service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain; or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that de-

scribed in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing

should be referred to qualified service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of

producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss.

DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level

or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-

sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the

product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are

designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that

benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are

well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in

this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly ap-

proved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use

the product.

IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use

only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow in-

structions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the

USA.

NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements

listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compli-

ance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance

that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in

harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment gener-

ates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to

the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with

FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in

all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try

to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:

• Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the

interference.

• Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

• In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.

If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to

co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please

contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If

you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha

Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America.

Dit produkt is gefabriceerd in overeenstemming met de

radiostoringsvoorschriften van de Richtlijn van de Raad (82/499/EEG).

ΑΥΤΗ Η ΣΥΣΚΕΥΗ ΑΝΤΑΠΟΚΡΙΝΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΤΩΝ

Ο∆ΗΓΙΩΝ ΤΗΣ ΕΥΡΩΠΑΙΚΗΣ ΟΙΚΟΝΟΜΙΚΗΣ ΚΟΙΝΟΤΗΤΑΣ 82/499/

Ε.Ο.Κ..

Este produto está de acordo com o radio de interferencia frequente

requiridos do Conselho Diretivo 82/499/EEC.

Dette apparat overholder det gaeldende EF-direktiv vedrørende radiostøj.

Cet appareil est conforme aux prescriptions de la directive

communautaire 87/308/CEE.

Diese Geräte entsprechen der EG-Richtlinie 82/499/EWG und/oder 87/

308/EWG.

This product complies with the radio frequency interference requirements

of the Council Directive 82/499/EEC and/or 87/308/EEC.

Questo apparecchio è conforme al D.M.13 aprile 1989 (Direttiva CEE/87/

308) sulla soppressione dei radiodisturbi.

Este producto está de acuerdo con los requisitos sobre interferencias de

radio frequencia fijados por el Consejo Directivo 87/308/CEE.

YAMAHA CORPORATION

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KING-

DOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the

terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal

of the three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

VQ64120 JDBBR0PO1.3CP

Documenttranscriptie

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS Bedienungsanleitung Mode d’emploi Manual de instrucciones ESPAÑOL Owner’s Manual Wichtiger Hinweis für die Benutzung in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Bescheinigung des Importeurs Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daß der/die/das Electronic Keyboard Typ: PSR-1700/PSR-2700 (Gerät, Typ, Bezeichnung) NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. in Übereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der VERFÜGUNG 1046/84 (Amtsblattverfügung) CAUTION HEADPHONES R AUX OUT L+R/L SAMPLE IN LINE MIC PEDAL 2 1 THRU MIDI OUT RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IN AVIS: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR. WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. funk-entstört ist. Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerätes angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur Überprüfung der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen eingeräumt. Yamaha Europa GmbH Model _________________________________________ Name des Importeurs Serial No. ______________________________________ • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Europa GmbH. • Dies bezieht sich nur auf die von der Yamaha Europa GmbH vertriebenen Produkte. Purchase Date _________________________________ Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. Dit produkt is gefabriceerd in overeenstemming met de radiostoringsvoorschriften van de Richtlijn van de Raad (82/499/EEG). ΑΥΤΗ Η ΣΥΣΚΕΥΗ ΑΝΤΑΠΟΚΡΙΝΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΤΩΝ Ο∆ΗΓΙΩΝ ΤΗΣ ΕΥΡΩΠΑΙΚΗΣ ΟΙΚΟΝΟΜΙΚΗΣ ΚΟΙΝΟΤΗΤΑΣ 82/499/ Ε.Ο.Κ.. Este produto está de acordo com o radio de interferencia frequente requiridos do Conselho Diretivo 82/499/EEC. Dette apparat overholder det gaeldende EF-direktiv vedrørende radiostøj. CANADA THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE “CLASS B” LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATION OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS. LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE N’EMET PAS DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE LA “CLASSE B” PRESCRITES DANS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIOELECTRIQUE EDICTE PAR LE MINISTERE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. Cet appareil est conforme aux prescriptions de la directive communautaire 87/308/CEE. Diese Geräte entsprechen der EG-Richtlinie 82/499/EWG und/oder 87/ 308/EWG. This product complies with the radio frequency interference requirements of the Council Directive 82/499/EEC and/or 87/308/EEC. Questo apparecchio è conforme al D.M.13 aprile 1989 (Direttiva CEE/ 87/308) sulla soppressione dei radiodisturbi. Este producto está de acuerdo con los requisitos sobre interferencias de radio frequencia fijados por el Consejo Directivo 87/308/CEE. YAMAHA CORPORATION OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a Yamaha PSR-1700/PSR-2700. Your PSR1700/PSR-2700 is a high-quality musical instrument that incorporates advanced Yamaha digital technology and many versatile features. In order to obtain maximum performance and enjoyment from your PSR-1700/PSR-2700, we urge you to read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the Owner’s Manual in a safe place for later reference. Contents Panel Controls 2 Taking Care of Your PortaTone 4 Preparation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 5 Power Supply .............................................................................. 5 Installing the Backup Batteries ................................................... 5 Using Headphones ..................................................................... 6 Connecting to an External Sound System .................................. 6 Using Pedals ............................................................................... 6 The Music Stand ......................................................................... 6 Listen to the Demo! ■ 7 Try the Disk Demo, Too! ............................................................. 8 Basic Editing Procedure ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Using Floppy Disks ■ ■ 9 Selecting & Playing the Voices ■ Custom Accompaniment .............................................................. 47 ■ Realtime Custom Accompaniment Recording .......................... 47 ■ Using a Custom Accompaniment ............................................. 49 Step Recording .............................................................................. 50 Editing Functions .......................................................................... 53 ■ Quantization .............................................................................. 53 ■ Clearing Tracks ......................................................................... 54 ■ Changing the Recorded Settings .............................................. 55 11 Orchestration ............................................................................ 11 Voice Assignment ..................................................................... 13 Volume ...................................................................................... 14 Octave ...................................................................................... 14 DSP Depth ................................................................................ 15 Pan ........................................................................................... 15 Auto Harmony ........................................................................... 16 Effects ....................................................................................... 17 Keyboard Percussion ................................................................ 18 Pitch Bend ................................................................................ 18 Modulation ................................................................................ 19 ■ PSR-2700 Digital Sampling ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Overall Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 20 Split Point Change .................................................................... 20 Transpose ................................................................................. 21 Tuning ....................................................................................... 21 DSP Type ................................................................................. 22 Touch Sensitivity ....................................................................... 23 Auto Accompaniment ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 24 Selecting a Style ....................................................................... 24 Setting the Auto Accompaniment Split Point ............................ 25 Auto Accompaniment Fingering ................................................ 25 Tempo Control .......................................................................... 28 Accompaniment Control ........................................................... 29 Accompaniment Volume ........................................................... 32 The Track Buttons .................................................................... 33 Re-voicing the Tracks ............................................................... 34 One Touch Setting 36 Registration Memory 37 Record Functions 39 Song Memory ................................................................................ 39 ■ Realtime Accompaniment Track Recording ............................. 40 ■ Realtime Melody Track Recording ............................................ 42 ■ Accompaniment And Melody Playback .................................... 43 ■ The [RESET] Button ................................................................. 44 ■ Record Or Play from a Specified Measure ............................... 44 The Multi Pads ............................................................................... 45 ■ Realtime Recording .................................................................. 45 ■ Playback ................................................................................... 46 56 Formatting a New Floppy Disk .................................................. 57 Saving, Loading, & Deleting Disk Files ..................................... 58 ● Saving to Disk ....................................................................... 58 ● Loading From Disk ................................................................ 60 ● Deleting a Disk File ............................................................... 61 Quick Play: Disk Orchestra Collection & Standard MIDI File Disks ............. 62 ● Minus One Playback ............................................................. 62 ■ ■ 63 Connections .............................................................................. 63 Setting the Input Level .............................................................. 63 Setting the Sampling Frequency ............................................... 64 Setting the Trigger Level ........................................................... 65 Recording ................................................................................. 66 Playing the Sample Pads .......................................................... 67 Editing Samples ........................................................................ 68 ● Clearing Samples .................................................................. 68 ● Tuning the Samples .............................................................. 68 ● Volume, DSP Depth, & Pan Settings .................................... 69 ◆ Individual SAMPLE PAD Volume Settings ......................... 69 Playing Samples via the Keyboard ........................................... 70 ● Mapping ................................................................................ 70 Sample Memory Backup & Disk Storage .................................. 71 Pedal Assign 72 MIDI 73 MIDI Reception Modes .................................................................. 74 ■ Channel Reception Modes ....................................................... 74 ■ Clock Mode ............................................................................... 75 ■ Start/Stop Mode ........................................................................ 75 MIDI Transmission ........................................................................ 76 ■ MIDI Transmit Channels ........................................................... 76 ■ Local & MIDI Output ON/OFF ................................................... 76 Appendix ........................................................................................ 77 ■ Voice & Polyphony List ............................................................. 77 ■ Style List ................................................................................... 78 ■ Error Messages ........................................................................ 81 ■ System Reset Procedure .......................................................... 82 ■ Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 83 Index ............................................................................................... 84 Percussion Kit List ...................................................................... 338 MIDI Implementation Chart ......................................................... 340 Specifications ............................................................................. 343 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 1 Taking Care of Your PortaTone Your PortaTone will give you years of playing pleasure if you follow the simple rules given below: ■ Location Do not expose the instrument to the following conditions to avoid deformation, discoloration, or more serious damage. • Direct sunlight (e.g. near a window). • High temperatures (e.g. near a heat source, outside, or in a car during the daytime). • Excessive humidity. • Excessive dust. • Strong vibration. ■ Power Supply • Turn the power switch OFF when the instrument is not in use. • The power cord should be unplugged from the AC outlet if the instrument is not to be used for an extended period of time. • Unplug the instrument during electric storms. • Avoid plugging the instrument into the same AC outlet as appliances with high power consumption, such as electric heaters or ovens. Also avoid using multi-plug adaptors since these can result in reduced sound quality and possibly damage. ■ Turn Power OFF When Making Connections • To avoid damage to the instrument and other devices to which it is connected (a sound system, for example), turn the power switches of all related devices OFF prior to connecting or disconnecting audio and MIDI cables. ■ Handling and Transport • Never apply excessive force to the controls, connectors or other parts of the instrument. • Always unplug cables by gripping the plug firmly, not by pulling on the cable. • Disconnect all cables before moving the instrument. • Physical shocks caused by dropping, bumping, or placing heavy objects on the instrument can result in scratches and more serious damage. ■ Cleaning • Clean the cabinet and panel with a dry soft cloth. • A slightly damp cloth may be used to remove stubborn grime and dirt. • Never use cleaners such as alcohol or thinner. • Avoid placing vinyl objects on top of the instrument (vinyl can stick to and discolor the surface). ■ Electrical Interference • This instrument contains digital circuitry and may cause interference if placed too close to radio or television receivers. If this occurs, move the instrument further away from the affected equipment. ■ Service and Modification • The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 contains no user serviceable parts. Opening it or tampering with it in anyway can lead to irreparable damage and possibly electric shock. Refer all servicing to qualified YAMAHA personnel. ■ Data Backup • Internal data (e.g. Song Memory data) is retained in memory even if the power switch is turned off as long as backup batteries are installed (page 5) or the AC plug is connected. The internal memory can, however, be corrupted by incorrect operation. Be sure to save important data to floppy disk frequently so you have a backup to revert to if the data in memory is accidentally damaged. Also note that magnetic fields can damage data on floppy disks, so it is advisable to make a second backup copy of disks that contain particularly important data. Always keep backup disks in a safe place away from stray magnetic fields (e.g. those produced by speakers, appliances containing motors, etc.). More important precautions for floppy disk use are given in the “Floppy Disk” section beginning on page 56. YAMAHA is not responsible for damage caused by improper handling or operation. 4 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Preparation This section contains information about setting up your PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 and preparing to play. Be sure to go through this section carefully before using your PSR-1700/PSR-2700. HEADPHONES R AUX OUT L+R/L PEDAL 2 1 ■ Power Supply After making sure that the AC mains voltage and frequency specified for your PSR-1700/PSR-2700 matches your local power supply (check the label on the bottom panel), plug the power cord into a convenient AC outlet. CAUTION CAUTION THRU MIDI OUT RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IN AVIS: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR. WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. • Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the power cord) during any record or disk operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data. ■ Installing the Backup Batteries For memory backup the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 requires four 1.5V SUM-3, “AA” size, R-6 or equivalent batteries. All PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 features will operate without these batteries installed, but song memory and other data that is not saved to disk will be lost when then power is turned off. To prevent accidental loss of data, we recommend that a set of backup batteries be installed while the instrument is in regular use. When the backup batteries need to be replaced “Backup Battery Low” will appear on the LCD display panel when the power is initially turned on (this also occurs if no backup batteries are installed). Try to replace the batteries before they fail and the backup memory contents are lost. Z Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. XInsert the four new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. C Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. CAUTION • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of four new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. • Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • To prevent possible damage due to battery leakage, remove the batteries from the instrument if it is not to be used for an extended period of time. • When you replace the batteries, any backed-up data will be lost. To avoid this, be sure to save your valuable data to a floppy disk before replacing the batteries. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 5 Preparation ■ Using Headphones A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged into the rear-panel HEADPHONES jack for private practice or late-night playing. The internal speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the HEADPHONES jack. HEADPHONES ■ Connecting to an External Sound System R AUX OUT L+R/L The AUX OUT L+R/L and R jacks deliver the output of the PSR-1700/ PSR-2700 for connection to an instrument amplifier, mixing console, PA system, or recording equipment. If you will be connecting the PSR-1700/ PSR-2700 to a monophonic sound system, use only the L+R/L jack. When a plug is inserted into the L+R/L jack only, the left- and right-channel signals are combined and delivered via the L+R/L jack so you don’t lose any of the instrument’s sound. Stereo sound system ■ Using Pedals PEDAL 2 (FC7) 1 (FC5) An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch or FC7 foot controller can be plugged into either or both of the rear-panel PEDAL jacks. The PEDAL 1 jack is initially assigned to sustain control. A footswitch connected to this jack functions as a damper pedal, controlling sustain. Press the pedal to sustain notes after the keys are released. The PEDAL 2 jack is initially assigned to the voice volume control (MIDI Expression control). An FC7 foot controller connected to this jack can be used to control voice volume: press the pedal forward to increase voice volume; backward to decrease voice volume. Both the PEDAL jacks can be assigned to a wide range of other functions as described in the “Pedal Assign” section on page 72. ■ The Music Stand Insert the bottom edge of the music stand into the slot located at the rear of the control panel. 6 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Listen to the Demo! Once you’ve set up your PSR-1700/PSR-2700, try listening to the pre-programmed demonstration songs — they’ll give you a good idea of what the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 can do! DEMO SONG # ON/ OFF MIN POWER MAX MASTER VOLUME START/STOP ZTurn the Power ON & Set the Volume .................................................................................................. ON/ OFF MIN POWER MAX Before playing the demo turn the power ON by pressing the POWER switch (the panel indicators and LCD display panel will light), and turn the MASTER VOLUME control up (clockwise) about a quarter-turn from its minimum position. MASTER VOLUME XSelect a Song .......................................................................................................................................... DEMO SONG # Press the DEMO [SONG #] button a few times until the number of the desired demo song appears on the LCD display. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Demo=0 – :ChainPlay 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Demo=0 – :ChainPlay 0 (ChainPlay): Repeat playback of all demo songs in sequence. START/STOP 1-8: Repeat playback of the selected demo song number. NOTES • “0:ChainPlay” is automatically selected whenever the power switch is turned on. CPress DEMO [START/STOP] to Start .................................................................................................... DEMO SONG # Press the DEMO [START/STOP] button to start playback, and use the MASTER VOLUME control to set the ideal listening level. The selected demonstration will play repeatedly. NOTES • During demo playback you can select different voices and play along on the keyboard — see the “Selecting & Playing the Voices” section beginning on page 11. START/STOP VPress DEMO [START/STOP] to Stop .................................................................................................... Press the DEMO [START/STOP] button again to stop demo playback. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 7 Listen to the Demo! START/STOP MINUS ONE QUICK PLAY ■ Try the Disk Demo, Too! The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 also come supplied with demonstration floppy disks that you can play as follows: NOTES • The PSR-1700 comes with one demonstration disk containing 4 demonstration songs, while the PSR-2700 includes an additional disk containing 2 demo songs that make use of the PSR-2700’s Digital Sampling feature. ZInsert the Demo Disk .............................................................................................................................. Insert demonstration disk into the disk drive unit with the sliding door facing the drive slot and the label side of the disk facing upward. The disk should click securely into place. XStart Playback ......................................................................................................................................... START/STOP MINUS ONE QUICK PLAY Press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button to start playback. The disk demo songs will play back in sequence. NOTES CAUTION • If the demo requires sampled voice data included in the disk (PSR-2700 only) the sampled voice data will automatically be loaded into sampled voice number 128 before demo playback begins. If there is already sampled voice data in memory or the wave RAM is full, the disk may not load automatically. See page 60 for details. • If you simply press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button playback will begin from the lowest file number on the disk. It is also possible to specify the file number from which playback is to begin prior to pressing the [START/STOP] button. • Never attempt to eject the demonstration disk(s) or turn the power off during demo playback. Doing so can damage both the disk drive and the disk. CStop the Demo & Eject the Disk ............................................................................................................ START/STOP MINUS ONE QUICK PLAY 8 When you’re ready to stop the demo, press the QUICK PLAY [START/ STOP] button to stop playback, then press the disk drive eject button and remove the disk. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Basic Editing Procedure The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 feature a flexible-but-consistent interface that lets you edit just about all of its parameters using the same basic procedure. Once familiar with the system, you’ll be able to edit any parameter quickly and easily. Here’s the basic procedure: – + 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +– 1_ _ RESET ZPress a Function Button ........................................................................................................................ First press the button corresponding to the function or parameter you want to edit. To select voice numbers, for example, press the [VOICE SELECT] button (its indicator will light). The name of the selected parameter and its current value will be shown on the LCD display panel. VOICE SELECT ● The LCD Display Panel The PSR-2700 and PSR-1700 feature backlit LCD display panels that make it easy to select and edit parameters as well as perform all other operations. The PSR-2700 display has two lines of 24 characters each, while the PSR1700 has one line of 16 characters. KEYBOARD PERCUSSION PSR-2700 STYLE VOICE 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff VCE=00 – 1:GrandPno CHORD PARAMETER & VALUE PSR-1700 VCE=00 – 1:GrandPno The PSR-2700 display has four sections: STYLE, VOICE, CHORD, and PARAMETER & VALUE. The STYLE and VOICE sections on the upper line always show the currently selected accompaniment style and voice. The CHORD section on the lower line shows the detected chord when the Auto Accompaniment feature is used, and the PARAMETER & VALUE section shows the parameter and value currently selected for editing. The PSR-1700 display always shows the parameter and value currently selected for editing. NOTES • “Now Processing” may appear on the LCD display panel while the PSR1700/PSR-2700 is processing the data (for example recorded data) or ready to process it. XEdit the Parameter .................................................................................................................................. The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 let you edit parameters using four different methods. Use the one that best suits the parameter you have selected: 2-1: The Function Button VOICE SELECT KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Each time you press a function button after initially selecting the function, the value of the corresponding parameter will be incremented (increased) by one. If you hold the function button for a few seconds, the parameter will begin to increment continuously as long as you hold the button. If, for example, you press the [VOICE SELECT] button and LCD display panel shows that voice number 36 (VCE=036:Fretless) is currently selected, you can select voice number 37 (VCE=037:SlapBas1) simply by pressing the [VOICE SELECT] button again. NOTES • The SPLIT POINT button, MAPPING button (PSR-2700), and PITCH button (PSR-2700) are exceptions. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 9 Basic Editing Procedure 2-2: The [+] and [−] Buttons – + RESET 2-3: The Number Buttons 0 1 7 2 8 3 4 9 +– 1_ _ 2 The number buttons — to the right of the [+] and [–] buttons — allow direct numeric entry of the desired value, and are therefore the fastest way to edit in many situations. To select a voice, for example, choose one of the 128 voices — numbered “01” through “128” — listed in the “Voice & Polyphony List” on page 77, then enter its number using the number buttons. To select “Harmonica” (number 23), for example, first press [2] then [3]. The number “23” should then appear on the LCD display panel along with the name “Harmnica”. The [+/–] button is used to switch between positive and negative values with parameters that allow negative values (Transpose, Tuning, Octave, and Pan, for example). A “–” appears before negative values on the LCD display panel. Example: Voice number “120” +– 1_ _ The [+] and [–] buttons can be used to increment (increase by one) or decrement (decrease by one) the currently selected parameter. Press the [+] button briefly to increment the parameter value, or the [–] button to decrement. If you hold the [+] or [–] button down, the value will increment or decrement continuously — simply release the button when the desired value has been reached. 0 When selecting voice numbers the [+/–] button is used to enter the hundreds digit of the voice number (the button alternately selects no hundreds digit or “1”), as required, prior to entering the tens and ones digits. The [1] number button cannot be used to enter the hundreds digit when selecting voices. Values outside the range of the selected parameter can not be entered. 2-4: The Data Dial This is undoubtedly the easiest way to edit most parameters. Simply rotate the dial clockwise to increment or counter-clockwise to decrement. NOTES • After editing a parameter other than [VOICE SELECT], the [VOICE SELECT] parameter will automatically be re-selected after a brief delay. • If you attempt to change a parameter that can not be edited in the current mode, “IllegalOperation” will appear on the LCD display. ● Yes/No Confirmation YES ARE YOU SURE ? 10 NO Some operations that change important settings or erase data may require you to confirm your choice by pressing the [YES] or [NO] button. When a choice needs to be confirmed the ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash and a digitally sampled voice will ask “Are you sure?”. Press the [YES] button to execute the specified operation or the [NO] button to cancel and leave the settings or data unaffected. If you don’t want to hear the “Are you sure?” confirmation sound, hold down the [NO] button while initially turning the power switch on. To restore the confirmation sound, turn the power switch off, then turn it back on again while holding down the [YES] button. The on/off status of the confirmation sound is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed or an AC plug is connected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Selecting & Playing the Voices PSR-1700 The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have 128 stunning voices plus 8 different drum and percussion kits that you can select and play in a number of ways. VOICE SELECT VOICE VOL OCTAVE DSP DEPTH PAN ORCHESTRATION L1 HARMONY TYPE EFFECT TYPE R1 EDIT L2 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION R2 ONE TOUCH SETTING HARMONY EFFECT PSR-2700 VOICE SELECT VOICE VOL OCTAVE DSP DEPTH PAN ORCHESTRATION L1 HARMONY TYPE EFFECT TYPE R1 EDIT MODULATION PITCH BEND L2 SAMPLED KEYBOARD PERCUSSION VOICE ONE TOUCH SETTING R2 HARMONY EFFECT ■ Orchestration The unique ORCHESTRATION button group in the VOICE control section lets you select and play from one to four “parts” at the same time using a variety of “orchestrations”. One of the 128 voices is assigned to each part. ● Single: One voice over the entire keyboard. ● Dual: Two voices simultaneously over the entire keyboard. ● Split: Different voices with the left and right hands. ● Split & Dual: Combinations of the Split and Dual modes. There are actually a number of variations on each of the above orchestrations. The ORCHESTRATION buttons are used to choose the type of orchestration you want. Right-hand voice 1 (or single voice) Left-hand voice 1 ORCHESTRATION L1 R1 EDIT L2 Left-hand voice 2 R2 Right-hand voice 2 (or single voice) The four available parts are turned on and off by the [R1], [R2], [L1], and [L2] buttons. The indicators next to each of these buttons tell you which parts are on and which are off, and therefore indicate the current orchestration mode. The [EDIT] button determines which of the four orchestration parts is to be edited. You can, for example, assign any of the 128 voices to each of the orchestration parts. But before we discuss voice assignment and editing, let’s take a look at the various orchestration modes: ● Single Modes In the “single” modes either the [R1] or [R2] part voice can be played over the entire keyboard. The R1 and R2 single-voice modes are selected simply by pressing either the [R1] or [R2] button if neither the [L1] or [L2] indicators are lit. If the [L1] and/or [L2] indicators are lit, press them so that both indicators go out. Note that when you select the [R1] or [R2] singlevoice mode, the triangular EDIT indicator for the selected voice also lights. This means you can select a different voice number or otherwise edit the current voice using the procedures described on page 13. L1 R1 EDIT L2 R2 L1 The R1 voice is played across the entire keyboard. R1 EDIT L2 R2 The R2 voice is played across the entire keyboard. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 11 Selecting & Playing the Voices ● Dual Mode ● Split & Dual Modes In the dual mode both the [R1] and [R2] part voices are selected so they can be played simultaneously across the entire keyboard. To select the dual mode, make sure that both the [L1] and [L2] indicators are out, then press both the [R1] and [R2] buttons simultaneously (or hold one while pressing the other). You can switch back to either of the single modes from the dual mode simply by pressing the [R1] or [R2] button, as required. L1 There are five possible combinations of the split and dual modes, as shown below. The part for the single-voice side of the combination is selected simply by pressing the appropriate part button, while for the dual-voice side both buttons must be pressed simultaneously (or one while holding the other). ▼ L1 R1 EDIT L2 R2 L1 R1 L1 voice. R1 & R2 voices. R1 ▼ EDIT L2 R2 The R1 & R2 voices are played across the entire keyboard. EDIT L2 R2 L1 R1 R1 & R2 voices. L2 voice. ▼ ● Split Modes EDIT The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 allow four different split modes, with one voice played on the left-hand section of the keyboard ([L1] or [L2]) and a different voice on the right-hand section of the keyboard ([R1] or [R2]). Selecting a split mode is simply a matter of pressing the buttons corresponding to the desired left- and right-hand parts. The split point (i.e. the key at which the voices change over) can be set at any desired key by using the SPLIT POINT CHANGE function described on page 20. L2 R2 L1 R1 L1 & L2 voices. R2 voice. ▼ EDIT L2 R2 L1 R1 L1 & L2 voices. R1 voice. ▼ EDIT L2 R2 L1 & L2 voices. R1 & R2 voices. ▼ L1 R1 EDIT L2 R2 L1 R1 R1 voice. L1 voice. ▼ EDIT L2 R2 L1 R1 L2 voice. R1 voice. ▼ EDIT L2 R2 L1 R1 L1 voice. R2 voice. ▼ EDIT L2 12 R2 L2 voice. R2 voice. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Voice Assignment You can assign any of the 128 voices to each of the ORCHESTRATION parts, whether the part is currently ON or OFF. ZPress the [VOICE SELECT] Button ....................................................................................................... You don’t need to do this if the [VOICE SELECT] indicator is already lit. Also make sure that the [KEYBOARD PERCUSSION] and [SAMPLED VOICE] (PSR-2700) indicators are out. VOICE SELECT SAMPLED KEYBOARD PERCUSSION VOICE (PSR-2700) XSelect the Part You Want to Edit ........................................................................................................... Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part to which you want to assign a new voice. The [EDIT] indicators light in sequence in the clockwise direction each time the [EDIT] button is pressed. EDIT NOTES • You can edit the voice number of a part that is OFF while playing a different part. • Actually, the [VOICE SELECT] mode is automatically selected whenever the [EDIT] button is pressed, so you don’t really need to press [VOICE SELECT] as described in step 1 if you’re going to use the [EDIT] button prior to selecting a voice number. CSelect a Voice Number ........................................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 RESET Example: Voice number “120” +– 1_ _ 2 0 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE SELECT] button itself to select the required voice number (see page 9 for editing procedure details). When entering voice numbers higher than 99, use the [+/–] button to enter the hundreds digit prior to entering the tens and ones digits: the button alternately selects no hundreds digit or “1”. NOTES • The voice categories are listed in the “VOICE” list on the PSR-1700/ PSR-2700 panel. See page 77 for a complete list. • The optimum keyboard range is preset for each voice. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 13 Selecting & Playing the Voices ■ Volume You can individually set the volume of each orchestration part to set up the ideal balance between parts. ZSelect the Part You Want to Edit ........................................................................................................... Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part you want to edit. XPress the [VOL] Button .......................................................................................................................... VOL Press the VOICE control section [VOL] button. The current volume value of the selected part will appear on the LCD display panel. PSR-1700 Volume=2 –1 PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Volume=2 –1 CSet the Volume ....................................................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 RESET Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOL] button itself to set the desired volume. The volume range is from 00 (no sound) to 24 (maximum volume). The default volume value (21) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. ■ Octave You can individually shift the octave of each orchestration part up or down by up to two octaves. This makes it easy, for example, to lower the pitch of a bass voice to an appropriate octave without affecting the other parts in your orchestration. ZSelect the Part You Want to Edit ........................................................................................................... Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part you want to edit. XPress the [OCTAVE] Button .................................................................................................................. OCTAVE Press the VOICE control section [OCTAVE] button. The current octave value of the selected part will appear on the LCD display panel. PSR-1700 Octave= 0 – PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Octave= 0 – CSet the Octave ........................................................................................................................................ – + RESET 14 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [OCTAVE] button itself to set the desired octave. The octave range is from –2 (down two octaves) to +2 (up two octaves). The normal octave value for the selected voice can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ DSP Depth The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 features a built-in digital signal processor (DSP) that can be used to apply a range of reverb and delay effects to the voices. The [DSP TYPE] button in the OVERALL CONTROL section (page 22) determines the type of effect to be applied, while the VOICE section [DSP DEPTH] button lets you individually set the amount of effect applied to each orchestration part. ZSelect the Part You Want to Edit ........................................................................................................... Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part you want to edit. XPress the [DSP DEPTH] Button ............................................................................................................. Press the VOICE control section [DSP DEPTH] button. The current DSP depth value of the selected part will appear on the LCD display panel. DSP DEPTH PSR-1700 PSR-2700 DSP Depth=0 –6 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff DSP Depth=0 –6 CSet the DSP Depth .................................................................................................................................. – + 0 1 2 RESET Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [DSP DEPTH] button itself to set the desired DSP depth. The depth range is from 00 (OFF: no effect, direct sound only) to 15 (maximum effect). The default DSP depth value (06) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. ■ Pan The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 delivers true stereo sound, and you can use this parameter to individually set the stereo (pan) position of each orchestration part to create a broad stereo image of your sound. ZSelect the Part You Want to Edit ........................................................................................................... Use the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button to select the part you want to edit. XPress the [PAN] Button .......................................................................................................................... PAN Press the VOICE control section [PAN] button. The current pan value of the selected part will appear on the LCD display panel. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Panpot= 0 – :Center 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Panpot= 0 – :Center CSet the Pan Position ............................................................................................................................... – + RESET 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [PAN] button itself to set the desired pan value. The pan range is from –7 (full left) to +7 (full right). A setting of “0” places the sound of the selected part in the center of the stereo sound field. Other settings produce in-between positions. “–4”, for example, would place the sound between center and full left. The center pan position (0) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. NOTES • The new pan value will apply from the next note played — i.e. you can’t pan the sound of a note while it is playing. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 15 Selecting & Playing the Voices ■ Auto Harmony Auto Harmony is used with the Auto Accompaniment feature (see page 24). It automatically adds appropriate harmony notes to a single-note melody line you play on the keyboard. You can choose from 10 different types of harmony that can be assigned to the right-hand orchestration parts. NOTES • The Auto Harmony feature cannot be used when Auto Accompaniment fingering mode 5 “Full” is selected (page 28). ZTurn Auto Harmony ON ......................................................................................................................... Press the [HARMONY] button so that its indicator lights. This turns Auto Harmony ON. HARMONY TYPE NOTES • The HARMONY can’t be engaged when Keyboard Percussion is ON. HARMONY XPress the [HARMONY TYPE] Button .................................................................................................... Press the VOICE control section [HARMONY TYPE] button. The number of the currently selected harmony type will appear on the LCD display panel. HARMONY TYPE PSR-1700 Harm.=0 – 1:Duet HARMONY PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Harm.=0 – 1:Duet CSelect a Harmony Type .......................................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [HARMONY TYPE] button itself to select the desired effect. RESET The Harmony Types 01: Duet 16 This harmony type produces a duophonic melody with the second voice below the melody line. If you turn both the R1 and R2 voices on (DUAL mode) the notes you play on the keyboard will be played by the R1 voice, and the harmony notes by the R2 voice. You can individually set the R1 and R2 voices and voice parameters as required. 02: 1 + 5 A parallel voice is produced a fifth above the melody voice. As in the Duet type, the R1 and R2 voices can be set individually in the dual mode. 03: Country Similar to Duet, but the second voice is above the melody line. The R1 and R2 voices can be set individually in the dual mode. 04: Trio This harmony type generates two voices in addition to the melody voice. Both of the harmony voices are assigned to R2 in the dual mode. 05: Block Three or four notes are added to the melody to produce four or five-note chords. In the dual mode the highest and lowest voices (always one octave apart) are assigned to R1, and the inner two or three notes are assigned to R2. 06: 4-way close 1 Three harmony notes are generated to produce a four-note chord. If both the R1 and R2 voices are turned on (dual mode), the 1st (melody) and 3rd notes are assigned to R1 while the 2nd and 4th are assigned to R2. 07: 4-way close 2 Similar to the preceding type, but depending on the chords played this type will sometimes produce a more colorful sound. The note assignment in the dual mode is also different: 1st and 2nd notes to R1, 3rd and 4th notes to R2. 08: 4-way open Four-note chords with open voice (large intervals between the notes). The result is a very “open” sound. Since the harmony notes can be as much as two octaves below the melody, avoid playing in the lower registers. With certain voices you might find that changing the octave (see “Octave” on page 14) results in better sound. In the dual mode the top (melody) note is assigned to R1 and all three harmony notes are assigned to R2. 09: Octave One note is added an octave below the melody. In the dual mode the melody is assigned to R1 and the lower note to R2. 10: Strum The notes and assignments are the same as in the Block type, but the notes are arpeggiated. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| VTurn Auto Harmony ON or OFF as Required ....................................................................................... Use the [HARMONY] button to turn Auto Harmony ON or OFF. Auto Harmony is ON when the [HARMONY] button indicator is lit. HARMONY TYPE NOTES HARMONY • Only a single note can be played at a time on the keyboard (or the right-hand section of the keyboard) when the Auto Harmony feature is used. • If you play more than one note at the same time while Auto Harmony is ON, only the highest note will sound. • Auto Harmony will only function when the Auto Accompaniment function is being used (page 24). ■ Effects The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have a range of 12 delay-based effects — in addition to the DSP effects (pages 15 and 22) — that can be selected and applied to the right-hand orchestration parts (the left-hand orchestration parts are not affected). ZTurn the Effect ON .................................................................................................................................. EFFECT TYPE Press the [EFFECT] button so that its indicator lights. This turns ON the effect. NOTES • The EFFECT can’t be engaged when Keyboard Percussion is ON. EFFECT XPress the [EFFECT TYPE] Button ......................................................................................................... EFFECT TYPE Press the VOICE control section [EFFECT TYPE] button. The number of the currently selected effect will appear on the LCD display panel. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Eff.=0 – 4:Echo4 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Eff.=0 – 4:Echo4 EFFECT CSelect an Effect ....................................................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [EFFECT TYPE] button itself to select the desired effect. The Effects RESET 01 Echo 1 05 Tremolo 1 09 Trill 1 06 Tremolo 2 10 Trill 2 07 Tremolo 3 11 Trill 3 08 Tremolo 4 12 Trill 4 3 02 Echo 2 03 Echo 3 04 Echo 4 3 3 VTurn the Effect ON or OFF as Required ............................................................................................... EFFECT TYPE Use the [EFFECT] button to turn the effect ON or OFF. The selected effect is ON when the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit. NOTES • You can change the effect type whether the effect is ON or OFF. EFFECT ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 17 Selecting & Playing the Voices ■ Keyboard Percussion The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have 8 different drum and percussion “kits” that can be played on the keyboard when the Keyboard Percussion function is turned ON. The types of drum and percussion instruments played by the various keys when Keyboard Percussion function is selected are marked by symbols above the keys. ZTurn Keyboard Percussion ON ............................................................................................................. Press the [KEYBOARD PERCUSSION] button so that its indicator lights to turn Keyboard Percussion ON. The percussion kit number will appear on the LCD display panel. VOICE SELECT PSR-1700 PSR-2700 VCE=1 – :STANDARD 08:Showtune 1:STANDARD AccOff VCE=1 – :STANDARD KEYBOARD PERCUSSION XSelect a Percussion Kit .......................................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 RESET Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE SELECT] button to select the desired percussion kit (1 through 8). See page 338 for a complete list of the percussion kit instruments. The Percussion Kits 1 2 3 4 Standard Room Rock Electronic NOTES 5 6 7 8 Analog Jazz Brush Classic • The HARMONY, EFFECT, and TRANSPOSE functions (pages 16, 17, and 21) do not affect the percussion sounds. The HARMONY and EFFECT functions will be canceled when Keyboard Percussion is turned ON. • The ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button does not function when Keyboard Percussion is turned ON. ■ Pitch Bend + – The PITCH BEND wheel to the left of the keyboard allows the pitch of notes played on the keyboard to be bent up or down — roll the wheel away from you to bend up, and toward you to bend down (this situation can be reversed, as described below). When the PITCH BEND wheel is moved almost all the way in either direction, the current pitch bend range value will appear on the LCD display panel (see below). PITCH BEND ● Setting the Pitch Bend Range The maximum amount of pitch bend produced by the PITCH BEND wheel can be set anywhere from ±1 semitone to ±12 semitones (i.e. plus or minus one octave). 18 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ZCall the Pitch Bend Range Parameter .................................................................................................. To set the pitch bend range, roll the PITCH BEND wheel all the way in either direction so that the current range value appears on the LCD display panel. + – PSR-1700 PSR-2700 P.B.Range=+ – 02 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff P.B.Range=+ – 02 PITCH BEND XSet the Pitch Bend Range ...................................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 RESET While holding the PITCH BEND wheel at its maximum position, use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to select the desired pitch bend range. Use the [+/–] button to enter negative values. The pitch bend range value is displayed in semitones (–12 through 12). If a minus setting is selected pitch bend wheel operation is reversed — i.e. roll the wheel away from you to lower pitch. The default pitch bend range (02) can be instantly recalled by pressing [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously. CRelease the PITCH BEND Wheel ........................................................................................................... Release the PITCH BEND wheel when you’ve set the required pitch bend range. ■ Modulation The MODULATION button on the side panel of the instrument, next to the PITCH BEND wheel, can be used to apply pitch modulation (vibrato) to most voices. The modulation speed is preset for each voice, but the depth can be set as required. ZCall the Modulation Depth Parameter .................................................................................................. To set the modulation depth, press and hold the MODULATION button so that the current depth value appears on the LCD display panel. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Mod.Depth=2 – 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Mod.Depth=2 – XSet the Modulation Depth ...................................................................................................................... – + RESET 0 1 2 While holding the MODULATION button, use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to select the desired modulation depth. The available modulation depth range is from 1 (minimum depth) to 3 (maximum depth). CRelease the MODULATION Button ....................................................................................................... Release the MODULATION button when you’ve set the required modulation depth. NOTES • The same modulation depth setting may produce slightly different effects with different voices. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 19 Overall Control The OVERALL CONTROL section includes a range of parameters that, as their title suggests, apply to the overall sound of the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700. OVERALL CONTROL TEMPO SPLIT TRANSDSP POINT POSE TUNING TYPE TOUCH SENSE 0 OFF DSP TYPE ..................................... 1 HALL 1 2 HALL 2 3 ROOM 1 4 ROOM 2 METRONOME 5 PLATE 1 6 PLATE 2 7 DELAY 1 8 DELAY 2 TOUCH RESPONSE ■ Split Point Change This function lets you set the split point (the key that separates the left-hand and right-hand orchestration parts) to any key on the keyboard. ZTurn Auto Accompaniment OFF ........................................................................................................... STYLE SELECT To set the split point for the left- and right-hand orchestration parts, make sure that the [AUTO ACCOMP] indicator is off before proceeding. NOTES • The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 actually memorizes two separate split points: one for the left- and right-hand orchestration parts, and one for Auto Accompaniment mode. See page 25 for details on setting the Auto Accompaniment split point. AUTO ACCOMP XPress the [SPLIT POINT] Button ........................................................................................................... SPLIT POINT Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [SPLIT POINT] button. The key number of the current split point will appear on the LCD display panel. PSR-2700 PSR-1700 SplitPt=0 –61:C#3 NOTES 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff SplitPt=0 –61:C#3 • The key numbers for each note are listed above the keyboard. The C3 (middle C) key number, for example, is 60. CSet the Split Point ................................................................................................................................... SPLIT POINT The easiest way to set the split point is to press the key you want to set as the split point while holding the [SPLIT POINT] button. The number of the selected key will appear on the LCD display panel. PSR-2700 PSR-1700 SplitPt=0 –65:F3 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff SplitPt=0 –65:F3 As with all other parameters, you can also use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to select the desired split point. The default split point (69) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. NOTES 20 • The split-point key becomes the lowest key in the right-hand section of the keyboard. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Transpose The [TRANSPOSE] button makes it possible to shift the pitch of the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 up or down in semitone intervals up to a maximum of 12 semitones (one octave). Transposing the pitch of the keyboard makes it easier to play in difficult key signatures, and you can easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instrumentalist. ZPress the [TRANSPOSE] Button ........................................................................................................... Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [TRANSPOSE] button. The current transpose value will appear on the LCD display panel. TRANSPOSE PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Transpose= 0 –0 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Transpose= 0 –0 XSet the Desired Degree of Transposition ............................................................................................. – + 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [TRANSPOSE] button itself to set the desired degree of transposition. Use the [+/–] button to enter negative values. RESET The transposition range is from –12 to +12, with –12 corresponding to downward transposition by 12 semitones (one octave), and +12 corresponding to upward transposition by 12 semitones. 00 is the “normal” keyboard pitch value. The normal transpose value (00) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. NOTES • The new transpose value will apply from the next note played — i.e. you can’t transpose the sound of a note while it is playing. ■ Tuning The [TUNING] button makes it possible to tune the pitch of the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 to match other instruments. Tuning can be accomplished over a ±50-cent range (that’s 100 cents total, or one semitone) in 33 steps. ZPress the [TUNING] Button.................................................................................................................... Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [TUNING] button. The current tuning value will appear on the LCD display panel. TUNING PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Tune= 0 – 0:440.0Hz 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Tune= 0 – 0:440.0Hz XSet the Tuning ........................................................................................................................................ – + RESET 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [TUNING] button itself to set the desired tuning value. The tuning range is from –16 (–50 cents) to +16 (+50 cents). “00” (±0 cents) is the “normal” tuning value. The normal tuning value (00) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. NOTES • The tuning setting is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 21 Overall Control ■ DSP Type The [DSP TYPE] button selects one of eight digital effects that you can use for extra depth and expressive power. This button determines the type of effect to be used, while the [DSP DEPTH] button in the VOICE section allow the depth of the effect to be individually set for each orchestration part. ZPress the [DSP TYPE] Button ............................................................................................................... Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [DSP TYPE] button. The number of the current DSP type will appear on the LCD display panel. DSP TYPE PSR-1700 PSR-2700 DspTyp=1 – :Hall1 0 OFF DSP TYPE ..................................... 1 HALL 1 5 PLATE 1 2 HALL 2 6 PLATE 2 3 ROOM 1 7 DELAY 1 4 ROOM 2 8 DELAY 2 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff DspTyp=1 – :Hall1 XSelect a DSP Type .................................................................................................................................. – + RESET 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [DSP TYPE] button itself to select the desired DSP type (0 for OFF, or 1 … 8 as listed below). The default DSP type (1) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. The DSP Types 1 Hall 1 2 Hall 2 3 Room 1 4 Room 2 5 Plate 1 6 Plate 2 7 Delay 1 8 Delay 2 NOTES For a spacious reverb sound use one of the Hall settings. These effects simulate the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Hall 2 has a longer reverb time and therefore simulates a larger hall than Hall 1. These settings add relatively short reverb effects to the sound that are similar to the type of acoustic reverberation you might hear in different rooms. These are simulations of the large plate reverb devices traditionally used in professional recording studios. Delay 1 produces a distinct series of delay repeats, while Delay 2 produces a smoother multiple-delay sound. • DSP effects may sound different with different voices. • The DSP Type setting is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. 22 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Touch Sensitivity This function varies the touch sensitivity of the keyboard. Use this capability to adjust the keyboard touch sensitivity for the best results with your own particular playing style. ZPress the [TOUCH SENSE] Button ....................................................................................................... TOUCH SENSE Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [TOUCH SENSE] button. The current sensitivity setting will appear on the LCD display panel. PSR-1700 Touch=4 – :Mid-High PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Touch=4 – :Mid-High TOUCH RESPONSE XTurn Touch Sensitivity ON .................................................................................................................... TOUCH SENSE Press the [TOUCH RESPONSE] button so that its indicator lights. This turns touch sensitivity ON. TOUCH RESPONSE CSet the Sensitivity .................................................................................................................................. – + 0 RESET 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [TOUCH SENSE] button itself to set the desired sensitivity value (1 … 5). A setting of “1” produces the least touch sensitivity, and therefore the smallest dynamic range. A setting of “5” produces the greatest sensitivity and broadest dynamic range. The default touch sensitivity value (4) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. VTurn Touch Sensitivity ON or OFF as Required .................................................................................. TOUCH SENSE Use the [TOUCH RESPONSE] button to turn touch sensitivity ON or OFF as required. When OFF (i.e. when the indicator is off) the same volume is produced no matter how hard you play on the keyboard. Touch sensitivity can be turned OFF to produce a more realistic effect with voices that normally do not have touch response: e.g. organ and harpsichord. TOUCH RESPONSE ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 23 Auto Accompaniment The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have 100 accompaniment styles that can be used to provide fullyorchestrated Auto Accompaniment. When the Auto Accompaniment function is turned ON, the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 create fully-orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment based on chords you play with the left hand in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of the Auto Accompaniment split point). The right-hand section of the keyboard is available for normal playing. The default Auto Accompaniment split point AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is the G2 (55) key. The Auto Accompaniment Auto Accompaniment Normal ▼ section of the keyboard consists of all keys to its left. The Auto Accompaniment split point can be set to any other key as described in “Setting the Auto Accompaniment Split Point” Left-hand fingering specifies The right-hand plays the auto accompaniment chords. normally. on page 25. NOTES • The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 also has a special “Full” Auto Accompaniment fingering mode in which chords played anywhere on the keyboard determine the Auto Accompaniment chords. See page 28 for details. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT STYLE FINGE- ACCOMP SELECT RING VOLUME RHYTHM 1 2 BASS RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 PAD CHORD PHRASE 1 2 MODE ................ 1 CHORD 1 2 CHORD 2 3 SINGLE 4 MULTI 5 FULL AUTO ACCOMP SYNC-START/STOP START/STOP FADE IN/OUT INTRO FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 BREAK REVOICE TRACK ENDING VARIATION A B ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL ■ Selecting a Style Any of the 100 accompaniment styles can be selected via the normal editing procedure. This can be done either before or during accompaniment playback. See page 78 for descriptions of all 100 styles. NOTES • Eight additional styles are provided on floppy disk. These can be loaded, one at a time, into the PortaTone’s “Custom Style” memory location — style number “00” — and used in the same way as the 100 preset styles. See page 60 for instructions on loading styles from disk. ZPress the [STYLE SELECT] Button ...................................................................................................... When you press the [STYLE SELECT] button the currently selected style number and name will appear on the LCD display panel. STYLE SELECT PSR-1700 Styl=0 – 8:Showtune PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Styl=0 – 8:Showtune AUTO ACCOMP XSelect a Style Number ............................................................................................................................ – + RESET 24 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [STYLE SELECT] button itself to select the required style number (see page 9 for editing procedure details). ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Setting the Auto Accompaniment Split Point To set the Auto Accompaniment split point, first turn Auto Accompaniment ON — press the [AUTO ACCOMP] button so that its indicator lights — then proceed with steps 2 and 3 as described in “Split Point Change” on page 20. The default Auto Accompaniment split point (55) can be instantly recalled by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. SPLIT POINT STYLE SELECT AUTO ACCOMP Auto Accompaniment split point ▼ Auto Accompaniment NOTES Orchestration split point ▼ Left voice Right voice • If the Auto Accompaniment split point is set at a lower key than the orchestration split point, the L1 and/or L2 voice will sound between the Auto Accompaniment and orchestration split points. Auto Accompaniment split point Orchestration split point ▼ ▼ • If the Auto Accompaniment split point is set at a higher key than the orchestration split point, the L1 and/or L2 voice will sound throughout the entire Auto Accompaniment section. Left voice Auto Accompaniment Right voice Orchestration split point ▼ Left voice Right voice Auto Accompaniment • If the Auto Accompaniment “Full” fingering mode is selected, the L1 and/or L2 voice will sound to the left of the orchestration split point while the R1 and/or R2 voice will sound to the right of the orchestration split point. ■ Auto Accompaniment Fingering The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have 5 Auto Accompaniment fingering modes, selected via the [FINGERING] button. ZPress the [FINGERING] Button ............................................................................................................. When you press the [FINGERING] button the currently selected Auto Accompaniment fingering number and type name will appear on the LCD display panel. FINGERING MODE ................ PSR-1700 1 CHORD 1 2 CHORD 2 3 SINGLE 4 MULTI 5 FULL Fingrng=1 – :Chord1 PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno C Fingrng=1 – :Chord1 XSelect a Fingering Mode ........................................................................................................................ – + 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [FINGERING] button itself to select the required fingering mode (see page 9 for editing procedure details). RESET ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 25 Auto Accompaniment ● Mode 1: Chord 1 The Chord 1 mode is ideal if you already know how to play chords on a keyboard, since it allows you to supply your own chords for the Auto Accompaniment feature. PSR-1700 Fingrng=1 –:Chord1 PSR-2700 The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will accept the following chord types: 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno C Fingrng=1 – :Chord1 Example for “C” chords CM 9 C6 9 ( ( ) CMadd 9 CM7 #11 ( CM 7 ) CM 6 ) C ( ( ) ) Caug Cm 6 Cm 7 Cm add 9 Cm 9 Cm 11 Cm 7 b5 ( ) Cm ) ( ( ( ) ) ( ) CmM 7 Cdim Cdim 7 C7 C 7 sus4 C7 9 C 7 #11 C 7 13 C 7 b9 C 7 b13 C 7 #9 Csus 4 C 1+2+5 ) ) ( ( ) ( ) ) ( ( ) C 7 aug CM 7 aug ( ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ) CmM 9 Major [M] ................................................................... 1 - 3 - 5 Major sixth [M6] .................................................... 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Major seventh [M7] ........................................... 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7#11] .. 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 Major add ninth [Madd9] ...................................... 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 Major ninth [M9] ........................................... 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 Major sixth add ninth [6 9] ............................ 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 Augmented [aug] ..................................................... 1 - 3 - #5 Minor [m] ................................................................. 1 - b3 - 5 Minor sixth [m6] .................................................. 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Minor seventh [m7] ........................................ 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] ................... 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Minor add ninth [madd9] .................................... 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Minor ninth [m9] ........................................ 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Minor eleventh [m11] ........................ 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Minor major seventh [mM7] ............................. 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 Minor major ninth [mM9] ............................ 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 Diminished [dim] .................................................... 1 - b3 - b5 Diminished seventh [dim7] ............................... 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Seventh [7] ....................................................... 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] .................... 1 - 4 - 5 - b7 Seventh ninth [7 9] ..................................... 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Seventh sharp eleventh [7#11] ......... 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 Seventh thirteenth [7 13] ............................ 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 or 2 - 3 - 5 - 6 - b7 Seventh flatted ninth [7b9] ........................ 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Seventh flatted thirteenth [7b13] ................ 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 Seventh sharp ninth [7#9] ...................... (1) - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Major seventh augmented [M7aug] ................... 1 - 3 - #5 - 7 Seventh augmented [7aug] ............................ (1) - 3 - #5 - b7 Suspended fourth [sus4] ........................................... 1 - 4 - 5 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] .................................. 1 - 2 - 5 NOTES • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with many major and minor chords. • An octave (1+8) produces accompaniment based only on the root. • If three adjacent keys are played simultaneously (white and black keys), chord accompaniment will be cancelled and only the rhythm accompaniment will sound. (Chord 1/Chord 2 mode) * 6 9 chords are only recognized in root position. All other inversions are interpreted as m11. * m6 chords are only recognized in root position. All other inversions are interpreted as m7b5. * 1+2+5 chords are only recognized in root position. All other inversions are interpreted as sus4. * With aug and dim7 chords the lowest note played is assumed to be the root. * With 7#11 chords the lowest note played is assumed to be the root or b7. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root position”, but other inversions can be used — with the following exceptions: * M6 chords are only recognized in root position. All other inversions are interpreted as m7. 26 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ● Mode 2: Chord 2 PSR-1700 Fingrng=2 – :Chord2 PSR-2700 This is essentially the same as the Chord 1 mode, above, except that the lowest note played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard will be played by the bass part rather than the chord root. C C on E C on G 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno C Fingrng=2 – :Chord2 ● Mode 3: Single PSR-1700 Fingrng=3 – :Single PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno C Fingrng=3 – :Single C Cm C7 SINGLE mode fingering makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minorseventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. The accompaniment produced is perfectly matched to the currently selected accompaniment style. Major Chords: If you press a “C” key in the left-hand section of the keyboard, for example, a C-major accompaniment will be played. Press another key in the left-hand section of the keyboard to select a new chord. The key you press will always determine the “root” of the chord played (i.e. “C” for a C chord). Minor Chords: Simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. Seventh Chords: Simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. Cm7 Minor-seventh Chords: Simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. NOTES ● Mode 4: Multi PSR-1700 Fingrng=4 – :Multi PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno C Fingrng=4 – :Multi • The Auto Accompaniment will continue playing even if you lift your fingers from the Auto Accompaniment keys. You only need to press the Auto Accompaniment keys when changing chords. This is a combination of the Single and Chord 1 modes. In this mode the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 automatically discriminates between Single and Chord 1 mode fingerings and generates the appropriate accompaniment. NOTES • If more than two keys are played and all but the highest key are black keys, and the chord is not recognized by the Chord 1 mode, the highest note will be interpreted as the root of a minor (m) chord. • If more than three keys are played and, excluding the highest key, are a mixture of black and white keys, and the chord is not recognized by the Chord 1 mode, the highest note will be interpreted as the root of a minor-seventh (m7) chord. • If more than two keys are played and all but the highest key are white keys, and the chord is not recognized by the Chord 1 mode, the highest note will be interpreted as the root of a seventh (7) chord. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 27 Auto Accompaniment ● Mode 5: Full PSR-1700 Fingrng=5 –:Full PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno C Fingrng=5 – :Full In this mode chords played anywhere on the keyboard are detected and used for Auto Accompaniment. Otherwise the keyboard functions normally, and the entire range is available for playing. Chord recognition is the same as in the Chord 1 mode. Please note that in this mode all notes you play on the keyboard at any one time will be interpreted as the Auto Accompaniment chord. NOTES Playing Chords When the Accompaniment is Stopped • A single note played more than one octave below the lowest note in a chord will be interpreted as a bass note, and notes played more than an 11th above the lowest chord note will be interpreted as melody. Chords played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are also detected and played by the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 Auto Accompaniment system when the accompaniment is stopped (except in the Full fingering mode). In this case the bass note and chord voices are selected automatically. ■ Tempo Control The [TEMPO] button can be used to control the tempo of AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT, SONG MEMORY and MULTI PAD playback (see pages 43 and 46). ZPress the [TEMPO] Button..................................................................................................................... Press the OVERALL CONTROL section [TEMPO] button. The current tempo (quarter-note beats per minute) will appear on the LCD display panel. TEMPO PSR-1700 Tempo œ=1 – 28 PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno C Tempo œ=1 – 28 METRONOME XSet the Tempo ......................................................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [TEMPO] button itself to set the desired tempo. Each accompaniment style has a different “default” tempo which is automatically set whenever a new style is selected (but not when a new style is selected while the accompaniment is playing). The default tempo for the currently selected accompaniment style can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. RESET ● The [METRONOME] Button TEMPO The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 include a metronome function that you’ll use primarily with the recording functions described on page 39. If you press the [METRONOME] button so that its indicator lights when using Auto Accompaniment, the metronome will sound at the currently set tempo when the synchro-start mode is engaged, and while the accompaniment is playing. METRONOME 28 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Accompaniment Control The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 provide a range of accompaniment “sections” — introduction, fill-ins, break, variations on the main pattern, ending — that you can select to control the “flow” of the accompaniment to achieve the desired musical results. Accompaniment start/stop and sections are controlled by the ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL buttons. ● Straight Start ........................................................................................................................................... The [START/STOP] button starts the selected accompaniment style immediately. Press the [AUTO ACCOMP] button so that its indicator lights before starting the accompaniment. The accompaniment will start with the rhythm sound only when the [START/STOP] button is pressed, then the bass and chord parts will begin playing as soon as the first note or chord is played on the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. STYLE SELECT AUTO ACCOMP NOTES START/STOP 4/4 time 1st beat 2nd beat 3rd beat 4th beat BEAT 3/4 time 1st beat 2nd beat 3rd beat BEAT • A different accompaniment style can be selected at any time while the accompaniment is playing. The style number and name on the LCD display panel will change as soon as the selection is made, but the new style will begin playback from the top of the next measure. The only exception is if you change styles while an intro is playing (see page 30), in which case the new style begin playing after the intro has finished. The tempo will not change when the new style begins playing. The Beat Indicator The four BEAT indicator LEDs located above the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT control section flash to indicate the tempo and beat as the accompaniment plays. The LEDs flash individually in sequence on each beat of the measure. In 4/4, 3/4, and 6/8 time, for example, the beat indicator LEDs will flash as shown to the left. NOTES 6/8 time 1st beat 2nd beat 3rd beat 4th beat 5th beat 6th beat • Each accompaniment style has a preset “normal” tempo which is automatically selected whenever the style is selected while the accompaniment is stopped. The current tempo is maintained if you select a different style during accompaniment playback (except when the One Touch Setting function is used — page 36). You can change the tempo as required by using the TEMPO function described on page 28. BEAT ● Synchro Start .......................................................................................................................................... SYNC-START/STOP Press the [SYNC-START/STOP] button if you want the accompaniment to start when you play the first note or chord on the keyboard. In this case the accompaniment is started by playing in the left-hand section of the keyboard. NOTES • If the AUTO ACCOMP mode is OFF, playing anywhere on the keyboard causes the rhythm-only accompaniment to start. If you press the [SYNC-START/STOP] button, the BEAT indicator LEDs will flash at the current tempo. The synchro start mode can be disengaged by pressing the [SYNC-START/STOP] button again so that its indicator goes out. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 29 Auto Accompaniment ● Starting the Accompaniment with an Introduction ............................................................................. Any of the accompaniment styles can be started with an appropriate introduction by pressing the [INTRO] button and then the [START/STOP] button. If you press the [SYNC-START/STOP] button and then the [INTRO] button, the accompaniment will start from the introduction as soon as a chord is detected in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. INTRO VARIATION INTRO A B Once the [INTRO] button is pressed, the [INTRO] indicator will be lit continuously and the VARIATION [A] or [B] indicator will flash to indicate which section will play when the introduction has finished. You can change the “destination” section by pressing the VARIATION [A] or [B] button while its indicator is flashing. When the introduction ends, the [INTRO] indicator will go out and the [A] or [B] indicator will light continuously. The introductions for the VARIATION [A] and [B] sections are different. The A intro has no chord progression while the B intro has its own chord progression. The actual format of the intro, however, depends on the selected style. Although it is generally not advisable to change chords manually while the B intro is playing, the A intro has no progression of its own so you can play your own chords as required. NOTES • It is possible to start the accompaniment from any section — even the ending — by pressing the corresponding button prior to pressing the [START/STOP] button. The destination MAIN [A] or [B] section can be selected as described above. • The [INTRO] button can be used to select the introduction pattern even while the accompaniment is playing. ● The Main [A] and [B] Sections ............................................................................................................... VARIATION A B Each accompaniment style has two main sections — [A] and [B]. These are variations of the same musical style. If the VARIATION [A] or [B] button is pressed while the accompaniment is playing, the corresponding section will begin from the top of the next measure. You can also select [A] or [B] before starting the accompaniment. NOTES • The Main [A] section is automatically selected whenever the power switch is turned on (the VARIATION [A] indicator will be lit). ● Adding Fill-ins & Breaks ........................................................................................................................ FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 BREAK 30 The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 provide two types of fill-ins that can be used as musical transitions between sections of a song or simply to add variety where required. Press the [FILL IN 1] button at any time while the accompaniment is playing to add a one-measure fill-in and or return to the current MAIN section, or press the [FILL IN 2] button to add a one-measure fill-in and go to the other MAIN section. Although there are two FILL IN buttons there are actually four fill-ins per style: FILL IN 1 for the MAIN [A] section, FILL IN 1 for the MAIN [B] section, FILL IN 2 for the transition MAIN [A] to [B], and FILL IN 2 for the transition MAIN [B] to [A]. While the fill-ins are one measure long, the BREAK is two measures. The first measure is similar to a fill-in while the second measure is an actual rhythmic break — a thinner arrangement with drums and percussion predominating. Like the fill-ins, there are actually two BREAK patterns — one for the MAIN [A] section and one for the MAIN [B] section. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 If the MAIN A section is playing, for example, the [A] indicator will flash while FILL IN 1 or the BREAK plays, and the [B] indicator will flash while FILL IN 2 plays. You can change the section that will begin playing after the selected fill-in or break by pressing the desired section button while the indicator is still flashing. VARIATION BREAK A B NOTES • If you hold the [FILL IN 1], [FILL IN 2] or [BREAK] button, the fill-in or second measure of the break pattern will repeat until the button is released, then the MAIN A or B section will play from the beginning of the next measure. • If the [FILL IN 1], [FILL IN 2] or [BREAK] button is pressed after the last beat of a measure, the fill-in or break will begin from the first beat of the next measure. If pressed at any other time the fill-in or break will begin immediately. • It is also possible to start the accompaniment with a fill-in or break by pressing the desired fill-in or break button prior to pressing the [START/STOP] button. The destination MAIN [A] or [B] section can be selected in the normal way. ● Stopping the Accompaniment ............................................................................................................... SYNC-START/STOP START/STOP ENDING An accompaniment in progress can be stopped immediately by pressing the [START/STOP] button or the [SYNC-START/STOP] button. In the latter case the synchro start mode will be engaged when the accompaniment stops. The accompaniment can also be stopped with an appropriate ending by pressing the [ENDING] button. The endings for the MAIN [A] and [B] sections are different. The A ending has no chord progression while the B ending has its own chord progression. The actual format of the ending, however, depends on the selected style. NOTES • The ending will begin from the first beat of the next measure. • If the [FILL IN 1], [FILL IN 2], or [BREAK] button is pressed while the ending pattern is playing, a fill-in or break will be played, followed by a return to the MAIN A or B pattern. Accompaniment Structure Diagram FILL 1 A BREAK A MAIN A INTRO A FILL 2 A ENDING A FILL 2 B MAIN B INTRO B FILL 1 B ENDING B BREAK B ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 31 Auto Accompaniment ● Fade In & Fade Out ................................................................................................................................. The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth accompaniment and melody fade-ins or fadeouts. FADE IN / OUT FADE IN/OUT FADE IN/OUT Fade-out to stop the accompaniment during Playback Press the [FADE-IN/OUT] button during accompaniment playback to fade out the accompaniment and melody sound. The [FADE-IN/OUT] button indicator will flash during the fade-out, and will go out when the fade-out is complete. FADE IN/OUT FADE IN/OUT Start Playback with a Fade-in You can start the accompaniment with a fade-in by pressing the [FADE-IN/OUT] button before starting playback. The [FADE-IN/ OUT] button indicator will light continuously until the accompaniment is started. The fade-in will begin automatically as soon as the accompaniment is started. The [FADE-IN/OUT] button indicator will flash during the fade-in, and will go out when the fade-in is complete. ■ Accompaniment Volume While the VOICE control section [VOL] button can be used to set the volume levels of the orchestration parts, the [ACCOMP VOLUME] button can be used to adjust the volume of the selected accompaniment in relation to the voices. ZPress the [ACCOMP VOLUME] Button ................................................................................................. Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT control section [ACCOMP VOLUME] button. The current accompaniment volume value will appear on the LCD display panel. ACCOMP VOLUME PSR-1700 Accomp.Volume=2 –1 PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno C Accomp.Volume=2 –1 XSet the Volume ....................................................................................................................................... – + RESET 32 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [ACCOMP VOLUME] button itself to set the desired volume. The volume range is from 00 (no sound) to 24 (maximum volume). The default volume value (21) can be recalled instantly by pressing both the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ The Track Buttons RHYTHM 1 2 BASS RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 PAD CHORD PHRASE 1 2 TRACK The Auto Accompaniment system includes eight TRACK buttons which allow you to control the accompaniment arrangement in real time. You can turn tracks on or off while playing for extra accompaniment variety. The various tracks are turned on or off by pressing the corresponding TRACK button. When a part is turned off the corresponding indicator will go out. To silence the bass part, for example, press the TRACK [BASS] button so that its indicator goes out. Press the button again to turn that part back on. NOTES • The indicators for all tracks that contain data in any section will light whenever an accompaniment style is selected. (Depending on the selected accompaniment style, some tracks may not contain any data.) ● What’s In the Tracks............................................................................................................................... Here’s how the tracks are normally used: RHYTHM 1: This is the main rhythm track, and usually plays a drum kit. RHYTHM 2: Additional rhythm. Turning the RHYTHM 2 track ON will usually increase the “energy” of the rhythm. In many styles this track plays percussion instruments such as congas, bongos, etc. This means you can turn off the RHYTHM 1 track and use only RHYTHM 2 for a “light” rhythm sound. BASS: RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 & 2: PAD CHORD: PHRASE 1 & 2: The BASS track always plays a bass line, but the voice will change to fit the selected style … acoustic bass, synth bass, tuba, etc. Both these tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accompaniment required by each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal instruments here. This track plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir. This is where the musical embellishments reside. The PHRASE tracks are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting. Try different combinations of tracks with each style. Some styles will sound best with the full arrangement (all tracks ON), while others might suit your needs better if a smaller arrangement is used. To “thin out” an arrangement, the PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 tracks are the first ones you’ll want to turn OFF. Another way to use the tracks is to gradually build up the arrangement during the course of a song. Start with a small arrangement — e.g. RHYTHM 1, BASS, and RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 — then add tracks one by one as you want to thicken the musical texture. Some styles will actually sound quite different depending on the combination of tracks you choose. Try, for example, just RHYTHM 1, BASS, and PAD CHORD. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 33 Auto Accompaniment ■ Re-voicing the Tracks To make the TRACK buttons even more versatile, the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 feature a REVOICE function that lets you individually change the voices and several related VOICE section parameters assigned to each track. The parameters that can be changed using the REVOICE function are as follows: • Voice Number (Percussion Kit, Sampled Voice Number (PSR-2700)) • Volume • Pan • DSP Depth • Octave ZSelect a Track to Re-voice ..................................................................................................................... RHYTHM 1 2 RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 BASS REVOICE TRACK Press the TRACK button corresponding to the track you want to re-voice while holding the [REVOICE] button. Both the selected TRACK and [REVOICE] button indicators will flash. At the same time, the number of the voice currently assigned to the selected track will appear on the LCD display panel. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 VCE=03 – 4:FngrBass NOTES 08:Showtune 034:FngrBass C VCE=03 – 4:FngrBass • At this point you can play the selected track’s voice on the keyboard. • Keyboard percussion is automatically turned on if the RHYTHM 1 or 2 track is selected. XMake the Required Voice Settings ........................................................................................................ – + 0 1 2 RESET VOICE SELECT VOL OCTAVE DSP DEPTH PAN Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE SELECT] button itself to select a new voice for the selected track. You can also use the [VOL], [OCTAVE], [DSP DEPTH], and [PAN] buttons to change the corresponding parameters for the selected voice. NOTES • You can use the REVOICE function either while the accompaniment is playing or stopped. • You cannot edit the orchestration parts while the REVOICE indicator is flashing. • You can play the keyboard and hear the re-voiced voice except for octave changes. SAMPLED KEYBOARD PERCUSSION VOICE (PSR-2700) CRepeat For All Tracks To Be Re-voiced ............................................................................................... Repeat steps Z and X to re-voice all the tracks you want to change. 34 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| VConfirm the Re-voiced Data .................................................................................................................. RHYTHM 1 2 BASS REVOICE RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 Press the [REVOICE] button when you’ve finished re-voicing the desired tracks to confirm the re-voiced data. The [REVOICE] button and selected track indicators will light. TRACK BPlay the Re-voiced Accompaniment .................................................................................................... Play and use the re-voiced accompaniment as required. NTurn REVOICE OFF to Restore the Original Voices ............................................................................ RHYTHM 1 2 REVOICE BASS RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 Press the [REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to disengage the REVOICE function when done. The re-voiced settings will be cancelled and the original voices for the selected accompaniment style will be restored. TRACK NOTES • ALL REVOICE settings are reset to their default values if you changes styles while the REVOICE function is OFF. If you want to keep a re-voiced setup so that it can be easily recalled later, store it in the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 REGISTRATION MEMORY, described on page 37. • As long as you don’t change styles while the REVOICE function is OFF, the re-voiced settings are maintained and can be recalled at any time simply by turning the REVOICE function ON. • If you change styles while the REVOICE function is engaged, the revoiced settings will be maintained. • In some cases it may not be possible to re-voice a Custom Accompaniment during accompaniment playback. If this problem occurs, try revoicing the style while the accompaniment is stopped. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 35 One Touch Setting Each accompaniment style has a suitable preset voice and other settings that can be instantly recalled by pressing the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button in the VOICE control section. This makes it simple to recall the optimum settings for each style in one quick operation. To use the One Touch Setting function: select a style, press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button so that its indicator lights, then play. As long as the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] indicator is lit the ideal voice and other settings (see list below) will be automatically recalled whenever you select a new style. The One Touch Settings can be turned off by pressing the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button so that its indicator goes out. If you don’t want to use the One Touch Settings as they are, they can be edited and stored in a Registration Memory for easy recall at any time (see page 37 for details on the Registration memory). ONE TOUCH SETTING The One Touch Setting function recalls the following settings: ONE TOUCH SETTING • The preset voice settings for the currently selected style — including orchestration, voice assignments, volume, octave, DSP depth, pan, harmony, and effect settings. • ACCOMP VOLUME level (21). • AUTO ACCOMP is turned ON. • The default tempo for the currently selected style. • The track ON/OFF status for the currently selected style. • [REVOICE] is turned OFF. • KEYBOARD PERCUSSION is turned OFF. • Auto Accompaniment split point (55). • Orchestration split point (69). NOTES • If you press [ONE TOUCH SETTING] while rhythm-only accompaniment is playing, AUTO ACCOMP will be turned ON. • The synchro start mode will be engaged if the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button is turned on while the accompaniment is stopped. • The [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button cannot be turned on when style number “00” is selected. 36 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Registration Memory The REGISTRATION MEMORY can be used to store eight complete sets of VOICE and AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT settings that can be recalled anytime at the touch of a button. The REGISTRATION MEMORY stores the following parameters: VOICE AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT 6. DSP Depth (all four orchestration parts and percussion). 7. Octave (all four orchestration parts and percussion). 8. Harmony ON/OFF & Harmony type. 9. Effect ON/OFF & Effect type. 10. Orchestration & Edit ON/OFF. 11. Split point. 12. Touch sense & Touch response. 13. Pitch bend range. 14. Modulation depth. 15. Local ON/OFF status (L & R) 16. MIDI OUT ON/OFF (L & R) 17. Pedal assign 1 & 2. 1. Voice numbers for all four orchestration parts. 2. Keyboard percussion ON/OFF & percussion kit number. 3. PSR-2700 Sampled voice ON/OFF (all four orchestration parts). Sampled voice number in DIGITAL SAMPLING section. Sampled voice volume in DIGITAL SAMPLING section. Sampled voice DSP depth in DIGITAL SAMPLING section. Sampled voice pan in DIGITAL SAMPLING section. 4. Volume (all four orchestration parts and percussion). 5. Pan (all four orchestration parts and percussion). 1 2 3 4 5 6 MEMORIZE 7 8 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Style number. Accompaniment volume. Track button settings. Tempo. REVOICE ON/OFF and settings. Split point. Transpose. Accomp. ON/OFF. Fingering mode. VOICE ACCOMP REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE ● Memorizing the Settings ........................................................................................................................ 1 MEMORIZE 2 3 4 The panel settings listed above can be stored to any one of the eight REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons by pressing the button — [1] through [8] — while holding the [MEMORIZE] button. The indicator of the selected button will light continuously indicating that the data has been stored. NOTES • Please note that anytime you store to a REGISTRATION MEMORY button, all settings previously stored in that button will be erased and replaced by the new settings. • The indicator of the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY will flash as soon as any change is made to the panel settings. In other words, if the REGISTRATION MEMORY indicator is flashing, the current panel settings are different from those stored in the memory. • The Registration Memory data is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 37 Registration Memory ● Recalling the Settings ............................................................................................................................ 1 2 3 The settings stored to a REGISTRATION MEMORY button can be recalled at any time simply by pressing the appropriate button. The indicator of the selected button will light continuously when initially recalled, but will flash as soon as any change is made to the panel settings. A flashing REGISTRATION MEMORY indicator therefore indicates that the current panel settings do not correspond to those stored in the REGISTRATION MEMORY. 4 MEMORIZE NOTES • REGISTRATION MEMORY number 1 is always initially selected when the power is turned on. ● The FREEZE Function ............................................................................................................................ 5 6 7 8 VOICE ACCOMP FREEZE The [FREEZE] button can be used to “freeze” the VOICE or AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT settings so that they are not recalled when a REGISTRATION MEMORY button is pressed. If you press the [FREEZE] button so that only the VOICE indicator is lit, for example, then only the stored AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT settings will be recalled when a REGISTRATION MEMORY button is pressed. To use the [FREEZE] button, simply press it as many times as necessary to cause the appropriate indicators to light. When an indicator is lit, then the corresponding group of settings is “frozen”. NOTES 38 • The FREEZE on/off status is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Record Functions The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 RECORDING section controls three recording functions: ● The SONG MEMORY: Record complete songs including an accompaniment track and up to six melody tracks. Songs can be saved to and loaded from floppy disk as required (page 56). ● MULTI PADS: Record short chord, melody, or rhythm sequences that can be played back anytime by simply pressing a button. The MULTI PAD data can be saved to and loaded from floppy disk as required. ● CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT: Create your own accompaniment style for use with the Auto Accompaniment feature. Custom accompaniments can be saved to and loaded from floppy disk as required. Operation of all three functions is essentially the same, so once you’re familiar with the basic procedure, recording songs, multi-pad phrases, or custom accompaniments should be easy. We’ll start with the SONG MEMORY. CAUTION • Turning the power OFF during recording or while the recordready mode is engaged can result in a loss of recorded data. Song Memory The SONG MEMORY allows you to record and play back complete songs including chord sequences created using the Auto Accompaniment feature and melody lines you play on the keyboard. The SONG MEMORY has one ACCOMP track and six MELODY tracks. You also have a choice of realtime and step recording modes: the realtime mode records what you play as you play it; the step mode lets you record one step at a time. Only one song can be retained in the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 memory at a time, but your songs can be saved to floppy disk — at most 99 songs per disk (the actual number depends on the volume of the song data) — and then reloaded later whenever you want to play them (page 56). NOTES • Material recorded using the SONG MEMORY is retained in memory even when the POWER switch is turned OFF if backup batteries are present or the AC plug is connected. SONG MEMORY RECORDING MEASURE # ACCOMP 1 2 MELODY 3 4 TRACK RESET 5 CUSTOM ACCOMP SONG MEMORY MULTI PADS GATE TIME REC REWRITE CLEAR SETTING STEP REC STEP SIZE 6 QUANTIZE PLAY/STOP STEP BWD STEP FWD SONG ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 39 Record Functions ■ Realtime Accompaniment Track Recording The SONG MEMORY ACCOMP track records the following operations and data: • Chord changes. • Intro, Main, Fill in, Break, & Ending sections. • Accompaniment volume. • Fade-in/out. • Auto accompaniment TRACK button operations. • Tempo. • Style number. • Revoice. ZSelect a Style .......................................................................................................................................... Select an accompaniment style that is appropriate for the type of music you want to record. Also select the fingering mode you want to use, if necessary. STYLE FINGESELECT RING MODE ................ 1 CHORD 1 2 CHORD 2 3 SINGLE 4 MULTI 5 FULL AUTO ACCOMP XEngage the Accompaniment Track Record Ready Mode ................................................................... ACCOMP 1 Press the SONG MEMORY section [ACCOMP] track button while holding the RECORDING section [REC] button. This engages the record ready mode for the accompaniment track. If [AUTO ACCOMP] is not already turned on, it will be automatically engaged. The [REC], [ACCOMP], and [SYNC-START/STOP] button indicators will flash, and the BEAT indicator dots will flash at the currently selected tempo. If the OVERALL CONTROL section [METRONOME] button indicator is lit, the metronome will sound at the currently selected tempo. The current measure (“Mes”) and beat (“BT”) — in this case “Mes=001:BT=1” — will be shown on the LCD display panel. MELO 3 2 TRACK REC BEAT PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Mes=0 – 01:BT=1 NOTES ACCOMP 1 MELODY 3 4 2 6 5 TRACK ACCOMP 1 2 MELOD 3 TRACK REC 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno Mes=0 – 01:BT=1 • Accompaniment track recording is carried out using the currently selected Auto Accompaniment fingering mode (page 25). • Previously-recorded SONG MEMORY tracks that are turned ON (their indicators are lit) can be monitored while recording. If you don’t want to hear any of the previous tracks while recording, simply press the corresponding SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons so their indicators go out. • It is also possible to record one MELODY track at the same time as you record the ACCOMP track. Hold the [REC] button and press the MELODY track button on which you want to record after engaging the ACCOMP track record ready mode. Refer to “Realtime Melody Track Recording” on page 42. • The ACCOMP track record-ready mode can be disengaged by pressing the [ACCOMP] track button. ACCOMP track record ready cannot be disengaged by pressing the [SYNC-START/STOP] button. 40 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| CRecord ..................................................................................................................................................... SYNC-START/STOP START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Recording will begin as soon as you play a chord on the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. If you’ve selected a MELODY track to record with the ACCOMP track, a right-hand note will also start the recording process. The [REC] indicator lights continuously once recording has started, and the current measure and beat will appear on the LCD display panel. Recording can also be started by pressing the ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL [START/STOP] button. In this case only the rhythm will begin without bass and chord accompaniment until you play the first chord on the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. Play the required chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. If you’ve also selected a MELODY track to be recorded, play the melody on the right-hand section of the keyboard. NOTES • Whenever you record using the SONG MEMORY, any previously recorded material in the same track will be erased and replaced by the new material. • You can also start recording from any specified measure number — see page 44. • If the SONG MEMORY becomes full while recording, “Memory Full” will appear on the LCD display panel and recording will stop. Up to approximately 4,800 notes can be recorded in all MELODY tracks. Up to approximately 4,800 chords can be recorded. These figures only apply, however, if only chords or notes are recorded. The total is reduced when notes and chords are recorded together. • If you start recording by pressing the [PLAY/STOP] button, nothing will be recorded until you begin playing on the keyboard. • If you use a function button during recording the corresponding value will appear on the LCD display panel while the button is held. The measure number display will resume a few seconds after the button is released. • The SONG MEMORY ACCOMP track can also be recorded using the Step Record mode (page 50). VStop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... ACCOMP 1 2 MELODY 3 4 5 TRACK FADE IN/OUT ENDING 6 Stop recording by pressing the [ACCOMP] track button. Recording can also be stopped by pressing the [ENDING] button, [FADE IN/OUT] button, or the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button. The [REC] indicator will go out and “Now Processing” will appear on the LCD display panel while the PSR-1700/2700 is processing recorded data. “Completed” will appear briefly when the data has been processed. NOTES RESET STEP BWD • When recording is stopped the Song Memory automatically returns to the measure at which recording was started. PLAY/STOP STEP FWD ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 41 Record Functions ■ Realtime Melody Track Recording The SONG MEMORY MELODY tracks record the following operations and data: • Key on/off (i.e. notes played on the keyboard). • Key velocity. • Voice number (Percussion Kit, Sampled Voice Number (PSR-2700)). • Volume. • Pan. • DSP depth. • Harmony on/off & harmony type. • Effect on/off & effect type. • Sustain (footswitch) on/off. • Pitch bend. • Octave. • Modulation. • Expression (foot controller). * SAMPLE PAD (PSR-2700) and MULTI PAD data cannot be recorded to SONG MEMORY. ZSelect a Voice and Set the Voice Parameters ...................................................................................... Select the voice you want to record with (the R1 and R2 voices can be used), and set the voice effects and other parameters as required. XSelect a Track and Engage the Record Ready Mode .......................................................................... ACCOMP 1 Press one of the MELODY track buttons — [1] through [6] — while holding the RECORDING section [REC] button. Both the [REC] button indicator and the selected MELODY track indicator will flash, indicating that the SONG MEMORY is ready to record. If the OVERALL CONTROL section [METRONOME] button indicator is lit the metronome will also begin to sound at the currently selected tempo, while the BEAT indicator dots flash at the current tempo. The current measure (“Mes”) and beat (“BT”) — in this case “Mes=001:BT=1” — will be shown on the LCD display panel. MELODY 3 4 2 REC TRACK BEAT NOTES • Previously-recorded SONG MEMORY tracks that are turned ON (their indicators are lit) can be monitored while recording. If you don’t want to hear any of the previous tracks while recording, simply press the corresponding SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons so their indicators go out. • Only one melody track can be recorded at a time. • If the MELODY track record ready mode is engaged, Auto Accompaniment is automatically turned off. CRecord ..................................................................................................................................................... Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode, and the current measure and beat number will appear on the LCD display panel. Play the melody using the entire keyboard if you are recording only a MELODY track, or on the right-hand section of the keyboard if you are recording a MELODY track at the same time as the ACCOMP track. NOTES • The SONG MEMORY MELODY tracks can also be recorded using the Step Record mode — see page 50. VStop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... ACCOMP 1 2 MELODY 3 4 5 TRACK RESET STEP BWD 42 PLAY / STOP 6 Stop recording by pressing the TRACK button of the melody track being recorded, or the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button. The [REC] indicator will go out and “Now Processing” will appear on the LCD display panel while the PSR-1700/2700 is processing recorded data. “Completed” will appear briefly when the data has been processed. The measure number will automatically return to the measure at which recording was started. STEP FWD ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| BSave Your Completed Song to Floppy Disk ........................................................................................ When you’ve finished recording your song — or have recorded as much as you want to in the current session — save your song to floppy disk as described on page 58. Making this step a habit will prevent accidental loss of data. NOTES • The song data is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. It is nevertheless a good idea to save important song data to floppy disk so you have a backup in case of accidental erasure. ■ Accompaniment And Melody Playback ZLoad a Song If Necessary ...................................................................................................................... If necessary, load the song you want to play back from floppy disk (refer to page 60). This step can be ignored if the song you want to play is already in the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 memory. XSelect the Tracks to Play Back ............................................................................................................. ACCOMP 1 2 MELODY 3 4 5 6 Any number of MELODY tracks and/or the ACCOMP track can be played back at the same time. Press the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons corresponding to the tracks you want to play back — the indicators of the selected tracks will light. TRACK NOTES • All SONG MEMORY tracks that contain recorded data are automatically turned ON when the power switch is turned on or a song is loaded from floppy disk. • Measure number 1 is automatically selected whenever the power switch is turned on or a song is loaded from floppy disk. CStart Playback ......................................................................................................................................... RESET PLAY/ STOP STEP BWD STEP FWD Playback will begin as soon as the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button is pressed. You can turn the ACCOMP and MELODY tracks on and off during playback by pressing the appropriate TRACK buttons. During playback the current measure and beat will appear on the LCD display panel. NOTES • Use the [RESET] button to return to the first measure of the song at any time (see page 44). • You can also start playback from any specified measure by using the [MEASURE #] button (see page 44). VPlay Along If You Like ............................................................................................................................ Play along on the keyboard if you like. You can also change the tempo during playback. NOTES • The maximum polyphony is 28. If more than 28 notes are played at the same time, some notes may be truncated. If you are using a sampled voice an additional 26 notes are available for the sampled voice only. BStop Playback ......................................................................................................................................... RESET STEP BWD PLAY/ STOP STEP FWD Accompaniment and melody playback will stop automatically when all recorded data has been played back. You can also stop playback at any time by pressing the SONG [PLAY/STOP] button. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 43 Record Functions ■ The [RESET] Button RESET PLAY/STOP STEP BWD STEP FWD Press the SONG [RESET] button to go directly to the first measure of the song and turn ON all tracks that contain data. Measure number “001” will appear on the LCD display panel. The [RESET] button also functions during playback or realtime recording. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Mes=0 – 01:BT=1 Mes=0 – 01:BT=1 ■ Record Or Play from a Specified Measure You can start SONG MEMORY recording or playback from any specified measure, as long as the specified measure is within the range of measures that has already been recorded: ZPress the [MEASURE #] Button If Necessary ...................................................................................... If the measure number is not currently shown on the LCD display panel, press the [MEASURE #] button. If the measure number is already showing, go directly to step X. MEASURE # XEnter the Desired Measure Number ..................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [MEASURE #] button itself to enter the desired measure number. RESET CStart Playback or Recording ................................................................................................................. Start playback or recording. You can now start playback or recording from the specified measure number. NOTES • This function allows you to “punch-in” and “punch-out” at any measure to re-record a section of a previously-recorded track. Example: Before Punch In/Out VOICE VOICE A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 Start Recording ▲ (Punch In) After Punch In/Out VOICE A C 2 3 Old Data (Same as Before) NOTES 44 8 9 ▲ Stop Recording (Punch Out) VOICE 1 7 4 VOICE B 5 New Data 6 7 8 9 Old Data (Same as Before) • Voice, volume, pan, pitch bend, modulation, tempo, harmony on/off, effect on/off, dual on/off, DSP depth and revoice data changes made during the punch-in remain in effect even after the punchout point until further parameter changes are encountered in the old data. • Recording is carried out in 1-measure units. If you punch out in the middle of a measure, rests will be recorded for the remainder of that measure. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| The Multi Pads The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 MULTI PADS can be used to record short rhythmic or melodic sequences, percussion fill-ins, or single percussion sounds that can be played at any time simply by pressing the appropriate pad. Pads [1] and [2] play back exactly as recorded, while pads [3] and [4] are “CHORD MATCH” types which are automatically transposed to match chords played using the Auto-accompaniment feature. Only one set of MULTI PAD data can be retained in the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 memory at a time, but any number of MULTI PAD sets can be saved to floppy disks and then reloaded later when needed (page 56). The MULTI PADs record the following operations and data: • Key on/off (i.e. notes played on the keyboard). • Key velocity. • Voice number (Percussion Kit, Sampled Voice Number (PSR-2700)). • Volume. • Pan. • DSP depth. • Octave. • Harmony on/off & harmony type. • Effect on/off & effect type. • Sustain on/off (footswitch). • Pitch bend. • Modulation. • Expression (foot controller). NOTES • Before recording, the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 memory contains a preset set of MULTI PAD data that will be erased when new MULTI PAD data is recorded. The original preset data can be restored by using the “System Reset” function described on page 82. RECORDING 1 RESET PLAY / STOP STEP BWD CUSTOM ACCOMP SONG MEMORY MULTI PADS GATE TIME REC REWRITE CLEAR SETTING STEP REC 2 STEP SIZE QUANTIZE 3 4 STOP STEP FWD SONG MULTI PADS CHORD MATCH ■ Realtime Recording ZSelect a Voice to Record and an Appropriate Tempo ......................................................................... Select the voice you want to record on the MULTI PADS. Only the [R1] and [R2] voices can be used. You might also want to set a tempo that will be easy to record at. XEngage the MULTI PAD Record Ready Mode ...................................................................................... REC 1 2 3 4 CHORD MATCH Press one of the MULTI PAD buttons — [1] through [4] — while holding the [REC] button. The [REC] button indicator and the selected MULTI PAD indictor will flash to indicate that the record ready mode is engaged, and the metronome will begin to sound at the currently selected tempo if the OVERALL CONTROL section [METRONOME] button indicator is lit. NOTES • Only the R1 and R2 orchestration parts can be recorded to the MULTI PADS. • If the MULTI PAD record ready mode is engaged, Auto Accompaniment is automatically turned off. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 45 Record Functions CRecord ..................................................................................................................................................... Play a short sequence. The MULTI PADS can record up to approximately 550 quarter notes. The [REC] button indicator will light during recording, and the BEAT indicator will indicate the current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. RESET PLAY/STOP STEP BWD NOTES STEP FWD • Whenever you record to a MULTI PAD, all previous data in the same pad will be completely erased and replaced by the new material. • Recording can also be started by pressing the [PLAY/STOP] button. • The MULTI PADS can also be recorded using the Step Record mode — see page 50. • When recording the CHORD MATCH pads — [3] and [4] — base all melodic and chordal phrases on a CM7 chord so that the sound will be properly transposed when used with the Auto Accompaniment feature (see “Playback” below). VStop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... 1 2 3 4 STOP CHORD MATCH RESET PLAY/STOP STEP BWD Press the MULTI PAD button being recorded, the MULTI PADS [STOP] button or the [PLAY/STOP] button to stop recording. Recording will also stop automatically and “Memory Full” will appear on the LCD display panel when the pad memory becomes full. STEP FWD BSave Your MULTI PAD Data to Floppy Disk ......................................................................................... When you’ve finished recording your MULTI PAD data save it to floppy disk as described on page 58. Making this step a habit will prevent accidental loss of data. ■ Playback 1 2 3 4 STOP CHORD MATCH Simply tap any of the MULTI PADS at any time to play back the data they contain. MULTI PAD playback begins as soon as the button is pressed. You can even play two, three, or four MULTI PADS at the same time. Also, you can create “retriggered sample” effects by repeatedly pressing a pad before its contents are completely played back. The MULTI PAD voices are independent from the voices you have currently selected for keyboard performance. You could, for example, play piano on the keyboard while a MULTI PAD plays a brass chord stab. MULTI PADS [3] and [4] are “CHORD MATCH” types, and the data they contain will be automatically transposed to match chords played using the Auto Accompaniment feature. MULTI PAD playback can be terminated by pressing the MULTI PADS [STOP] button. NOTES • MULTI PAD playback speed is determined by the current TEMPO setting. • The contents of the MULTI PAD memory are retained in memory even when the power is turned off as long as backup batteries are present or the AC plug is connected. • Percussion data recorded to either of the CHORD MATCH pads will play back in the same way as the normal pads. • To use MULTI PAD data from disk, load the data into the PSR-1700/2700 as described on page 60. 46 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Custom Accompaniment Style number “00” is a “custom accompaniment” that you can record yourself and use with the Auto Accompaniment feature. Only one custom accompaniment can be retained in the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 memory at a time, but any number of custom accompaniments can be saved to floppy disks and then reloaded later when needed (page 56). The CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT records the following operations and data: • Key on/off (i.e. notes played on the keyboard). • Key velocity. • Voice number (Percussion Kit, Sampled Voice Number (PSR-2700)). • Volume. NOTES • Pan. • DSP depth. • Sustain (footswitch) on/off. • Pitch Bend • Modulation • Expression (foot controller) data can not be recorded to a custom accompaniment. • Before recording, style number 00 contains a preset accompaniment that will be erased when a custom accompaniment is recorded. The original preset accompaniment can be restored by using the “System Reset” function described on page 82. RECORDING AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT STYLE FINGE- ACCOMP SELECT RING VOLUME RHYTHM 1 2 BASS RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 PAD CHORD CUSTOM ACCOMP SONG MEMORY MULTI PADS GATE TIME REC REWRITE CLEAR SETTING STEP REC STEP SIZE PHRASE 1 2 MODE ................ 1 CHORD 1 2 CHORD 2 3 SINGLE 4 MULTI 5 FULL AUTO ACCOMP SYNC-START/STOP START/STOP FADE IN / OUT INTRO FILL IN 1 REVOICE FILL IN 2 TRACK BREAK ENDING QUANTIZE VARIATION A B ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL ■ Realtime Custom Accompaniment Recording ZSelect a Style & Section ......................................................................................................................... Select an accompaniment style that will serve as an appropriate foundation for the type of accompaniment you want to record. Also use the ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL buttons to select the particular section you want to record. When selecting a section other than a main section, be sure to also select the main A or main B section, as required. INTRO FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 BREAK ENDING VARIATION A B Example: Selecting FILL IN 2B ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 47 Record Functions XEngage the Custom Accompaniment Record Ready Mode ............................................................... RHYTHM 1 2 RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 BASS REC TRACK YES NO ARE YOU SURE ? Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section TRACK button corresponding to the accompaniment track you want to record while holding the RECORDING section [REC] button. (If the selected track contains no preset data, “IllegalOperation” will appear on the LCD display and the custom accompaniment record ready mode cannot be engaged.) Both the [REC] and track indicators will flash and, if you’ve selected a preset accompaniment style on which to base your custom accompaniment (not number “00”), the ARE YOU SURE? indicator will light and the PSR-1700/PSR2700 will ask “Are you sure?” (see NOTES, below). Press the [YES] button if you want to go ahead with the record procedure, thus erasing the previous contents of the custom accompaniment. This engages the record ready mode for the specified track. If the OVERALL CONTROL section [METRONOME] button indicator is lit, the metronome will sound at the currently selected tempo. Press [NO] to cancel the operation and preserve the contents. NOTES • If you select a style number other than “00” on which to base your custom accompaniment, the selected style is copied to the custom accompaniment being recorded as soon as the record ready mode is engaged and the [YES] button is pressed, thus erasing all previous custom accompaniment data. • When the built-in preset style data is copied to custom style number 00, “@” will be shown at the beginning of the custom style name on the LCD display. • Auto Accompaniment, Auto Harmony, and Effect are turned OFF, the R1 orchestration part is selected, and the [EDIT] button is disabled when the custom accompaniment record ready mode is engaged. • If a track containing rhythm data is specified for recording, Keyboard Percussion is automatically turned on. • When the record-ready mode for the selected track is engaged, other track(s) of the corresponding section having no accompaniment style data will automatically be turned off. • A track that does not contain data in any section (the track indicator is off) cannot be used for custom accompaniment recording. CSelect a Voice & Set the Tempo as Required ...................................................................................... If necessary, select the voice you want to record with, and set a comfortable recording tempo. NOTES • The specified voice parameters can be changed later by using the REWRITE SETTING and REVOICE functions (pages 55 and 34). VRecord ..................................................................................................................................................... SYNC-START/STOP RHYTHM 1 2 BASS START/STOP RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 TRACK 48 FADE IN/OUT Recording will begin as soon as you press the ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL section [START/STOP] button or play a chord or note on the keyboard. The accompaniment will play repeatedly, and you can add new material to the selected track by playing on the keyboard. During recording you can clear a track if you want to record new material from scratch: press the TRACK button corresponding to the track you want to clear while holding the [CLEAR] button. Individual notes, including Keyboard Percussion instruments, can be cleared by pressing the appropriate key while holding the [CLEAR] button. CLEAR ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| • Be sure to record your CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT based on a CM7 chord. The parts will be automatically transposed to match the chord played when the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT is played back. NOTES • The “Are you sure?” confirmation will not occur when you clear recorded data while in the record mode. • Custom accompaniments can also be recorded using the Step Record mode — see page 50. • With some styles there may be a slight delay between the end of the section and beginning of the next cycle when recording. • If the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT becomes full while recording, “Memory Full” will appear on the LCD display panel and recording will stop. BRepeat to Complete the Accompaniment ............................................................................................ Repeat steps X, C, and V, selecting and recording the various tracks as required until your custom accompaniment is complete. You can also switch sections while recording, so you can record an entire custom accompaniment without having to stop recording. • If you change sections while recording and the current track contains no preset data, “IllegalOperation” will appear on the LCD display panel to indicate that recording is not possible. NOTES NStop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... RHYTHM 1 2 BASS RHYTHMIC CHORD 1 2 TRACK START/STOP Stop recording by pressing the TRACK button being recorded or the ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL section [START/STOP] button. The [REC] indicator will go out and “Now Processing” will appear on the LCD display panel while the PSR-1700/2700 is processing recorded data. “Completed” will appear briefly when the data has been processed. The recorded accompaniment data will automatically be stored in the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT (style number “00”). If you stop recording by pressing the [SYNC-START/STOP] button you will be returned to step X, above (the record-ready mode). MSave Your Completed Accompaniment to Floppy Disk ..................................................................... When you’ve finished recording your custom accompaniment — or have recorded as much as you want to in the current session — save your accompaniment to floppy disk as described on page 58. Making this step a habit will prevent accidental loss of data. • The Custom Accompaniment data is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. It is nevertheless a good idea to save important data to floppy disk so you have a backup in case of accidental erasure. NOTES ■ Using a Custom Accompaniment STYLE SELECT To use a custom accompaniment simply select style number “00” and use the Auto Accompaniment feature in the normal way (page 24). PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Styl=0 – 0:@Showtun AUTO ACCOMP NOTES 00:@Showtun 001:GrandPno AccOff Styl=0 – 0:@Showtun • To use style data from disk, load the data into the PSR-1700/2700 as described on page 60. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 49 Record Functions Step Recording In addition to the realtime-recording procedures described above, the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 have a “step recording” mode in which notes can be entered one at a time with precise timing and length. NOTES • Only chord sequences can be step-recorded to the Song Memory ACCOMP track. The REWRITE SETTING function (page 55) can be used after recording to change other parameters as required. • You can specify the measure from which you want to begin song memory step recording as described on page 44. • The Metronome does not function during step recording. • The following parameters cannot be changed during Song Memory ACCOMP track step recording: style number, section, track on/off, revoice on/off, registration memory, fade in/out. ZEngage the Step Record Ready Mode .................................................................................................. GATE TIME STEP SIZE Press the track or pad button corresponding to the track or pad you want to record (see NOTES below) while holding the RECORDING section [STEP REC] button. This engages the record ready mode for the specified track or pad. Both the [STEP REC] and track/pad button indicators will flash. NOTES STEP REC QUANTIZE • When the step record ready mode for the Song Memory ACCOMP track is engaged, the VARIATION A section indicator will light. • To step record a SONG MEMORY track press the appropriate SONG MEMORY track button; to step record a CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT track press the appropriate AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT track button; to step record a MULTI PAD press the appropriate pad. XSpecify the Required Step Size ............................................................................................................. GATE TIME STEP REC STEP SIZE QUANTIZE “Step Size” refers to the length of the note to be entered. To enter an eighth note and advance to the next eighth note, for example, the step size should be set to “1/8”. Press the [STEP SIZE] button and the current step size will appear on the LCD display panel. Then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [STEP SIZE] button itself to select the required step size (1/4… 1/32). The “1/16” step size can be instantly selected by pressing the [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Step=0 – :1/4Note Step=0 – :1/4Note Step Size Settings 1 : 1/4 Note 3 2 : 1/6 Note 3 : 1/8 Note 3 4 : 1/12 Note NOTES 5 : 1/16 Note 3 6 : 1/24 Note 7 : 1/32 Note 50 • The currently selected step size is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| CSpecify the Required Gate Time ........................................................................................................... GATE TIME STEP REC “Gate Time” refers to the actual length of the note to be entered in relation to the note’s step size — i.e. whether the note is staccato, legato, etc. Gate times are specified as percentages of the total note length, as shown in the list below. Press the [GATE TIME] button and the current gate time will appear on the LCD display panel. Then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [GATE TIME] button itself to select the required gate time (0% … 100%). The “80%” gate time can be instantly selected by pressing the [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously. STEP SIZE QUANTIZE PSR-1700 PSR-2700 GateT.=0 – 8:80% 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff GateT.=0 – 8:80% Gate Time Settings 00 : 0% 01 : 10% 02 : 20% 03 : 30% 04 : 40% 05 : 50% NOTES (Most staccato) 06 : 60% 07 : 70% 08 : 80% 09 : 90% 10 : 100% Normal (Most legato) • The current gate time setting is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off, as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. VPlay a Note or Chord .............................................................................................................................. PLAY / STOP STEP FWD Play the note on the keyboard corresponding to the pitch of the note you want to enter, or a chord if you want to enter a chord. You can then press the [STEP FWD (PLAY/STOP)] button while still holding the note or chord as many times as necessary to extend the length of the note or chord by the specified step size. NOTES • When several notes are played simultaneously, all the notes will be recorded at one time as a chord after the last key pressed is released. This is a handy technique for the chord progression recording. • The BEAT indicator LEDs function in the same way as they do in the Auto Accompaniment mode. PSR-1700 Mes=0 –01:BT=1Ççß† PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Mes=0 – 01:BT=1Ççß† RESET PLAY /STOP STEP BWD STEP FWD RESET STEP BWD The LCD display panel During Step Record During step recording the LCD display panel shows the current measure number (“Mes”), the current beat (“BT” — there are, for example, four beats per measure in 4/4 time), and the position of the current note within the current beat (the bar to the right of the “BT” value). Each division on the bar represents a 32nd note. If you are entering 16th notes, for example, the vertical marker on the bar graph will move forward by two divisions when each note is entered. PLAY/STOP STEP FWD To Enter a Rest … Rests can be entered by pressing only the [STEP FWD (PLAY/STOP)] button immediately after specifying the required step size for the rest. Stepping Backward In the STEP RECORD mode the [RESET] button functions as the [STEP BWD] (step backward). You can use this button to step backward through the recording by the currently specified step size while erasing the data. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 51 Record Functions The following chart shows the step size and gate time settings required to enter a variety of notes: Example LCD DISPLAY (Measure) LCD DISPLAY (Beat/Clock) LCD DISPLAY (Step Size) LCD DISPLAY (Gate Time) Mes=0 –01 Mes=0 –01 Mes=0 –01 Mes=0 –01 Mes=0 –01 Mes=0 –02 Mes=0 –03 BT=1ßçç† BT=2Ççß† BT=3ßçç† BT=3Ççß† BT=4ßçç† BT=3ßçç† BT=1ßçç† 1/8Note 1/16Note 1/8Note 80% 80% 80% 1/8Note 1/4Note 1/4Note 1/4Note 80% 80% 40% 80% Note Hold Hold PLAY/STOP PLAY/STOP STEP FWD PLAY/STOP PLAY/STOP STEP FWD Hold STEP FWD STEP FWD Press [PLAY/STOP] Twice Once Twice Three times It’s also possible to specify the step sizes for all notes by specifying the shortest required step size and then using the [STEP FWD] button to enter all other note lengths. NOTES • In the case shown to the left, press and hold , press [STEP FWD] and then , and then release . BRepeat ..................................................................................................................................................... Repeat steps X, C, and V until the required number of notes has been entered. NOTES • Previously-recorded tracks can not be monitored during step recording. NStop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... Stop recording by pressing the track or MULTI PAD button being recorded. The [STEP REC] indicator will go out. NOTES • PSR-1700/2700 allows you to “punch-in” and “punch-out” at any measure to step re-record Song Memory data. Step recording is carried out in 1-measure units, so if you punch out in the middle of measure rests will be recorded for the remainder of that measure. • “Now Processing” may appear on the LCD display panel while the PSR-1700/2700 is processing step-recorded data. “Completed” may appear briefly when the data has been processed. 52 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Editing Functions The following functions make it possible to “edit” recorded data to polish and refine your sound. NOTES • When using any of the editing functions on a custom style, be sure to select style number 00 before engaging the editing function. ■ Quantization It is possible to “quantize” recorded data to straighten out the timing of a track or pad. ZSet the Quantize Step Size .................................................................................................................... GATE TIME Set the required quantize step size in the same way as the step-record step size (see page 50). STEP SIZE PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Step=0 – :1/4Note STEP REC 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Step=0 – :1/4Note QUANTIZE XSelect the Track or Pad to Be Quantized ............................................................................................. GATE TIME STEP REC STEP SIZE Press the track or pad button corresponding to the track or pad you want to quantize while holding the RECORDING section [QUANTIZE] button. Both the [QUANTIZE] and track/pad button indicators will flash. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will light and the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?” QUANTIZE NOTES • You can quantize several Song Memory or Custom Accompaniment tracks at the same time. Press the required track buttons one after another while holding the [QUANTIZE] button. CConfirm or Cancel the Quantize Operation .......................................................................................... YES ARE YOU SURE ? NO Press the [YES] button if you want to go ahead with the quantize operation, thus irreversibly altering the selected track or pad. Press [NO] to cancel the operation and preserve the contents of the track or pad. “Now Quantizing” will appear on the LCD display panel while the data is being quantized. “Completed” will appear briefly when the data has been quantized. NOTES • Preset accompaniment track data cannot be quantized. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 53 Record Functions ■ Clearing Tracks The [CLEAR] button can be used to completely erase the following data: • All data after the current measure in the specified SONG MEMORY track. • All data from the specified CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT track. • All data from the specified MULTI PAD. ZFor a SONG MEMORY Track, Set the Start Measure .......................................................................... Use the [MEASURE #] button to set the first measure to be cleared (page 44). All subsequent measures up to the end of the song will be cleared. MEASURE # XSpecify the Track or Pad to Be Cleared ............................................................................................... Press the appropriate track or pad button while holding the [CLEAR] button. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will light and the PSR-1700/PSR2700 will ask “Are you sure?” CLEAR CAUTION NOTES • Turning the power OFF during the clear-ready mode can result in a loss of recorded data. • You can clear several Song Memory or Custom Accompaniment tracks at the same time. Press the required track buttons one after another while holding the [CLEAR] button. CConfirm or Cancel the Clear Operation ................................................................................................ YES ARE YOU SURE ? NO Press the [YES] button if you want to go ahead with the clear operation, thus erasing the selected track or pad. Press [NO] to cancel the operation and preserve the contents of the track or pad. “Now Clearing” will appear on the LCD display panel while the data is being cleared. “Completed” will appear briefly when the data has been cleared. NOTES 54 • Since the track indicators light when there is data in any accompaniment section, clearing a Custom Accompaniment track will not cause the track indicator to go out if data is present in any other section. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Changing the Recorded Settings The [REWRITE SETTING] button can be used to change the settings of all recordable parameters for any specified track or pad. You could, for example, use this function to change the voice or effect used in a SONG MEMORY track. Rewritable Data All data in the following tracks and pads except note on/off, octave, sustain, pitch bend, modulation, expression, and chord changes: • Song Memory Accompaniment Track • Song Memory Melody Tracks • Custom Accompaniment • Multi Pad ZFor Song Memory Settings Set the Start Measure .............................................................................. Only if you will be rewriting Song Memory settings, use the [MEASURE #] button in conjunction with the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to specify the measure at which you want the settings to be rewritten. The specified measure number will appear on the LCD display panel. MEASURE # XSelect the Track or Pad to be Altered ................................................................................................... Press the track or pad button corresponding to the track or pad you want to alter while holding the RECORDING section [REWRITE SETTING] button (for a Custom Accompaniment, first select the section you want to edit). Both the [REWRITE SETTING] and track/pad button indicators will flash. REWRITE SETTING CChange the Settings as Required ......................................................................................................... ■ SONG MEMORY/ MULTI PADS RESET PLAY / STOP STEP BWD STEP FWD ■ CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT SYNC-START/STOP START/STOP FADE IN / OUT For the Song Memory or Multi Pads use the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback. Make the required setting changes to the recordable parameters at the appropriate point during playback. If you make any changes during rewrite standby — i.e. after engaging the Rewrite Setting function but before starting playback — the specified changes will be at the very beginning of the track/pad data (at the beginning of the specified measure for the Song Memory). For a Custom Accompaniment, use the ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL section [START/STOP] button or play a note on the keyboard to start playback and then make the required setting changes to the recordable parameters. Rewriting data in the middle of a Custom Accompaniment pattern affects the entire track. NOTES • Preset accompaniment track data cannot be rewritten. VStop ......................................................................................................................................................... Press the track or pad button for which the settings have been rewritten. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 55 Using Floppy Disks The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 feature a floppy disk drive that allows virtually unlimited storage of songs you record using the Song Memory, custom accompaniments, Multi Pad data, Registration Memory data, and sampled voices (PSR-2700 only). The disk drive also allows the PSR-1700 and PSR2700 to play standard MIDI music files (file format 0) and Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection disks. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 DISK FILE # FILE NAME EXTENSION ........................................... ALL : ALL DATA SNG : SONG STY : STYLE PAD : MULTI PADS REG : REGISTRATION MID : STANDARD MIDI EVT : DISK ORCHESTRA LOAD DISK SAVE PART MINUS ONE SELECT SAVE DELETE FORMAT START/STOP MINUS ONE FILE NAME EXTENSION .................................. ALL : ALL DATA SNG : SONG STY : STYLE PAD : MULTI PADS REG : REGISTRATION VCE : VOICE VDP : VOICE DUMP MID : STANDARD MIDI EVT : DISK ORCHESTRA FILE # SAVE PART LOAD SAVE DELETE FORMAT START/STOP MINUS ONE QUICK PLAY MINUS ONE SELECT QUICK PLAY ● Floppy Disk Handling Precautions Floppy disks are an inexpensive, convenient, and reliable way to store your music data. They are not indestructable, however, and should be handled with care. Observe the following points to ensure the long-term safety of your disks and data. ● Type of Disk ■ Use only double-sided double density (2DD) 3.5-inch floppy disks with the PSR1700 and PSR-2700. ■ ■ ● Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks ■ ■ ■ Never attempt to eject a disk during a read or write operation (i.e. while the disk drive is operating). Doing so can damage both the disk and the drive. Never turn the power on or off while a disk is in the drive. Always eject the disk before turning the power off. To eject a floppy disk from the disk drive press the eject button slowly as far as it will go. Then when the disk is fully ejected, remove it by hand. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The disk may not be ejected properly if the eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in far enough (the eject button may become stuck halfway with the disk extending from the slot by only a few millimeters). If this is the case, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk. Doing so may damage the disk drive mechanism and/or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again or push 56 ■ ■ the disk back into the slot, then repeat the eject procedure carefully. Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects can damage the disk drive or floppy disk. Never open the disk’s shutter by hand or touch the internal surface of the disk. Dirt, dust, or grease on the disk’s magnetic surface can cause data errors. Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or other device that emits a strong magnetic field. Strong magnetic fields can partially erase the data on the disk. Do not store disks in places exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of heat. The acceptable storage temperature range is approximately 4° to 53°C (39° to 127°F). Do not store disks in areas subject to extreme dryness or humidity. The acceptable relative humidity range is approximately 8 to 90%. Do not store disks in areas contaminated with dust, sand, smoke, etc. Do not place heavy objects such as books on top of a disk. Avoid getting floppy disks wet, particularly with oily or sticky fluids. A disk that has been wet with water should be allowed to dry naturally before use. Disks contaminated by other fluids can cause damage to the disk drive and should be discarded. Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper position. When changing the label never cover the old label with a new label; always remove the old label first. ● Head Cleaning With extended use the read/write head of the disk drive will pick up dust and other particles that will eventually cause data errors. If this occurs, clean the head with a 3.5 inch head cleaning disk available from most computer supply stores. ● Data Backup For maximum data security we strongly recommend that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. These disks should ideally be stored in separate locations. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. ● Protecting Your Data (Write Protect Tab) To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). With the tab in this position data can be read from the disk but nothing can be written to it. Write protect tab on (locked — write protected) Write protect tab off (unlocked — write enabled) ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Formatting a New Floppy Disk The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 use only 3.5" 2DD floppy disks. Before you can use a new disk for saving data, the disk must be “formatted” as described below. ZInsert the Disk To Be Formatted ........................................................................................................... Insert a new blank disk. Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” position (tab closed), and insert the new disk into the disk drive unit with the sliding door facing the drive slot and the label side of the disk facing upward. The disk should click securely into place. When an unformatted disk is properly loaded, “Format?” will appear on the LCD display panel, the ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash and the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?”. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Format? Format? NOTES • If an unformatted disk is already in the drive and the format operation was cancelled prior to execution, press the [FORMAT] button to reengage the format function. DELETE FORMAT • The [FORMAT] button can also be used when you want to re-format a formatted disk - to erase all the data it contains, for example. • “Unformatted Disk” will appear on the display if an unformatted writeprotected disk is loaded. Make sure the disk’s write protect tab is in the write position before formatting. XConfirm and Format ............................................................................................................................... YES ARE YOU SURE ? NO Press the [YES] button to confirm and execute the format operation (or press [NO] to cancel). Formatting an entire disk takes a few seconds, and the progress of the operation is shown on the LCD display panel in percent formatted: “0%” through “100%”. When the disk has been 100% formatted the format function will be automatically disengaged. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Formatting: 75% NOTES 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Formatting: 75% • Be careful not to format a disk that already contains data you want to keep. The format operation erases all data on the floppy disk! • The “Format?” display will also appear if you insert a disk that has been formatted on a piece of equipment other than the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700. CAUTION • Never remove the disk or turn the power off while the “Formatting” display is showing. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 57 Using Floppy Disks ■ Saving, Loading, & Deleting Disk Files ● Saving to Disk A single floppy disk can hold up to 99 separate files (depending on the file size). Each file on a disk has a unique file number (01 through 99) and file name. You can specify both the file number and file name you want to save to. When saving data to disk you must also specify a file type according to the type of data you want to save. The file types are listed below (they’re also listed on the panel in the DISK control section). The “file extension” is a period and three-character suffix attached to the end of each file name to identify the file type. Type File Extension Data Saved All .ALL All data except sampled voices: song, custom accompaniment, multi pad, registration memory. Song .SNG The song data currently in the song memory. Custom Style .STY The current custom style (style no. 00) Multi Pad .PAD All current multi pad data; pads [1] through [4]. Registration Memory .REG All current registration memory settings; [1] through [8]. Single Voice (PSR-2700) .VCE A single specified sampled voice (the currently selected sampled voice in the digital sampling section). Sample Dump (PSR-2700) .VDP All sampled voices currently in the sample memory. NOTES • In the case of a Single Voice (.VCE) the currently selected sampled voice number will be saved with the sampled voice data. The same sampled voice number will then be automatically selected when the voice is loaded (the load destination voice number can be changed as required). ZInsert a Formatted Disk ......................................................................................................................... If an appropriate disk is not already in the drive, insert the disk you want to save the data to. If necessary, format the disk as described in the previous section before proceeding. NOTES • When a formatted disk is inserted the amount of space remaining on the disk is displayed in kilobytes. XSelect a File Type ................................................................................................................................... SAVE PART Press the [SAVE PART] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [SAVE PART] button itself to specify the file type that you want to save. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff PART=A – LL PART=A – LL CSelect a File Number .............................................................................................................................. FILE # Press the [FILE #] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [FILE #] button itself to specify the file number you want to save to. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 F0 – 1:********.*** CAUTION 58 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff F0 – 1:********.*** • If you select a file number that already contains data, the original data will be erased and replaced by the new data! ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| VPress the [SAVE] Button and Confirm ................................................................................................. When the desired file type and number have been specified, press the [SAVE] button. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash, and the PSR-1700/ PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?”. Press [YES] to continue or [NO] to cancel the save operation. “Saving” will appear on the LCD display panel for a few seconds while the data is being saved. “Save Completed” will appear briefly when the data has been saved. SAVE YES NO ARE YOU SURE ? PSR-1700 PSR-2700 ---ALL Saving--NOTES 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff ---ALL Saving--- • An “S” will appear in front of the file number when the save function is selected . ● Enter an Original File Name Prior to Saving M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 automatically creates a file name (for example “PSR_ _ _01”) for the file you are about to save. If you want to enter a more descriptive name for easier file identification (and this is recommended), this can be done via the keyboard immediately before executing step V, above. A file name can consist of up to eight characters. Each key on the keyboard enters a different character, listed immediately below the key. The lowest key (C1) functions as a shift key that shifts between lower- and upper-case characters: hold the SHIFT key while pressing a character key to enter the uppercase character. Each time a character is entered the cursor moves to the next character position (you cannot write over the file extension following the period at then end of the file name). The F5 and F#5 keys move the cursor backward and forward within the file name. Use these keys to place the cursor where you want to enter or change a character. The DELETE key (G5) deletes the character at the cursor position. When you’ve completed the name, start the save operation by pressing the ENTER key (C6) or by pressing the [YES] button as described in step V. Duplicate file names are not accepted. If you enter a file name that already exists on the disk, the “Same Name” error message will appear on the display. CAUTION NOTES • Never remove the disk or turn the power off while the “Saving” display is showing. • If the file number you have selected already contains data, the PSR-1700/ PSR-2700 will ask for confirmation with then “Overwrite OK?” display. If you’re sure you want to write of the existing data press the [YES] button. Press [NO] if you want to cancel. • If the disk becomes full during a save operation “Disk Full” will appear on the display and the save operation will be aborted. In this case the data saved up to that point will be cleared. Sampled voices are an exception, however, since they can be saved individually. If the disk becomes full while saving sampled voices the PSR-2700 will request a new disk in order to save the remaining voices (“Insert Disk No. X” display — “X” being the number of the required disk). • When saving song, custom accompaniment, or multi pad data which uses a sampled voice, be sure to save the sampled voice separately. The sampled voice must then be independently loaded when the song, custom accompaniment, or multi pad data is loaded for use. The sampled voice data will automatically be loaded into the appropriate voice number (do not change the destination voice number when loading). • Save and Load operations can be canceled by pressing and holding the [NO] button. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 59 Using Floppy Disks ● Loading From Disk ZSelect a File ............................................................................................................................................. With the disk containing the file you want to load properly inserted in the disk drive, press the [FILE #] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [FILE #] button itself to specify the file number you want to load. The name of the selected file appears to the right of the file number on the display. PSR-1700 FILE # PSR-2700 F0 – 1:P SRååå01.ALL 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff F0 – 1:P SRååå01.ALL XPress the [LOAD] Button and Confirm ................................................................................................. Press the [LOAD] button. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash and the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?”. Press [YES] to load or [NO] to cancel the load operation. “NowLoading” will appear on the display while the data is being loaded, “Load Completed” will appear briefly when the specified data has been loaded. LOAD YES ARE YOU SURE ? NO PSR-1700 PSR-2700 ---NowLoading--- CAUTION NOTES 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff ---NowLoading--- • Never remove the disk or turn the power off while the “NowLoading” display is showing. If you turn the power off while loading sampled voices from disk, all data in the PSR-2700 Wave Ram will be lost. • Please note that when you load data from disk the loaded data will replace any current data of the same type in the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 memory. • An “L” will appear in front of the file number when the load function is selected. • If you select a file number with data that cannot be loaded or a file number with no corresponding data, the “Can’t Load!” or “File Not Found!” error message will appear (see “Error Messages” on page 81). • If you load style data from disk, it will automatically be loaded into style number “00” and can be selected and used in the same way as the preset styles. ● Loading Data From the Supplied Demonstration Disk File numbers 01 through 04 on the PSR-1700/2700 demonstration disk and file numbers 01 and 02 on the PSR-2700 demonstration disk are demo songs that can be played by using the quick play function. When the PSR-2700 demonstration disk is inserted, the sampled voice data will automatically be loaded into sampled voice number 128. The sampled voice will not be loaded automatically if there is already data in sampled voice number 128, or if the wave RAM is full. If there is already data in voice number 128 “Replace OK?” will appear on the LCD display and the “Are you sure?” prompt will sound. press [YES] to continue with the load operation. If the wave RAM is full “Wave Ram Full” will appear on the LCD display. You will have to delete unnecessary data before continuing with the load operation. 60 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| File numbers 05 through 12 on the demonstration disk are accompaniment styles that load into style number 00 and can be played by selecting that number. A complete set of 8 voice and other settings appropriate for use with the selected style are also loaded and stored in the registration memory. Press the various REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons to try out these settings. File numbers 13 through 20 contain complete sets of MULTI PAD data. For the PSR-2700 file numbers 21 through 24 contain a range of sampled sound effects (sampled voice). Select the destination sampled voice number before loading these (below). CAUTION • If you set the supplied data disk’s write protect tab to the “off” position and execute a save or delete operation, the data on the disk will be lost. Keep the disk’s write protect tab in the “on” position to prevent this. • When the style data from the supplied disk is loaded, any previous data in style number 00 and the contents of registration memories 1 through 8 will be overwritten. NOTES • Demo song data on the supplied disk(s) are in Standard MIDI File format. ● Loading Sampled Voices (PSR-2700) When loading individual sampled voices it is also necessary to select the sampled voice number to which you want the voice from disk to be loaded. First select the sampled voice (single) file, press [LOAD], press [YES], and “Load SVC to xxx” will appear on the LCD display. The first number to appear in the “xxx” position is the voice number saved with the voice. At this point you should select the destination sampled voice number (refer to page 66) and the press [YES] to begin loading the voice. NOTES • When you try to load the sound effect data, file numbers 21 through 24, of the included disk to your PSR-2700, the sampled voice numbers 124 through 127 will automatically be shown on the LCD display. ● Deleting a Disk File ZSelect the File To Be Deleted ................................................................................................................ With the disk containing the file you want to delete properly inserted in the disk drive, press the [FILE #] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [FILE #] button itself to specify the file number you want to delete. The name of the selected file appears to the right of the file number on the display. FILE # PSR-1700 PSR-2700 F0 – 1:P SRååå01.ALL 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff F0 – 1:P SRååå01.ALL XPress the [DELETE] Button and Confirm ............................................................................................. Press the [DELETE] button. The ARE YOU SURE? indicator will flash and the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 will ask “Are you sure?”. Press [YES] to delete the selected file or [NO] to cancel the delete operation. “Delete Completed” will appear briefly when the specified file has been deleted. DELETE FORMAT YES ARE YOU SURE ? NO PSR-1700 PSR-2700 Delete Completed NOTES 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Delete Completed • “File Not Found!” will appear on the display if you attempt to delete a file number that is already empty. • A “D” will appear in front of the file number when the delete function is selected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 61 Using Floppy Disks ■ Quick Play: Disk Orchestra Collection & Standard MIDI File Disks In addition to using files recorded by the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 itself, the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 can play back pre-recorded Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection music disks, Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft, ESEQ files, and Standard MIDI File (file format 0) disks recorded on other equipment. ZInsert the Disk ......................................................................................................................................... Insert the Disk Orchestra Collection, PianoSoft, or Standard MIDI File disk. NOTES • You can select the song from which you want to start playback by using the standard file number selection procedure (page 60). • Touch sense 2 is automatically selected when a Disk Orchestra Collection disk is inserted. XStart Playback ......................................................................................................................................... START/STOP MINUS ONE Press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button to start playback. Playback will begin from the first song on the disk (or the selected song) and all songs on the disk will be automatically played in sequence. QUICK PLAY NOTES • The file extensions for the playable files are as follows: Disk Orchestra Collection: .EVT Standard MIDI File (format 0): .MID and .Xxx (“Xxx” is a number) ESEQ File: .EVT and .Pxx (“xx” is a number) PianoSoft: .(spaces) • During Quick Play the file number and file name will appear on the LCD display, and “Q” will appear in front of the file number. • If you press one of the PSR-1700/2700 function buttons during Quick Play, the value of the corresponding function will be displayed for a few seconds then the Quick Play file number/name display will re-appear. • During Quick Play you can adjust the tempo of playback (page 28). • If you press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button while a disk that does not contain data that can be played by the Quick Play function is inserted, “Can’t Play!” will appear on the display and the Quick Play operation will be aborted. • If a Standard MIDI File or ESEQ File is not based on GM voice allocation, the data will not be played back correctly. CStop Playback ......................................................................................................................................... Press the QUICK PLAY [START/STOP] button to stop playback. NOTES • If you re-start playback after stopping it, playback will begin from the top of the song that was in progress when playback was stopped. ● Minus One Playback This function lets you mute (turn off) various parts of a Quick Play song so you can play them yourself on the keyboard while the others are played automatically. ZSelect the Part to Mute ........................................................................................................................... MINUS ONE SELECT Press the [MINUS ONE SELECT] button — the currently selected part will appear on the LCD display panel. Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [MINUS ONE SELECT] button itself to specify the part you want to mute: 0: L+R mutes the left- and right-hand parts. 1: R mutes the right-hand part. 2: L mutes the left-hand part. NOTES • In the case of Disk Orchestra Collection or PianoSoft disks, the left and righthand parts will be set automatically. With other files the MIDI transmit channels corresponding to “R” and “L” will be selected. XEngage the Minus One Mode ................................................................................................................ START/STOP MINUS ONE QUICK PLAY Press the [MINUS ONE] button so that its indicator lights to actually mute the selected part. The Minus One mode can be engaged either before or during Quick Play playback. Press the [MINUS ONE] button again so that its indicator goes out to exit from the Minus One mode. NOTES 62 • The Metronome function cannot be used during Quick Play. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| PSR-2700 Digital Sampling The PSR-2700 features a built-in digital voice sampling system that lets you digitally record any sounds from a microphone or line-level source and play those sounds via the four SAMPLE PADS and/or the keyboard. The Digital Sampling system can record a maximum of 6 seconds of sound per sample pad, up to a total of 60 seconds. A sampled “voice” is a complete set of data for the four SAMPLE PADS. CAUTION • Never interrupt the PSR-2700 power supply - either by unplugging the power cord or by turning the power switch off - during sampling, during a clear operation, while the PSR-2700 is processing sampled data (i.e. while “Squeezing” appears on the display), or while loading sampled voices from disk. Doing so will result in the loss of all data in the PSR-2700 wave RAM! DIGITAL SAMPLING VOICE # FREQ TRIGGER MAPPING LEVEL PITCH REC VOICE NAME 0 dB –6 –12 –18 –24 –30 –36 MIN CLEAR MAX INPUT LEVEL 1 2 3 4 SAMPLE PADS ■ Connections SAMPLE IN LINE MIC To use the Digital Sampler you’ll need to connect the source you intend to use to either the rear-panel SAMPLE IN LINE or MIC jack. If you’ll be recording via a microphone, plug the microphone into the SAMPLE IN MIC jack. If you’ll be recording from a line-level source such as a cassette player or other audio playback device, plug the player’s line output into the SAMPLE IN LINE jack. If your audio playback device has RCA pin-jack type outputs you’ll need to acquire a cable or connector converter that allows connection to the PSR-2700’s 1/4-inch mono phone jack. CD Player NOTES • Be sure to obtain proper permission when sampling copyrighted material. ■ Setting the Input Level For optimum sound quality you’ll need to match the input sensitivity on the PSR-2700 Digital Sampling system to the output level of your source. After connecting and preparing your source: ZEngage the Level Check Mode .............................................................................................................. Press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [REC] button. “LEVEL CHECK MODE” will appear on the display and the [REC] indicator will flash. REC 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno ----LEVEL CHECK MODE---- ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 63 PSR-2700 Digital Sampling XPlay the Source and Adjust the Level .................................................................................................. Play the sound you intend to record, via microphone or line, and adjust the INPUT LEVEL control while watching the level indicators above the control. The length of the “bar” formed by the level indicators increases as input level increases. For optimum sound quality, your input signal should cause most of the indicators to light, but not all. If all indicators including the red “0 dB” indicator light in response to the input signal you’re probably overloading the input circuitry and will end up with distorted sound. At the other extreme, if none of the indicators light, or only the lowest one or two indicators light, then the input signal is too small and the level of the recorded sound will be too low. 0 dB –6 –12 –18 –24 –30 –36 MIN MAX INPUT LEVEL NOTES • The keyboard and other function buttons will not operate in the level check mode. CExit ........................................................................................................................................................... Once the input level has been set properly, press the DIGITAL SAMPLING [REC] button to exit from the level check mode. REC ■ Setting the Sampling Frequency The length of the sample you can record and its sound quality are determined by the “sampling frequency”. A high sampling frequency produce better sound quality but shorter samples; a low sampling frequency allow longer recording but with reduced sound quality. The PSR-2700 gives you two sampling frequency settings: Setting Length Sound Quality 1: LOW 6 sec. (approx.) Low 2: HIGH 3 sec. (approx.) High ZPress the [FREQ] Button ....................................................................................................................... Press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [FREQ] button. The current sampling frequency setting will appear on the LCD display panel. FREQ 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Frequency=1 – :LOW XSelect a Frequency Setting ................................................................................................................... – + 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [FREQ] button itself to select the desired sampling frequency setting (“LOW” or “HIGH”). RESET NOTES 64 • The “LOW” setting is automatically selected when the PSR-2700 power is initially turned on. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Setting the Trigger Level There are two ways to start sample recording: manual and triggered. With manual recording recording starts the moment you press the [REC] and pad buttons, as described in the “Recording” section, below. With triggered recording you initially engage the record standby mode and recording actually begins as soon as the PSR2700 detects an input signal that is higher than the selected trigger level. The [TRIGGER LEVEL] button lets you select the method you want to use, and provides 5 different trigger levels. The trigger level you choose will depend on the type of signal you want to record and the level of the background noise where you record. The idea is to set the highest trigger level that will start recording without cutting off the attack of the sound you are recording. If the trigger level is too low, recording can be triggered by ambient background noise at the wrong time. ZPress the [TRIGGER LEVEL] Button .................................................................................................... Press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [TRIGGER LEVEL] button. The current trigger level setting will appear on the LCD display panel. TRIGGER LEVEL 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff Trig.Level=3 – XSelect a Trigger Level ............................................................................................................................ – + RESET 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [TRIGGER LEVEL] button itself to select the desired trigger level setting (“OFF” or “1” through “5”). When the trigger level is set to “OFF”, manual recording is selected and recording will start immediately when the [REC] and pad buttons are pressed (see the “Recording” section, below). Automatic triggering is selected when a value from 1 to 5 is selected. “1” produces the lowest triggering level, triggering recording when even a very soft sound is detected at the input. Increasing values produce progressively higher trigger levels. Try a trigger level of 2 or 3 to begin with. The default setting of “3” can be instantly selected by pressing the [+] and [–] buttons simultaneously. NOTES • Proper trigger operation depends on proper input level adjustment. Make sure you set the input level properly as described on page 63. • The trigger level is set to “3” when the PSR-2700 power is initially turned on. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 65 PSR-2700 Digital Sampling ■ Recording Each sampled “voice” recorded by the PSR-2700 can contain four separate samples, one in each SAMPLE PAD. You can play the individual samples included in the selected sample voice by playing the appropriate pad, or by playing on the keyboard when the VOICE section SAMPLED VOICE indicator is lit. When you play a sampled voice via the keyboard, the four separate samples it contains are assigned to different ranges of the keyboard. This will be explained in more detail in the “Playing Samples via the Keyboard” section on page 70. Your sampled voices will be retained in the PSR-2700 sample memory even when the power is turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed on the AC plug is connected. Your samples can also be saved to and loaded from disk so you can create and original sample library. NOTES • Although a maximum of 255 individual samples can be recorded, the samples have to be extremely short — a fraction of a second each — to achieve this number. During normal sample recording the sample memory is likely to become full long before the maximum of 255 samples is reached. The maximum total recording time — 60 seconds — is a more reliable guide as to how much of the sample memory has been used or is available. ZSelect a Sample Voice Number ............................................................................................................. VOICE # 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff SVC=0 – 01:******** Press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [VOICE #] button. The current selected sample voice number will appear on the LCD display panel. Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE #] button itself to select the desired sample voice number. If the selected voice number contains no data, “********” will appear on the display in place of the voice name. XRecord ..................................................................................................................................................... REC 1 2 3 4 SAMPLE PADS SVC=001 Frq=LOW Trg=3 >>>> Sampling !!!!! <<<< Press the SAMPLE PAD to which you want to record while holding the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [REC] button. “Sampling Ready” will appear on the display. Recording will begin immediately if you set the trigger level to “OFF” (see “Setting the Trigger Level, above). If you selected automatic triggering, the [REC] button and selected SAMPLE PAD will flash until recording is triggered by an input signal. When recording starts, whether manual or triggered, the [REC] button indicator will light continuously and “Sampling” will appear on the display. NOTES • The keyboard and other function buttons will not operate during sample recording. • If the “No Bank” or “Wave Ram Full” error message appears, there is not enough memory available for sampling and some data will have to be cleared before sampling will be possible (See “Error Messages” on page 81). CStop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... 1 2 3 SAMPLE PADS 66 4 Press the SAMPLE PAD to which you are recording to stop recording. Both the [REC] button and SAMPLE PAD indicators will go out. NOTES • Try to stop record immediately after the sound has finished in order to conserve sample memory and allow maximum total recording time. • If the maximum sampling time is exceeded, “Sampling End” will appear on the display and recording will stop automatically. • In some cases “SQUEEZING XXX%” will appear on the display while the PSR-2700 processes the sampled data after recording. “XXXKByteFree” will then appear, indicating the amount of RAM remaining after the data has been processed. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| VRepeat as Necessary ............................................................................................................................. Repeat the above procedure to record the remaining SAMPLE PADS, as required. NOTES • The PSR-2700 has 1,020 kilobytes (1.02 megabytes) of waveform RAM memory for sampled voice storage. To find out how much of this memory is available for recording press the [CLEAR] button: “XXXX KByteFree” will appear on the display (“XXXX” indicates the remaining RAM in kilobytes). • The sample data is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off as long as the backup batteries are installed or the AC plug is connected. ● Enter an Original Voice Name VOICE NAME M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff SVC=001:H – ello! The PSR-2700 automatically creates a voice name for each sampled voice. If you want to enter a more descriptive name for easier identification (and this is recommended), this can be done via the keyboard after pressing the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [VOICE NAME] button so that its indicator lights. A voice name can consist of up to eight characters. Each key on the keyboard enters a different character, listed immediately below the key. The lowest key (C1) functions as a shift key that shifts between lower- and upper-case characters: hold the SHIFT key while pressing a character key to enter the upper-case character. Each time a character is entered the cursor moves to the next character position. The F5 and F#5 keys move the cursor backward and forward within the voice name. Use these keys to place the cursor where you want to enter or change a character. The DELETE key (G5) deletes the character at the cursor position. Press the ENTER key (C6) when you’ve finished entering the voice name — this returns you to the voice number display (your voice name will not be entered if you don’t press the ENTER key). NOTES • Playing the keyboard will produce no sound during voice name entry. • No name can be entered for a voice that contains no data. ■ Playing the Sample Pads 1 2 3 SAMPLE PADS VOICE # 4 The recorded samples can be played simply by pressing the appropriate SAMPLE PAD. The sample sounds only as long as the pad is held, so you play only a section of a sample by releasing the pad early, or rapidly retrigger the first section of the sample by repeatedly pressing the pad. The pads can also be played at the same time so you can play all four samples simultaneously, as required. To select a different sample voice for playback via the pads, then press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [VOICE #] button and use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE #] button itself to select the desired sample voice number. NOTES • Different voices can be selected for playback via the pads and keyboard (see page 70), and these can be played simultaneously via the pads and keyboard. • To use sample pad data from disk, load the data into the PSR-2700 as described on page 60. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 67 PSR-2700 Digital Sampling ■ Editing Samples The following functions provide a range of useful sample editing capabilities. NOTES ● Clearing Samples • If the sample data cannot be edited the following messages will appear on the LCD display: “No Wave Data” if there is no data in the pad; “Protected Voice” is the data is protected and cannot be edited by the PSR-2700. The contents of an entire sampled voice (four pads) or individual SAMPLE PADS can be completely cleared (erased) as follows: ZHold [CLEAR] and Select the Voice Or a Pad ...................................................................................... While holding the [CLEAR] button press the [VOICE #] button if you want to clear the entire voice, or the SAMPLE PAD you want to clear if or you only want to clear one pad. The [CLEAR] button, pad indicator if a CLEAR pad was selected, and ARE YOU SURE? indicators will flash and the “Are you sure?” prompt will also sound. XClear the Voice or Pad ........................................................................................................................... Press the [YES] button to clear the current sample voice or selected pad, or the [NO] button to cancel the clear operation. VOICE # 2 YES NO ARE YOU SURE ? NOTES • In some cases “SQUEEZING XXX%” will appear on the display while the PSR-2700 processes the sampled data during the clear process. “XXXXKByteFree” will then appear, indicating the amount of RAM remaining after the data has been processed. • When a sample pad is cleared, the mapping applied to that pad is also cleared and the default mapping will be restored. ● Tuning the Samples The pitch of each SAMPLE PAD can be adjusted over approximately a ±50-cent range (100 cents total — approximately one semitone). This is a convenient way to tune samples to match the music in which they will be used. ZHold [PITCH] and Select a Pad .............................................................................................................. While holding the [PITCH] button press the SAMPLE PAD containing the sample you want to tune. The selected SAMPLE PAD indicator will flash and its current pitch value will appear on the LCD display. PITCH 1 2 3 SAMPLE PADS 4 08:Showtune 001:Sampl001 AccOff Pitch PAD2= 0 –0 If you press only the [PITCH] button SAMPLE PAD 1 will automatically be selected. XSelect the Pitch ....................................................................................................................................... Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to set the pitch as required. The pitch range is from “–10” through “0” to “+10”. A – + 0 1 2 setting of “0” produces normal pitch. Each increment raises (+) or lowers (– RESET ) the pitch by approximately 5 cents. You can play the pads while tuning to check the sound. The normal tuning value can be recalled instantly by pressing the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time. CExit ........................................................................................................................................................... Press the [PITCH] button or any other function button — the [VOICE#] button, for example — to exit from the pitch function. 68 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ● Volume, DSP Depth, & Pan Settings The VOICE section [VOL], [DSP DEPTH], and [PAN] buttons can be used to set the overall volume, DSP depth, and pan position of all four SAMPLE PADS. ZHold [EDIT] and Press [VOICE #] .......................................................................................................... ORCHESTRATION VOICE # L1 R1 EDIT L2 R2 While holding the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button press the DIGITAL SAMPLING section [VOICE #] button. All four SAMPLE PAD indicators will flash and the volume parameter will appear on the LCD display panel. 08:Showtune 001:Sampl001 AccOff Volume=2 –1 XSelect & Set the Parameters .................................................................................................................. Use the [VOL], [DSP DEPTH], and [PAN] buttons to select the parameter you want to adjust, then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the selected function button itself to set the parameter as required (see page 14 for details on the volume parameter, page 15 for the DSP depth, and page 15 for pan). CExit ........................................................................................................................................................... Press any other function button to exit from the parameter adjustment mode. VOL DSP DEPTH PAN ◆ Individual SAMPLE PAD Volume Settings It is also possible to individually adjust the volume of each pad as follows: ZHold [EDIT] and Select a Pad ................................................................................................................ While holding the ORCHESTRATION [EDIT] button press the SAMPLE PAD containing the sample you want to adjust. The selected SAMPLE PAD indicator will flash and its current volume value will appear on the LCD display panel. ORCHESTRATION 2 L1 R1 EDIT L2 R2 08:Showtune 001:Sampl001 AccOff Volume=2 –1 XSet the Volume ....................................................................................................................................... – + RESET 0 1 2 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to set the volume as required (“0” for no sound through “24” for maximum volume). CExit ........................................................................................................................................................... Press any other function button to exit from the individual pad volume adjustment mode. NOTES • The individual volume setting also apply when the sampled voices are played via the keyboard. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 69 PSR-2700 Digital Sampling ■ Playing Samples via the Keyboard To play your samples via the PSR-2700 keyboard, press the VOICE section [SAMPLED VOICE] button so that its indicator lights. If all four SAMPLE PADS have been recorded for the currently selected sampled voice, the individual samples will initially be assigned to the keyboard as follows: VOICE SELECT SAMPLED KEYBOARD PERCUSSION VOICE Initial mapping PAD Key Range PAD 1 C2 C1 … F#2 PAD 2 C3 G2 … F#3 PAD 3 C4 G3 … F#4 PAD 4 C5 G4 … C6 C2 – + 0 1 2 RESET C3 C4 C5 PAD 1 PAD 2 PAD 3 PAD 4 (C1…F#2) (G2…F#3) (G3…F#4) (G4…C6) In the above chart “Key” is the key on the keyboard to which the original pitch of the recorded sample is assigned. For example, pressing the C2 key will produce exactly the same sound as pressing PAD 1. Other keys within the specified range play the sample at appropriately higher or lower pitches. If only one sample is recorded, the sample will play across the entire range of the keyboard. If two or three samples are recorded they will be assigned to the same keys but the ranges will be adjusted to suit the number of samples. The sample key assignments can be changed by using the “Mapping” function, described below. To select a different sample voice for playback via the keyboard, make sure the VOICE section [SAMPLED VOICE] indicator is on, then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE SELECT] button to select the desired sample voice number. Press the [SAMPLED VOICE] button so that its indicator goes out when you want to return to the normal voice mode. NOTES • The sampled voices have 26-note polyphony in addition to the 28 notes available for the normal voices. • The sampled voices can be assigned to any of the ORCHESTRATION parts. ● Mapping This function allows the original pitch of the sampled sound to be “mapped” to any key on the keyboard, thus changing the key assignments and keyboard ranges described above. ZHold [MAPPING] and Select a Pad ........................................................................................................ While holding the [MAPPING] button press the SAMPLE PAD containing the sample you want to re-map to the keyboard. The selected SAMPLE PAD indicator will flash and the note number to which it is currently assigned will appear on the display. MAPPING 1 2 3 SAMPLE PADS 70 4 08:Showtune 001:Sampl001 AccOff Mapping PAD2=0 – 60 If you press only the [MAPPING] button SAMPLE PAD 1 will automatically be selected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| XSelect a New Key .................................................................................................................................... Press the key to which the original voice of the sample is to be mapped. The note number of the selected key will appear on the LCD display panel. The key can also be selected by using the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to select the appropriate note number on the display (the note numbers, 36 through 96, are listed above the keys). You can play the pad while mapping to confirm the sound. CExit ........................................................................................................................................................... MAPPING Press the [MAPPING] button or any other function button — the [VOICE SELECT] button, for example — to exit from the mapping function. NOTES • Normally the key to which a sample is mapped will become approximately the center of its range. The actual range will depend on how many of the four samples are recorded and to which keys they are mapped. • The default mapping assignments are restored for pads which are cleared as described in “Clearing Samples”: PAD 1 to C2, PAD 2 to C3, PAD 3 to C4, and PAD 4 to C5. • If you press several keys simultaneously while mapping the last key pressed take priority. • Mapping assignments are retained even if new samples are recorded. • Mapping is not possible for: pads that contain no data (“No Wave Data” error); a key that is already mapped (“Same Note” error). ■ Sample Memory Backup & Disk Storage The PSR-2700 is backed up by the backup batteries and will remain intact as long as a good set of batteries is installed. Even if no batteries are installed the memory will be maintained as long as the power plug is connected to an AC outlet. It is always a good idea, however, to save samples you want to keep to floppy disk. You can save either single voices or the entire contents of the sample memory to disk as required. Full instructions on floppy disk use are given in the “Floppy Disk” section beginning on page 56. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 71 Pedal Assign Optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitches and/or or FC7 foot controllers can be plugged into either or both of the rear-panel PEDAL jacks and used to control a wide range of functions. 1 PEDAL 2 1 2 PEDAL ASSIGN The functions listed below can be assigned to the footswitch or foot controller connected to the PEDAL 1 and PEDAL 2 jacks by pressing the appropriate function button while holding the PEDAL ASSIGN [1] or [2] button. PEDAL 2 1 Assignable Footswitch Functions (FC4, FC5) (FC7) (FC5) • • • • • • • AUTO ACCOMP ON/OFF FADE IN/OUT INTRO VARIATION [A] VARIATION [B] FILL IN 1 FILL IN 2 • BREAK • ENDING • ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL START/STOP • SYNC-START ON/OFF • CHORD 2 FINGERING • EFFECT ON/OFF • • • • • HARMONY ON/OFF SONG RESET SONG PLAY/STOP GATE TIME STEP SIZE Assignable Foot Controller Function (FC7) Example: Assigning AUTO ACCOMP on/off switching to the pedal. STYLE SELECT 1 2 VOICE • VOLUME (24 steps) ACCOMP • VOLUME (24 steps) NOTES • DSP DEPTH (15 steps) • PAN (14 steps) • Using the foot controller while an Assignable Foot Controller Function is assigned has the same effect as holding the corresponding panel button. • The PEDAL 1 jack is initially assigned to sustain control. A footswitch connected to this jack functions as a damper pedal, controlling sustain. Press the pedal to sustain notes after the keys are released. PEDAL ASSIGN AUTO ACCOMP • The PEDAL 2 jack is initially assigned to the voice volume control (MIDI Expression control). An FC7 foot controller connected to this jack can be used to control voice volume: press the pedal forward to increase voice volume; backward to decrease voice volume. • A footswitch or foot controller can be returned to its default function by pressing it while holding the corresponding PEDAL ASSIGN button. • The ON/OFF operation of a footswitch or the control direction of a foot controller can be reversed by double-clicking the corresponding PEDAL ASSIGN button (press the button twice rapidly) without pressing the pedal. • If the GATE TIME or STEP size parameter is assigned to PEDAL 1, the parameter will be decremented each time the pedal is pressed. If assigned to PEDAL 2, the parameter will be incremented each time the pedal is pressed. • For CHORD 2 mode control press the [FINGERING] button while holding the appropriate PEDAL ASSIGN button. Then the footswitch can be pressed while the Auto Accompaniment is playing to switch to the CHORD 2 mode. The CHORD 2 mode remains active only as long as the footswitch is pressed. • The pedal assignment can be stored in the Registration Memory. 72 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| MIDI MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control one another. This makes it possible to create “systems” of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and control than is available with isolated instruments. MIDI RECEIVE TRANSMIT CH/CL/COM CH L R MODE ................ 0 RX OFF 1 MULTI 2 REMOTE 3 CHORD 4 ROOT LOCAL MIDI OUT LOCAL / MIDI OUT ● The MIDI Connectors .............................................................................................................................. MIDI The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external MIDI deTHRU OUT IN vice which can be used to control the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700. The MIDI THRU connector re-transmits data received at the MIDI IN connector, allowing “chaining” of several MIDI devices. The MIDI OUT connector transmits MIDI data generated by the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 (e.g. note and velocity data produced by playing the keyboard). ● Simple MIDI Control ................................................................................................................................ Most MIDI keyboards transmit note and velocity (touch response) inforTone Generator mation via the MIDI OUT connector whenever a note is played on the keyMIDI IN board. If the MIDI OUT connector is connected to the MIDI IN connector of a second keyboard (synthesizer, etc.) or a tone generator (essentially a MIDI OUT synthesizer with no keyboard), the second keyboard or tone generator will PSR-1700/2700 respond precisely to notes played on the original transmitting keyboard. The result is that you can effectively play two instruments at once, providing thick multi-instrument sounds. The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 also transmit “program change” data when one of its voices is selected. Depending on how the receiving device is set up, the corresponding voice will be MIDI Keyboard automatically selected on the receiving keyboard or tone generator whenever a voice is selected on the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700. MIDI OUT MIDI IN PSR-1700/2700 The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 are capable of receiving the same MIDI data, so a second MIDI keyboard connected to the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 MIDI IN connector can be used to remotely play the instrument and select voices as required. ● MIDI Sequence Recording ...................................................................................................................... Sequencer MIDI IN MIDI OUT PSR-1700/2700 Although the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 feature a built-in “sequencer” (the Song Memory is a type of sequencer), the same type of musical information transfer described above can be used for more sophisticated MIDI sequence recording using an external sequencer or music computer. A MIDI sequence recorder or music computer can be used to “record” MIDI data received from a PSR-1700 or PSR-2700, for example. When the recorded data is played back, the PSR-1700 or PSR-2700 automatically “plays” the recorded performance in precise detail. NOTES • Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 73 MIDI MIDI Reception Modes The [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] button is used to specify the reception mode for each of the 16 MIDI channels, the internal or external clock mode, and MIDI start/stop command reception mode. ■ Channel Reception Modes The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 allow any of five reception modes to be individually assigned to MIDI channels 1 through 16. The five modes are: Mode “0” RX OFF: Reception disabled. Mode “1” MULTI: Received MIDI note data directly controls the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 tone generator. Different voices can be played on different channels. Mode “2” REMOTE: Received MIDI note data is handled in the same way as data from the PSR-1700/PSR-2700’s own keyboard. Mode “3” CHORD: Received MIDI note data is interpreted as Auto Accompaniment chord commands. Mode “4” ROOT: Received MIDI note data is interpreted as Auto Accompaniment bass note commands . NOTES • If the PSR-1700/2700 receives more than one note at the same time while mode “4” (Root) is selected, the last note will be interpreted as the Auto Accompaniment bass note. ZPress the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] Button & Select a Channel ........................................................... RECEIVE CH/CL/COM MODE ................ 0 RX OFF 1 MULTI 2 REMOTE 3 CHORD 4 ROOT Press the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] button, then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [RECEIVE CH/CL/ COM] button itself to select the MIDI channel (1 … 16) for which you want to specify a new reception mode. The channel number appears on the right of the LCD display panel. PSR-1700 PSR-2700 RxCh0 – 1=1:Multi NOTES 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff RxCh0 – 1=1:Multi • “Clock Rx” and “Cmnd Rx” will appear on the display if you increment above channel number 16 or below channel number 1. These selections are used for the Clock Mode and Start/Stop Mode functions described below. • Be sure to set the transmit channel to the same channel specified in mode 2, 3, or 4. XSelect the Desired Mode ........................................................................................................................ 9 +– 1_ _ Use the [+/–] button in the number-button row to select the desired reception mode for the selected channel. The modes are selected in sequence each time the [+/–] button is pressed, and the mode number appears on the LCD display panel. NOTES 74 • The currently selected reception mode is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off, as long as backup batteries are installed or an AC plug is connected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Clock Mode Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as required. When disabled, all of the time-based functions (Auto Accompaniment, SONG MEMORY, etc.) are controlled by the PSR-1700/PSR2700’s own internal clock, the speed of which is set by the [TEMPO] button. When MIDI clock reception is enabled, however, all timing is controlled by an external MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN terminal (the [TEMPO] setting has no effect). NOTES • If clock reception is enabled but no MIDI clock signal is received for more than 400 milliseconds, external clock reception is automatically disable and normal internal clock operation resumes. • If you attempt to change the tempo setting when MIDI clock reception is enabled, “Tempo q=External” will appear on the LCD display panel. ZPress the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] Button & Select “Clock Rx” ......................................................... RECEIVE CH/CL/COM MODE ................ Press the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] button, then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [RECEIVE CH/CL/ COM] button itself to select “Clock Rx” on the LCD display panel (“Clock Rx” is the next step above MIDI channel 16). 0 RX OFF 1 MULTI 2 REMOTE 3 CHORD 4 ROOT XSelect the Desired Mode ........................................................................................................................ +– 1_ _ 9 Use the [+/–] button in the number-button row to select the desired clock mode. The disable and enable modes are selected alternately each time the [+/–] button is pressed, and the selected mode appears on the right digit of the LCD display panel (“Clock Rx=0:Off” for disable; “Clock Rx:=1:On” for enable). ■ Start/Stop Mode This function determines the effect of external MIDI start and stop signals. There are three start/stop modes, as follows: Mode “0” Start/stop reception disabled. Mode “1” MIDI start and stop commands start and stop the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 Auto Accompaniment feature. Mode “2” MIDI start and stop commands start and stop the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 SONG MEMORY feature. ZPress the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] Button & Select “Cmnd Rx”......................................................... RECEIVE CH/CL/COM MODE ................ 0 RX OFF 1 MULTI 2 REMOTE 3 CHORD 4 ROOT Press the [RECEIVE CH/CL/COM] button, then use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [RECEIVE CH/CL/ COM] button itself to select “Cmnd Rx” on the LCD display panel (“Cmnd Rx” is the next step above “Clock Rx” — or the next step below MIDI channel 1). XSelect the Desired Mode ........................................................................................................................ 9 +– 1_ _ Use the [+/–] button in the number-button row to select the desired start mode. The start/stop modes are selected in sequence each time the [+/–] button is pressed: “Cmnd Rx=0:Off”, “Cmnd Rx=1:Accomp”, or “Cmnd Rx=2:Song”. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 75 MIDI MIDI Transmission The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 allows independent MIDI transmit channels to be assigned to the L and R ORCHESTRATION voices. It is also possible to independently turn local control and MIDI output on or off for the L and R voices. ■ MIDI Transmit Channels The L and R ORCHESTRATION voices can be independently set to transmit on any of the 16 MIDI channels as follows: ZPress the [L] or [R] TRANSMIT CH Press the [L] button if you want to set the L voice transmit channel, or the [R] to set the R voice transmit channel. The currently selected channel for the selected voice will appear on the LCD display panel. TRANSMIT CH L R PSR-1700 PSR-2700 MIDI TxCh R=0 –1 LOCAL MIDI OUT LOCAL / MIDI OUT NOTES 08:Showtune 001:GrandPno AccOff MIDI TxCh R=0 –1 • After selecting L or R, as described above, the default transmit channel can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [–] buttons. The default “L” channel number is “2”, and the default “R” channel is “1”. XSelect the Desired Transmit Channel ................................................................................................... – + 0 1 Use the [+] and [–] buttons, the number buttons, the data dial, or the [L] or [R] button itself to select the desired transmit channel. RESET NOTES • The currently selected transmit channel is retained in memory even when the power switch is turned off, as long as backup batteries are installed or an AC plug is connected. • To record the Song Memory data to an external sequencer, start the sequencer running in the record mode, press the [RESET] button, and then press the [PLAY/STOP] button. • To record the Auto Accompaniment data to an external sequencer, start the sequencer running in the record mode, select the style you want to record, then start Auto Accompaniment playback. • Notes played on the keyboard are transmitted on channel 1 or 2 (selectable), Auto Accompaniment data is transmitted on channels 10 through 16, and Song Memory data is transmitted on channels 3 through 8. Normally the Auto Accompaniment Rhythm 1 and Rhythm 2 tracks are both transmitted on channel 10. To transmit these tracks separately, hold the C1 key while turning the power on. When this is done the Rhythm 1 data will be transmitted on channel 9 and the Rhythm 2 data will be transmitted on channel 10. ■ Local & MIDI Output ON/OFF The [LOCAL/MIDI OUT] buttons and indicators below the TRANSMIT CH [L] and [R] buttons can be used to turn local control and MIDI output ON or OFF as required. The status of the LOCAL and MIDI OUT indicators changes as shown below each time the corresponding [LOCAL/MIDI OUT] button is pressed: TRANSMIT CH L R LOCAL MIDI OUT LOCAL / MIDI OUT 76 NOTES • When “LOCAL” control is turned ON (indicator lit), the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 is controlled by its own keyboard. When “LOCAL” control is off, playing the keyboard produces no sound — it can only be played by MIDI data received via the MIDI IN terminal. • When MIDI OUT is turned ON (indicator lit), operating the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 produces corresponding MIDI output. When MIDI OUT is turned OFF (indicator out) no MIDI output is produced by the PSR-1700/PSR-2700. • LOCAL & MIDI OUT ON/OFF controls note on/off only. All other data is always output automatically. • Since LOCAL & MIDI OUT ON/OFF status is memorized in the Registration Memory, you can select the tone generator to be used (PSR-1700/PSR-2700 or an external tone generator) by changing the registration memory. • Auto accompaniment will not function when Left LOCAL OFF is selected. Auto accompaniment note on/off data will not be output when Left MIDI OUT OFF is selected. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Appendix ■ Voice & Polyphony List The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 can play up to 28 individual notes at the same time (i.e. it has a maximum “polyphony” of 28). This number includes all voices used: dual, split, auto accompaniment, song memory, and multi pads. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded excess notes will be truncated (they will not sound). Another feature affecting polyphony is the fact that some voices actually use two voices at once, as shown in the voice list below. The effective maximum polyphony is correspondingly reduced when these voices are used. NOTES • The voice list includes the MIDI program numbers that control each voice when the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 is played from an external MIDI device. • An additional 26 notes are available in the PSR-2700 when a sampled voice is used. These notes are only available for the sampled voice. MIDI Voice Program Number Number Voice Name Piano 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Acoustic Grand Piano Bright Acoustic Piano Electric Grand Piano Honky-tonk Piano Electric Piano 1 Electric Piano 2 Harpsichord Clavi Chromatic Percussion 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Celesta Glockenspiel Music Box Vibraphone Marimba Xylophone Tubular Bells Dulcimer 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Drawbar Organ Percussive Organ Rock Organ Church Organ Reed Organ Accordion Harmonica Tango Accordion 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Acoustic Guitar (nylon) Acoustic Guitar (steel) Electric Guitar (jazz) Electric Guitar (clean) Electric Guitar (muted) Overdriven Guitar Distortion Guitar Guitar Harmonics 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Acoustic Bass Electric Bass (finger) Electric Bass (pick) Fretless Bass Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 41 42 43 44 40 41 42 43 Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Organ Guitar Bass Strings Number MIDI Voice of Voices Program Number Used Number 45 44 1 46 45 47 46 1 2 48 47 2 49 48 2 50 49 2 51 50 1 52 51 1 53 52 54 53 1 1 55 54 56 55 2 1 57 56 1 58 57 1 1 59 58 60 59 2 61 60 62 61 2 63 62 2 2 64 63 2 1 65 64 2 66 65 1 67 66 2 68 67 69 68 1 70 69 71 70 1 1 72 71 2 73 72 1 1 74 73 75 74 1 76 75 1 77 76 1 78 77 1 79 78 1 80 79 1 1 81 80 1 82 81 1 83 82 1 84 83 85 84 1 86 85 1 87 86 1 88 87 1 Voice Name Tremolo Strings Pizzicato Strings Orchestral Harp Timpani Ensemble Strings Ensemble 1 Strings Ensemble 2 Synth Strings 1 Synth Strings 2 Choir Aahs Voice Oohs Synth Voice Orchestra Hit Brass Trumpet Trombone Tuba Muted Trumpet French Horn Brass Section Synth Brass 1 Synth Brass 2 Reed Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Pipe Piccolo Flute Recorder Pan Flute Blown Bottle Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Synth Lead Lead 1 (square) Lead 2 (sawtooth) Lead 3 (calliope) Lead 4 (chiff) Lead 5 (charang) Lead 6 (voice) Lead 7 (fifth) Lead 8 (bass+Lead ) Number MIDI Number Voice of Voices Program Voice Name of Voices Number Used Number Used 2 Synth Pad 2 89 88 Pad 1 (new age) 2 1 90 89 Pad 2 (warm) 2 1 91 90 Pad 3 (polysynth) 2 92 91 Pad 4 (choir) 2 1 93 92 Pad 5 (bowed) 2 1 94 93 Pad 6 (metallic) 2 2 95 94 Pad 7 (halo) 2 2 96 95 Pad 8 (sweep) 2 2 Synth Effects 1 97 96 FX 1 (rain) 2 1 98 97 FX 2 (soundtrack) 2 1 99 98 FX 3 (crystal) 2 100 99 FX 4 (atmosphere) 2 1 101 100 FX 5 (brightness) 2 1 102 101 FX 6 (goblins) 2 1 103 102 FX 7 (echoes) 2 1 104 103 FX 8 (sci-fi) 2 1 Ethnic 1 105 104 Sitar 1 2 106 105 Banjo 1 2 107 106 Shamisen 1 108 107 Koto 1 1 109 108 Kalimba 1 1 110 109 Bagpipe 2 1 111 110 Fiddle 1 1 112 111 Shanai 1 1 Percussive 1 113 112 Tinkle Bell 2 1 114 113 Agogo 1 1 115 114 Steel Drums 2 116 115 Woodblock 1 1 117 116 Taiko Drum 1 1 118 117 Melodic Tom 1 1 119 118 Synth Drum 1 1 120 119 Reverse Cymbal 1 2 Sound Effects 1 121 120 Guitar Fret Noise 1 1 122 121 Breath Noise 1 1 123 122 Seashore 2 124 123 Bird Tweet 2 2 125 124 Telephone Ring 1 126 125 Helicopter 2 2 2 127 126 Applause 2 2 128 127 Gunshot 1 2 * The following voices use only one voice 2 in the indicated ranges: 46 (Pizzicato 2 2 Strings): all notes below C#2 and above F5. 110 (Bagpipe): all notes above A#2. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 77 Appendix ■ Style List # Name Pop Rhythm Comments 01 16-Beat Pop 16-Beat 02 8-Beat Pop 8-Beat Bright piano/guitar-based ’70s pop. 03 8-Beat Light 8-Beat Eight-beat easy-listening style with arpeggiated piano part. 04 FolkRock 16-Beat Guitar-based folk-rock. 05 Detroit Pop 12-Beat Motown-style rhythm, with modern touches. 06 Pop Shuffle 12-Beat ’70s European pop-shuffle. 07 Pop Rock 12-Beat Upbeat, fast pop-rock. Try using your own chords in the Intro B and Ending B. The lead guitar part plays various phrases according to the chords chosen. 08 Showtune 8-Beat Contemporary 16-beat pop. Bouncy, fully orchestrated style from ’40s/’50s musicals. Pop Ballad 09 16-Beat Ballad 10 Pop Ballad 16-Beat 8-Beat Warm, romantic American soul ballad style. Romantic pop ballad 11 Big Ballad 8-Beat Slow ballad with full arpeggios and fancy organ fills. 12 Piano Ballad 8-Beat Piano-based ballad with slow arpeggios. Huge drum fills in Intro and Fill In 2. 13 Epic Ballad 8-Beat Pop ballad style from the ’60s and ’70s, featuring gentle strings accompaniment in MAIN A and full orchestra in MAIN B. 14 6/8 Ballad Six-Eight Slow rock ballad with triplet feel and classical overtones. Dance 15 Eurobeat 16-Beat Fast, 16-beat Eurobeat sound, for disco and house music. 16 Dance Pop 16-Beat 80s English disco sound. 17 Casa 16-Beat Italian house music. 18 Dance Shuffle 24-Beat Rap/dance feel, especially for one-chord songs. Try playing with CHORD 1 & 2 off. There are two separate types for Intro B/Ending B: major and minor. 19 Groundbeat 24-Beat Contemporary soul ballad with funky bass. PHRASE 1 adds high string lines and PHRASE 2 adds bass. 20 Synth Boogie Six-Eight Fast, machine-like 6/8 computer groove with synth bass. Disco 21 Disco Party 16-Beat Big band disco party style, hugely popular in Europe. 22 Disco Soul 16-Beat Philadelphia disco style from the ’70s. 23 Disco Tropical 16-Beat Disco sound with a Latin feel — echoes of American TV themes from the ’80s. 24 Disco Funk 16-Beat Late ’70s New York disco style. 25 Disco Pop 16-Beat The world-famous (and recently revived) ’70s Swedish disco sound. 26 Polka Pop 8-Beat Updated Polka style. Latin percussion in Rhythm 2. 8-Beat Eight-beat rhythm and blues from the ’60s . Rhythm & Blues 27 R&B 28 R&B Ballad 16-Beat 29 Fast Gospel 8-Beat 30 Gospel Six-Eight Gospel ballad groove for slow tempo songs. 31 6/8 Blues Six-Eight New Orleans R&B from the ’50s. 32 Blues Shuffle 12-Beat Chicago-type blues shuffle. 33 Soul 8-Beat 34 Funk 16-Beat Oakland’s East Bay funk style, with fat horn section and big finale for ending. 35 Funk Shuffle 24-Beat Funky guitar and funky brass stabs in a funky organ-driven shuffle. Funky! Upbeat West Coast soul ballad. Bright and brassy ’60s Chicago Rhythm & Blues style. Simple-but-effective Memphis R&B groove. Rock 78 36 Hard Rock 37 Rock Boogie 8-Beat 38 Rock Pop 39 Rock Shuffle 12-Beat Smooth pop-rock style. Try bringing in the instrument parts one by one. 40 6/8 Rock Six-Eight Slow rock pattern with triplet feel and “House of the Rising Sun”-style arpeggios. 41 Rock Ballad 42 Rock Classical 12-Beat 8-Beat 8-Beat 16-Beat Fast, hard-driving rock. P2 brings in cymbal crashes with every chord change. Hard-driving boogie with distorted guitar. Mid-tempo guitar-based rock. Slow rock ballad. Use RHYTHM 2 to add crash cymbal at chord changes. Take out PHRASE 1 & 2 (guitars) for smoother sound. Classical instruments like harpsichord and strings over a pop music rhythm section. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| # Name Rock & Roll Rhythm Comments 43 Rock & Roll 12-Beat Old-time ’60s Rock&Roll. 44 Boogie Woogie 12-Beat Late ’50s piano-based rock ‘n’ roll, with boogie woogie bass. Brass in PHRASE 1 & 2, PAD. 45 Twist 46 Rockabilly 12-Beat Simple, updated version of the Memphis “Sun” sound. 47 16-beat Rock & Roll 16-Beat Hard rock & roll — bringing the “Bo Beat” into the ’90s. Bring in more complex guitar, brass comping by playing more complex chords. 8-Beat piano bass in Straight-eight boogie, with a “Twist.” Traditional Jazz 48 Ragtime 8-Beat 49 Dixieland 12-Beat Turn-of-the-century piano style. Piano fills at PHRASE 1, piano bass at PHRASE 2. Old-time New Orleans jazz. Trumpet at PHRASE 1, Trombone at PHRASE 2, and Clarinets at PAD. 50 Big Band 12-Beat Big Band orchestra style and instrumentation. Piano at CHORD 1, guitar at CHORD 2, trumpets at PHRASE 1, trombones at PHRASE 2, and saxes at PAD. 51 Big Band Ballad 12-Beat Slowly swaying Big Band sound. Use in medley with Jazz Ballad to switch to piano/guitar quartet. 52 Swing 12-Beat European big-band swing style. Good for all mid-tempo swing tunes. 53 Swing Waltz Nine-Eight Mid-tempo 9/8 waltz. Contemporary Jazz 54 BeBop 12-Beat ’40s New York fast Bepop style. Good also for instantly adding a double-time feel to any style! 55 Jazz Ballad 12-Beat Slow jazz style with piano, guitar, bass and brush drums. Turn off PHRASE 1 & 2 when playing piano melody. Use in medley with Big Band Ballad to change orchestration. 56 Jazz Waltz Nine-Eight Swing style in 3/4 time for playing jazz waltz standards. 57 Fusion 16-Beat Latin flavored 16-beat fusion. 58 Fusion Shuffle 24-Beat West Coast type funk shuffle. Latin 59 Mambo 8-Beat 60 Merengue 8-Beat Contemporary Latin dance music. If playing the melody with a piano sound, turn off CHORD 2. High-energy Latin style with lots of percussion and punchy brass. 61 Beguine 8-Beat Slow rumba rhythm, a la “Begin the Beguine.” 62 Bomba 16-Beat Puerto Rican dance rhythm, cousin to the Merengue. 63 Guaguanco 16-Beat Another high-powered Latin dance style, usually played with drums/percussion only. Use RHYTHM 1 & 2, PHRASE 1 & 2 to bring individual percussion in and out. Latin Pop 64 Pop Bossa 8-Beat Soft, electric-piano based Latin pop sound. 65 Bossa Nova Slow 8-Beat Mellow and jazzy Bossa Nova style, good for mid to slow tempos. There are two separate types for Intro B/Ending B: major and minor. 66 Jazz Samba 16-Beat Traditional Brazilian samba with an added drum set. 67 Modern Cha Cha 16-Beat Afro-Cuban dance style for medium slow tempos. 68 Latin Rock 16-Beat Contemporary Cha Cha with electric bass and drum kit. Caribbean 69 Ska 70 Calypso 16-Beat 8-Beat Ska rhythm. Minor keys add doubled “skank.” Traditional Jamaican Calypso music from the ’60s. 71 Reggae 16 16-Beat Modern Jamaican Reggae rhythm with fat synth bass. 72 Reggae 12 12-Beat Reggae shuffle. 16-Beat Try this one with just CHORD 1 and RHYTHM 1 at first, then build up the arrangement by adding different instruments. Country & Western 73 Bluegrass 74 Country Pop 8-Beat Contemporary country style. 75 Country Rock 8-Beat Soft country style with pedal steel sound. Guitar voicings are most authentic for simple chords, like major, minor, 7th, etc. 76 Country Ballad 8-Beat 77 Country Waltz Nine-Eight Simple, versatile country style with acoustic guitar. Guitar voicings are most authentic for simple chords, like major, minor, 7th, etc. 78 Country Shuffle 12-Beat Traditional country style using acoustic guitar. Guitar voicings are most authentic for simple chords, like major, minor, 7th, etc. 79 Western Shuffle 12-Beat Down-home Country and Western shuffle, with a modern touch. Especially suited to slow tempos. Also, try playing with CHORD 1 only. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 79 Appendix ■ Style List # Name World Music Rhythm 8-Beat Comments 80 Polka 81 Traditional Waltz Three-Four European waltz with guitar, accordion, clarinet, bass, drums and a string pad. Use CHORD 1 & 2 and PHRASE 1 for guitar/accordion arrangement. 82 Sevillianas Three-Four Fast waltz time — almost flamenco style. 83 Bolero Lento 8-Beat Traditional Polka style with acoustic instruments. Try altering the arrangement by bringing the accordion and the horn parts in and out. Guitar-based style, quite romantic. Bolero Lento is related to Rumba and can be used as a slower variation. 84 Rumba Espagnole 16-Beat Spanish guitar style, with relatively full orchestration. 85 Dangdut 8-Beat Contemporary Indonesian pop sound. 8-Beat Traditional march style. Trombones at CHORD 1, trumpets at CHORD 2, french horn at PHRASE 1, piccolo at PHRASE 2, xylophone at PAD. March 86 Military March 87 6/8 March Six-Eight Marching brass band. Brass is added to the drum sound when you change chords during Intro B. Enjoy different drum fills with breaks A and B. 88 Tarantella Six-Eight Named after the Tarantula spider, whose bite might cause one to dance in this style, this rhythm is used in the popular song “Funiculi Funicula.” Three-Four This slow waltz (or English waltz) style has been arranged in the style of a small band. Ballroom Standard 89 Slow Waltz 90 Tango Argentina 8-Beat Traditional ballroom style Tango. 8-Beat Latin rhythm best known from the opera “Carmen.” 91 Tango Habanera 92 Slowfox 12-Beat A standard ballroom dance. This style is suitable for many ballads and slow mellow jazz or swing tunes. 93 Viennese Waltz Three-Four Relaxed, ballroom waltz. Guitar is at CHORD 1, accordion at CHORD 2, pizzicato strings at PHRASE 1, clarinets at PHRASE 2 and mid-register strings at PAD. 94 Foxtrot 12-Beat Strict tempo Foxtrot for ballroom dancing. 95 Jive 12-Beat Jive (or Boogie) is a fast ballroom dance. Ballroom Latin 96 Rumba 8-Beat 97 Samba 16-Beat Rumba played in the style of a ballroom orchestra. Related to Beguine and Bolero Lento. 98 Cha Cha 8-Beat Strict tempo ChaCha style for ballroom dancing. Try starting only with RHYTHM 2, BASS and CHORD , then bring in other instruments one by one. 99 Pasodoble 8-Beat Flamenco-style rhythm, featuring Spanish guitar. Turning RHYTHM 2 on/off provides additional variation. 8-Beat Modern arrangement of old Japanese pop style. Standard ballroom Samba. Guitar is at CHORD 1 & 2, with 2 playing the lower strings. Turning RHYTHM 2 on/off provides additional variation. Custom 00 Enka Disk Style FILE # 05 Rap 16-Beat Modern rap/hip-hop rhythm with turntable scratching and other effects. RHYTHM 1 & 2 can stand on their own as basic rhythm tracks. FILE # 06 Rave 16-Beat Hard-driving synth bass and “space bleep” synth percussion. FILE # 07 Enka 8-Beat FILE # 08 Zouk 16-Beat Upbeat Afro-Caribbean dance rhythm with kalimba at PHRASE 1 and xylophone at PHRASE 2. FILE # 09 Charleston 12-Beat ’20s dance music. FILE # 10 Modern Jazz 12-Beat Contemporary jazz style. Rhythm 2 adds drum comping. FILE # 11 Batucada 16-Beat Also known as a Carnival or Street Samba. FILE # 12 Rock Cha Cha 8-Beat Modern arrangement of old Japanese pop style. An exciting rock style embellished with Latin percussion instruments. * Disk Style (FILE# 05 … 12) are the styles provided on the supplied PSR-1700/2700 demonstration disk. 80 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Error Messages If an error occurs during operation of the PSR-1700/2700, one of the following error messages will appear so you’ll know what went wrong and how to remedy the situation. Disk-related Error Messages Can't Load You have attempted to load a file that cannot be loaded. Check the file number, select an appropriate file and try again. Can't Play You have attempted to start the QUICK PLAY function with a disk that contains no files suitable for quick playback. Only Yamaha DOC files, SMF format-0 files, ESEQ files, or PianoSoft files can be used with the Quick Play function. Disk Full The disk does not have sufficient capacity remaining for the file you have attempted to save. Either delete unwanted data from the disk to make more room, or use a different disk. Disk Not Ready! You have attempted to execute a disk operation while no disk is loaded. Insert an appropriate disk and try again. Disk Protected You have attempted to save to, delete, or format a write-protected disk. Slide the floppy disk write-protect tab to the write-enable position and try again. File Not Found! The file you have attempted to delete or load cannot be found. This error message will also appear if you specify a file number that has no data for deleting or loading. File Protected You have attempted to save to or delete a write-protected file. Such files can not be overwritten or deleted by the PSR-1700/2700. Read Error An error occurred while reading data from the disk. If the error persists there could be something wrong with the floppy disk or the data on the disk might be corrupted. If possible try a different disk. Same Name You have specified a file name that already exists on the current disk. Try again and change the name. Unformatted Disk! The loaded disk is not formatted for use with the PSR-1700/2700. Either format the disk or replace it with an already-formatted disk. Write Error An error occurred while writing data to the disk. Try the operation again. If the error persists there could be something wrong with the floppy disk. Try re-formatting the disk. If this doesn’t help, try a different disk. Wrong File Name You have attempted to save a file with a file name consisting of all spaces. Try again with a different file name. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 81 Appendix Digital Sampling-related Error Messages (PSR-2700) No Bank The maximum of 255 “banks” of data has been exceeded (one pad contains one “bank”). Clear all unnecessary pads and voice data before attempting to sample more data. No Wave Data You have attempted to map or tune a pad or entering an original voice name that contains no sampled voice data. Protected Voice You have attempted to clear, record, or edit a pre-programmed disk voice file. In some cases pre-programmed sampled voices (“Protected Voices”) can only be loaded. Same Note You have attempted to map a pad to key to which another pad is already mapped. Map either pad to a different key. Wave Ram Full The wave RAM memory is full and can accept no more sampled voice data (the wave RAM is 1,020 kilobytes). Clear all unnecessary pads and voice data before attempting to sample more data. Wrong Disk You have inserted the wrong disk or a disk that does not contain the required data. Large sampled voice data files may span more than one disk, and these must be inserted in the correct order when loading the file. Check the disk number and try again. Other Error Messages IllegalOperation You have pressed a button that can not be used in the current mode. Read the instructions for the function you are using carefully, and use appropriate function button. Memory Full The PSR-1700/2700 recording memory has become full while recording Song Memory, Custom Accompaniment, or Multi Pad data. Save data you want to keep to disk and clear all unnecessary data from memory to make more room. ■ System Reset Procedure All internal memory settings are retained in memory even when the power switch is turned OFF as long as a good set of backup batteries is present or the AC plug is connected. You can, however, restore the factory default settings by following the procedures outlined below. Z Press the [POWER] switch to turn the PSR-1700/PSR-2700 power OFF. – ON/ OFF POWER + RESET X Turn the power back ON while holding both the [+] and [–] buttons. “Backup RAM Clear” will appear on the LCD display panel while the data is being reset. IMPORTANT 82 • Executing the System Reset function will erase all internal memory settings ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ■ Troubleshooting Something not working as it should? In many cases what appears to be a malfunction can be traced to a simple error that can be remedied immediately. Before assuming that your PortaTone is faulty, please check the following points. PROBLEM • The speakers produce a “pop” sound whenever the power is turned ON or OFF. • Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION • This is normal and is no cause for alarm. • You are probably exceeding the instrument’s maximum polyphony. The PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 can play up to 28 notes at the same time — including split, dual, auto-accompaniment, and multi pad notes. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. The same applies to the 26-note polyphony of the PSR-2700 sampled voices. • Auto accompaniment won’t function properly. No lower keyboard sound. • Auto accompaniment won’t sound right if you’re using SINGLE type fingering when the SINGLE mode is not selected (page 27). • Are you sure you’re playing in the Auto-Accompaniment section of the keyboard? • Are you playing chords that the PSR-1700 and PSR-2700 can recognize (see chord types on pages 26, 27, and 28)? • The selected voice does not sound when the keyboard is played. • The orchestration part to which the voice is assigned must be turned ON (page 11). • Make sure that the voice volume parameter for the orchestration part to which the voice is assigned is set to an appropriate level (page 14). • Voice parameter changes do not affect the desired voice. • The edit mode for the voice to which the changes are to be applied must be turned ON (page 13). • No sound when rhythm started. • Some sections of some styles have no data in the rhythm track. Try turning Auto Accompaniment on and fingering an appropriate chord — the Auto Accompaniment should begin to play. • Song Memory track indicator does not go out when the track is cleared. • You may have executed the clear function from a point in the middle of the track, thus only clearing the data after that point. Press the [RESET] button to go to the beginning of the track, then clear. • No sound when the keyboard is played. • LOCAL OFF is selected for the left- or right-hand section of the keyboard. Set to LOCAL ON (page 76). ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 83 Index + and – buttons ................................. 10 G R A Gate time ........................................... 51 GM System Level 1 ......................... 342 Receive modes, MIDI ........................ 74 Record functions ............................... 39 Recording samples (PSR-2700) ....... 66 Registration memory ......................... 37 Reset, song memory ......................... 44 Revoice ............................................. 34 Rewrite setting .................................. 55 Accompaniment control .................... 29 Accompaniment & melody playback . 43 Accompaniment structure ................. 31 Accompaniment track recording, realtime ......................................... 40 Auto accompaniment ........................ 24 Auto harmony .................................... 16 H Harmony ............................................ 16 Headphones ........................................ 6 I B Input level, sampling (PSR-2700) ..... 63 Introduction (intro) ............................. 30 Backup batteries ................................. 5 Beat indicator .................................... 29 Breaks ............................................... 30 K C L Chord 1 mode, fingering ................... 26 Chord 2 mode, fingering ................... 27 Clear, song memory/custom accompaniment/multi pad ............. 54 Clock mode, MIDI .............................. 75 Connections for sampling (PSR-2700) 63 Connectors, MIDI .............................. 73 Control, MIDI ..................................... 73 Custom accompaniment ................... 47 Level check mode, sampling (PSR-2700) ................... 63 LCD display panel ............................... 9 Load from disk .................................. 60 Local & MIDI output .......................... 76 D Data backup ........................................ 4 Data dial ............................................ 10 Delete disk file ................................... 61 Demo playback ................................... 7 Digital sampling (PSR-2700) ............. 63 Disk demo ........................................... 8 Disk operations ................................. 56 Disk Orchestra Collection disks ........ 62 DSP depth ......................................... 15 DSP depth, sample (PSR-2700) ....... 69 DSP type ........................................... 22 Dual mode ......................................... 12 M Main A and B sections ...................... 30 Mapping samples (PSR-2700) .......... 70 Measure number ............................... 44 Melody track recording, realtime ....... 42 Metronome ........................................ 28 MIDI ................................................... 73 MIDI implementation chart .............. 340 Minus-one playback .......................... 62 Modulation ........................................ 19 Multi mode, fingering ......................... 27 Multi pads .......................................... 45 Music stand ......................................... 6 N Number buttons ................................ 10 O E Editing procedure ................................ 9 Editing samples (PSR-2700) ............. 68 Effects ............................................... 17 Ending ............................................... 31 Error messages ................................. 81 Expression ........................................ 72 F Fade-in & Fade-out ........................... 32 File extension .................................... 58 File name .......................................... 59 File types ........................................... 58 Fill-ins ................................................ 30 Fingering, auto accompaniment ........ 25 Floppy disks, using ........................... 56 Formatting disks ................................ 57 Freeze ............................................... 38 Full mode, fingering .......................... 28 Function button ................................... 9 84 Keyboard percussion ........................ 18 Octave ............................................... 14 One touch setting .............................. 36 Orchestration ..................................... 11 Overall control ................................... 20 P Pan .................................................... 15 Pan, sample (PSR-2700) .................. 69 Panel Controls .................................... 2 Pedal assign ..................................... 72 Percussion kit list ............................ 338 Pitch bend ......................................... 18 Power supply ...................................... 5 Q S Sample pads (PSR-2700) ................. 67 Sampled voice name (PSR-2700) .... 67 Sampling frequency (PSR-2700) ...... 64 Save to disk ...................................... 58 Selecting & playing voices ................ 11 Single mode ...................................... 11 Single modes, fingering .................... 27 Song memory .................................... 39 Specifications .................................. 343 Split & Dual modes ........................... 12 Split modes ....................................... 12 Split point change ............................. 20 Split point, auto accompaniment ....... 25 Standard MIDI file disks .................... 62 Star/stop mode, MIDI ........................ 75 Step recording ................................... 50 Step size ........................................... 50 Stopping the accompaniment ........... 31 Straight start ...................................... 29 Style list ............................................. 78 Style selection ................................... 24 Supplied demonstration disk ............. 60 Sustain .............................................. 72 Synchro start ..................................... 29 System reset ..................................... 82 T Tempo control ................................... 28 Touch sensitivity ................................ 23 Track buttons .................................... 33 Transmit channels, MIDI ................... 76 Transpose ......................................... 21 Trigger level, sampling (PSR-2700) .. 65 Troubleshooting ................................ 83 Tuning ............................................... 21 Tuning samples (PSR-2700) ............. 68 V Voice & polyphony list ....................... 77 Voice assignment .............................. 13 Volume .............................................. 14 Volume, accompaniment .................. 32 Volume, sample (PSR-2700) ............ 69 Y Yes/no confirmation .......................... 10 Quantization ...................................... 53 Quick play ......................................... 62 ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Percussion Kit List * “<——” indicates the content is the same as that of Standard Kit. * Only 1 note can be played at a time when Keyboard Percussion is engaged. * The number in parentheses () after the percussion kit name is the MIDI program number. Note# 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 338 * The corresponding MIDI note numbers for the notes listed in the chart below are actually one octave lower. For example, the MIDI note number for note #36 (C1) in the chart is note #24 (C0). Note 1: Standard (0) 2: Room (8) 3: Rock (16) 4: Electronic (24) C1 C#1 D1 D#1 E1 F1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 A#1 B1 C2 C#2 D2 D#2 E2 F2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 A#2 B2 C3 C#3 D3 D#3 E3 F3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 A#3 B3 C4 C#4 D4 D#4 E4 F4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 A#4 B4 C5 C#5 D5 D#5 E5 F5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 A#5 B5 C6 C#6 D6 D#6 E6 F6 Click (Square wave) Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Swirl W/Attack Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum H Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum L Bass Drum H Hard Closed Rim Shot Snare L Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Voice ‘One’ Voice ‘Two’ Voice ‘Three’ Voice ‘Four’ Voice ‘Are You Sure?’ <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Snare Room L <—— Bass Drum Room L <—— Bass Drum Room M Bass Drum Room H <—— Snare Room M <—— Snare Room H Room Tom 1 <—— Room Tom 2 <—— Room Tom 3 <—— Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 <—— Room Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Snare Rock L <—— Bass Drum Rock L <—— Bass Drum Rock M Bass Drum Rock H <—— Snare Rock M <—— Snare Rock H Rock Tom 1 <—— Rock Tom 2 <—— Rock Tom 3 <—— Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 <—— Rock Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal <—— Hi-Q Snare Gate L <—— Bass Drum Gate L <—— Bass Drum Gate M Bass Drum Gate H <—— Snare Gate M <—— Snare Gate H Electronic Tom 1 <—— Electronic Tom 2 <—— Electronic Tom 3 <—— Electronic Tom 4 Electronic Tom 5 <—— Electronic Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Scratch H Scratch L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| Note# 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 Note 5: Analog (25) 6: Jazz (32) 7: Brush (40) 8: Classic (48) C1 C#1 D1 D#1 E1 F1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 A#1 B1 C2 C#2 D2 D#2 E2 F2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 A#2 B2 C3 C#3 D3 D#3 E3 F3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 A#3 B3 C4 C#4 D4 D#4 E4 F4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 A#4 B4 C5 C#5 D5 D#5 E5 F5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 A#5 B5 C6 C#6 D6 D#6 E6 F6 <—— <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal <—— Hi-Q Snare Analog L <—— Bass Drum Analog L <—— Bass Drum Analog M Bass Drum Analog H Closed Rim Shot Analog Snare Analog M <—— Snare Analog H Analog Tom 1 Analog Hi-hat Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog Hi-hat Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog Hi-hat Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 <—— Analog Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Scratch H Scratch L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Natural Tom 1 Dark Hi-Hat Closed Natural Tom 2 Dark Hi-Hat Pedal Natural Tom 3 Dark Hit Hat Open Natural Tom 4 Natural Tom 5 <—— Natural Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Brush Slap L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Brush Slap H <—— Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Dark Hi-Hat Closed Brush Tom 2 Dark Hi-Hat Pedal Brush Tom 3 Dark Hit Hat Open Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 <—— Brush Tom 6 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Snare Classic L <—— Gran Casa L <—— Gran Casa M Gran Casa H <—— Snare Classic M <—— Snare Classic H Natural Tom 1 Dark Hi-Hat Closed Natural Tom 2 Dark Hi-Hat Pedal Natural Tom 3 Dark Hit Hat Open Natural Tom 4 Natural Tom 5 Hand Cymbal Long L Natural Tom 6 Hand Cymbal Short L <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Hand Cymbal Long H <—— Hand Cymbal Short H <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 339 MIDI Implementation Chart [Portable Keyboard] Model: PSR-1700/PSR-2700 MIDI Implementation Chart Function Transmitted Recognized Basic Channel Default Changed 1~16 CH 1~16 CH 1~16 CH (*1) 1~16 CH (*1) Mode Default Messages Altered Mode 3 X ***************** (*1) X X : True voice 0~127 ***************** 0~127 0~127 Velocity Note on Note off O 9nH, v=1~127 X 9nH, v=0 O 9nH, v=1~127 X 9nH, v=0 or 8nH After Touch key’s Ch’s X X X O (*2) O O O (*3) O O O O O O X O X O X X O (*6) O X O (*4) O O O O O O O O (*5) O O O O O (*7) O O (*8) Program Change : True # O 0~127 ***************** O 0~127 0~127 (*9) System Exclusive O (*10) O (*10) System : Song Position : Song Select Common : Tune X X X X X X System : Clock Real Time : Commands O O (*12) O (*11) O (*12) Aux X O O X X O O X Note Number Pitch Bender Control Change 0, 32 1 6, 38 7 10 11 64 66 84 90 91 96 97 100, 101 120 121 : Local ON/OFF : All Notes Off Messages : Active Sense : Reset Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY 340 Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO Date: 1993. 11. 1 Version: 1.00 Remarks Bank select MSB, LSB Modulation depth Data entry MSB, LSB Volume Pan Expression Sustain Sostenuto Portamento control Reverb send level RPN data increment RPN data decrement RPN MSB, LSB All sound off Reset all controllers O: Yes X: No ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| *1. The following modes can be set individually for each channel via the panel control: Mode 00: Reception OFF. Mode 01: Direct tone generator control. Mode 02: Same as keyboard note on/off operation. Mode 03: Same as auto-accompaniment chord fingering. Mode 04: Same as the lowest-note (bass note) played in the auto-accompaniment chord fingerings. *2. Channel pressure handled as vibrato. *3. For bank selection transmission only the MSB changes. The LSB is fixed at 00H. *4. Bank select reception. The bank select MSB is used for melody voice and rhythm voice switching. The bank select LSB is ignored. MSB 00H: GM melody voice. MSB 01H: Sample voice (PSR-2700). MSB 7FH: GM rhythm voice. The default for all the channels excepting channel 10 is 00H. Bank select reception with channel 10 is not possible since channel 10 is assigned to the rhythm accompaniment. However, bank select reception with channel 10 will be possible when you do the following operation: turning the POWER back on while holding the C1 key down. When the bank select MSB is 01H … 7EH, all subsequent key-ons received will be ignored. No voice change will occur when only a bank select is received. When a program change is received the latest bank select value is used. *5. Portamento control is effective only when Reception is set in the Multi mode. *6. A pitch bend sensitivity message is transmitted when a panel pitch bend range setting is made. Pitch bend sensitivity: BnH, 64H, 00H, 65H, 00H *7. RPN receives the following data: Pitch bend sensitivity: BnH, 64H, 00H, 65H, 00H Default: 02H, 00H Fine tuning: BnH, 64H, 01H, 65H, 00H Default: 40H, 00H Coarse tuning: BnH, 64H, 02H, 65H, 00H Default: 40H, 00H Null: BnH, 64H, 7FH, 65H, 7FH *8. Reset all controllers. Pitch bend, channel pressure, modulation, expression, sustain, and sostenuto are returned to their default values. All RPN data is set to NULL. Portamento is reset. *9. GM melody voices 0 through 127 become panel voices 1 through 128. Sample voices 0 through 127 become panel sample voices 1 through 128. (PSR-2700) Rhythm voices 0, 8, 16, 24, 25, 32, 40, and 48 become panel voices 1 through 8. *10. Exclusive. <GM1 System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H All parameters except MIDI Master Tuning are reset to their default values. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H Allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (universal system exclusive). mm is used as the MIDI Master Volume value (ll is ignored). The default value for mm is 7FH. This message is receive-only. <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H Allows the pitch of all channels to be changed simultaneously (panel tuning). mmll is used as the MIDI Master Tuning value, an the actual tuning is shown by the expression: T=Mx200/256-100 Where T is the actual tuning value in cents. M is decimal value represented by 1-byte using bits 0…3 of mm as the MSB and bits 0…3 of ll as the LSB. The default values of mm and ll are 07H and 0FH, respectively. n and cc are also recognized. This value is not reset by a GM System ON or Reset All Controllers message. This message is transmitted and received. <DOC On> F0H, 43H, 73H, 01H, 14H, F7H Reception only. MIDI IN channels 1 through 16 apply to the DOC data. The panel voice assignments are not affected. <Panel Control> Dual data change: Dual ON/OFF: Harmony/Effect: DSP type: Chord/Bass: F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 04H, <Data>, F7H F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 05H, <Data>, F7H F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 0EH, <Data>, F7H F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 0EH, 00H, 01H, <Data>, F7H F0H, 43H, 76H, 17H, 0BH, <Data>, F7H *11. Internal/external clock selectable. *12. Operation when a start/stop command is received is determined by the RECEIVE CHANNEL, CLOCK, AND COMMAND panel settings. 0. Start/stop command ignored. 1. Auto-accompaniment start/stop. 2. Song memory start/stop. Continue neither transmitted nor received. ■ GM System Level 1 The existing MIDI protocol allows performance and other data to be transferred between different instruments, even if they are from different manufacturers. This means, for example, that sequence data that was originally created to control a tone generator from manufacturer A can also be used to control a different tone generator from manufacturer B. Since the voice allocation in different devices from different manufacturers is usually different, however, appropriate program change data must be transmitted to select the right voices. The General MIDI protocol was developed to minimize confusion and the need for re-programming when playing software created by one MIDI device on another. This has been achieved by defining a standard voice allocation in which the same or similar voices are accessed by the same program change numbers or MIDI channels. The current standard recognized by the International MIDI Association is known as “GM System Level 1.” The PSR-1700/PSR-2700 voice allocation complies with the GM System Level 1 standard. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 341 Specifications Keyboards: 61 standard-size keys (C1~C6) with touch response. REGISTRATION MEMORY: MEMORIZE 1~8 FREEZE Auxiliary Jacks: MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, PEDAL 1/2, SAMPLE IN (MIC/LINE: PSR-2700), AUX OUT (L+R/L, R), HEADPHONES VOICE: AWM128 voices: 01~128 MULTI PADS: Main Amplifiers: Polyphony: 28 STOP 8W x 2 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION: 1~8 1~4 (including 2 chord-match types). AUX OUT output: 680Ω impedance. VOL: 00~24 OCTAVE: -2~2 DSP DEPTH: 00~15 PAN: –7~7 DEMO: SONG #: Chain Play, 1~8 (8 songs) 12cm (4-3/4") x 2 START/STOP ONE TOUCH SETTING ORCHESTRATION: R1/R2/L1/L2 Speakers: Backup Batteries: SONG MEMORY: HARMONY: TYPE 01~10, ON/OFF MEASURE # EFFECT: TYPE 01~12, ON/OFF TRACK: ACCOMP, MELODY 1~6 Four SUM-3, “AA” size, R6P or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H): Setup: SONG: POWER: ON/OFF MASTER VOLUME: MIN~MAX RESET (STEP BWD), PLAY/STOP (STEP FWD) 1045mm x 412mm x 164mm (41-1/8" x 16-1/4" x 6-1/2") Weight: PEDAL ASSIGN: 1, 2 OVERALL CONTROL: RECORDING: REC, REWRITE SETTING, CLEAR, STEP REC, QUANTIZE, GATE TIME, STEP SIZE 12.0kg (26.4 lbs.) excluding batteries Supplied Accessories: ■ PSR-1700/2700 Demonstration Disk Demo Songs (4 songs): 01~04 Styles (8 styles with registration data): 05~12 Multi Pads (8 sets): 13~20 Sound Effects (4 sets): 21~24 ■ PSR-2700 Demonstration Disk (PSR-2700) Demo Songs (2 songs with sampled voices): 01~02 TEMPO METRONOME: ON/OFF SPLIT POINT TRANSPOSE: -12~12 TUNING: -16~16 DSP TYPE: 1~8 TOUCH: SENSE 1~5, TOUCH RESPONSE ON/OFF PITCH BEND: -12~12 MODULATION: 1~3 DIGITAL SAMPLING (PSR-2700): VOICE #: 01~128 (26-note polyphony), VOICE NAME, FREQ, TRIGGER LEVEL, PITCH, MAPPING, REC, CLEAR, INPUT LEVEL SAMPLE PADS (PSR-2700): 1~4 DISK: AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT: 100 styles: 00~99 (00: Custom Accompaniment) FILE #, SAVE PART, MINUS ONE SELECT, LOAD, SAVE, DELETE, FORMAT AUTO ACCOMP: ON/OFF FINGERING: 1~5 ACCOMP VOLUME: 00~24 REVOICE TRACK: RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, RHYTHMIC CHORD 1/2, PAD CHORD, PHRASE 1/2 ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL: SYNCSTART/STOP, START/STOP, FADE IN/ OUT, INTRO, FILL IN 1, FILL IN 2, BREAK, ENDING, VARIATION A/B ■ Music Stand ■ Owner’s Manual Optional Accessories: ■ Headphones HPE-3, HPE-150 ■ Foot switch FC4, FC5 ■ Foot controller FC7 ■ Keyboard stand L-2C QUICK PLAY: START/STOP, MINUS ONE ARE YOU SURE ?: YES, NO LCD Display Panel: Number Buttons: [+], [–], [0]~[9], [+/–] Data Dial MIDI: RECEIVE CH/CL/COM, TRANSMIT CH L/R (LOCAL/MIDI OUT) 343 * Specifications subject to change without notice. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, 8. basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 1. 9. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain; or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 7. 15. 6. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: • Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. • Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. • In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Dit produkt is gefabriceerd in overeenstemming met de radiostoringsvoorschriften van de Richtlijn van de Raad (82/499/EEG). ΑΥΤΗ Η ΣΥΣΚΕΥΗ ΑΝΤΑΠΟΚΡΙΝΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΤΩΝ Ο∆ΗΓΙΩΝ ΤΗΣ ΕΥΡΩΠΑΙΚΗΣ ΟΙΚΟΝΟΜΙΚΗΣ ΚΟΙΝΟΤΗΤΑΣ 82/499/ Ε.Ο.Κ.. Este produto está de acordo com o radio de interferencia frequente requiridos do Conselho Diretivo 82/499/EEC. Dette apparat overholder det gaeldende EF-direktiv vedrørende radiostøj. Cet appareil est conforme aux prescriptions de la directive communautaire 87/308/CEE. Diese Geräte entsprechen der EG-Richtlinie 82/499/EWG und/oder 87/ 308/EWG. This product complies with the radio frequency interference requirements of the Council Directive 82/499/EEC and/or 87/308/EEC. Questo apparecchio è conforme al D.M.13 aprile 1989 (Direttiva CEE/87/ 308) sulla soppressione dei radiodisturbi. Este producto está de acuerdo con los requisitos sobre interferencias de radio frequencia fijados por el Consejo Directivo 87/308/CEE. YAMAHA CORPORATION M.D.G., EMI Division © 1993 Yamaha Corporation VQ 64120 JDBBR0PO1.3CP